Home

Ateis Studio

1. Trigger Control Message Settim Chime Settings V Preposition GNGSTONS WAV Postposition Talk Mode This section is settings about chimes e Chime List Open a settings window to build up list of message for selection e Pre announcement Enable To enable or disable pre announcement e Pre announcement Chime Selection Select a message for pre announcement e Post announcement Enable Enable or disable post announcement e Post announcement Chime Selection Selection a message for post announcement Talk Mode There are two mode available Push Push and hold the key for paging request release the key to end paging Lock First push for paging request if request is grant then start paging push again to end paging Remote Plug in It need to do a Remote Plug in to make audio processor recognize this remote devices See the topic Remote Plug in for more details 2012 ATEIS 160 Ateis Studio Assign to Design Objects The device object in design window needs map to physical device then the configuration of the device can be set to the physical one Click Name field of device list to select correspond device object Refer to topic search and settings for more detail 4 2 5 URC AS 4 2 5 1 Overview ee hee ae The URC AS can be fully programmed via Ateis Studio to adjust every setting you want volume mute preset components a
2. 121 421 4 Rear Pane EEN 121 42719 RUC T WEE 123 4 21 59 OVGIrVIQUE EE 123 42 1 5 Pront Panels eem EE 124 e Rear Pana EE 124 422 DNM ett erect erect cni uS eL LI E ciues e e PUE 126 4 2 2 1 OVENI O E EE 126 422 2 InstallatiGlassuuetoie ndo He peret e ee bate Eua ceder icol e pee RI acutos nr tvi tele eee te 126 42 2 9 Characteristics ec e et Edge veces dees era ey erc etat eese sg ety ecce 129 2012 ATEIS Contents 5 4 2 2 4 CONT COUT AEN OW em sss aeiia e iea aE 129 4225 OQp ration Notice cese a E EES 136 4 2 2 6 Two DNM on the Same DD 136 A23 IK e 141 rs OG foe Mm DIR I A DETTO DELL 141 4 2 3 2 Control Panel uo eee bu e e i 142 420 Character CS uuo iei totae te dato iati taa eee eee Oe eee eee aee 143 4 2 3 4 Configurallop E 144 A24 rk RE 150 4201 OUOEFVULIO EE 150 4 242 Control AUN H EE 151 4 24 93 Characters s Eee ttbi o oi ER e cbe 152 4 2 4 4 Copfigura OI E E LA 153 A29 URCAS essa E en a ceeds eae ees tesis tesi eee pore hve rd Eos des or DOT LI MIELE OT 160 22 9r1 QVE PULOT S odo edit au E EE 160 4 2 5 2 Zentre Panels a ot o to ee ee ons 161 42939 edu ER ei d d Te 161 4 2 5 4 Bette TECH d TN E 162 A20 URGP EE 167 BZ ON GOO EVO EE EE 167 4262 CA heit de 167 4 2 6 3 Configura d Tu E 168 Ar COD Du ED ai NO E DER E E RS 169 4 20 JOVE EFVIO EE 169 4 2 4 2 Control Pano E 170 42 09 JOHAfacterislicS 5 Dee ee 171 LU ME OD NT nno nne ec E 172 AZO e EH I A ERIT TELE 172
3. 5 VDC e Monitoring resistor 4 7k Ohm O 2012 ATEIS 4 Ateis Studio Evacuation Inputs Voltage Mode On Voltage Voltage Current Jl 05 Working Temperature e 0 C 40 C 4 1 3 5 3rd Party Control The following table list 3rd Party Control protocols IDA8C Supported Protocol Ateis 3rd B Part Ethernet UDP UDP Port es Read Write value of parameters Zeie 19761 e Stepped adjustment for parameters Level control Paging Read Monitoring Status Modbus PDC RS485 PDC Port 1 2 E Play Message Logic I O Control 4 1 3 6 Peripherals Following table is the peripherals supported by IDA8SL Device Connection Fireman MIC EEN T Paging where operator is close to IDA8C 31 PDC_ 0 PPM AS 31 PDC Remote console for with paging ability PSS AS 1 PDC Remote console for Paging Event Triggering Element Control Master Sub Preset Control URC AS 4 PDC Remote console for Master Sub Preset Controlling Element Controlling PDC URGP PDC 1 PDC Evacuation Input extension 1 PDC Auto noise gain for audio signals PPM IT5 Ethernet ce Paging Element Control Master Sub Preset Control ond Ethernet Eth Limit Parameters Control Master Sub Preset Control 31 PDC Wall mounted cabinet i s console with 8 buttons CD16 31 PDC Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console with 16 buttons 2012 ATEIS Product Features 55 Device Connection Max Num
4. Pack Align Top lm Align Left Space Align Right B Align Top rh Z Order Align Bottom el Align Right iz Size kx Align Horizontal Center ol Align Bottom Center t H Align Vertical Center aa Align Horizontal Center m B Align Vertical Center You can select several elements by maintaining left click and move the mouse you will have a selection square then you can align all the elements This function uses a reference which depends of the reference mode e Pack P Pack Left ZS J Pack Top Pack Left Pack Right W PackTop Pack Bottom d Pack Right a Pack Bottom You can select several elements by maintaining left click and move the mouse you will have a selection square then you can pack the elements This function uses a reference which depends of the reference mode e Space iE 2012 ATEIS ome Ateis Studio Space Across r 7 Order Space Horizontal Enlarge Space Across iz Size Space Horizontal Shrink Space Horizontal Enlarge Center Space Down Space Horizontal Shrink e Group Space Vertical Enlarge m space Down d UnGroup Space Vertical Shrink Space Vertical Enlarge Space Vertical Shrink You can select several elements by maintaining left click and move the mouse you will have a selection square then you can define the space between all the elements It is interesting if you pack the elements first e Z Order Bring Forward One el Size 5 Sen
5. 0 OutputLevel 0 1 Rouing 1 1 The initial value of Routing element is on for the Input 1 Output 1 Input 2 Output 2 Input N Output N the others are all with initial value off Minimum Maximum Precision pq 900 200 01 NECEM ee 900 200 01 LE ve Element Description e Input Mute Mutes or un mutes the channel input e nput Level Sets the input level of the channel Output Mute Mutes or un mutes the channel output Output Level Sets the master output level of the channel e Routing Turns on off the input on the particular output channel 6 16 Netinput Component Template Main DSP Components ER DSP Component ER Mixer GJ Net Input P3 A 1 8 DLC 17 24 fh D 25 32 3 E 33 40 0b F 41 48 ER Net Output Component Appearance O 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 4e Description This component transfer audio signals over Ateis Net The signal goes into a channel of Net Output component and is able to retrieve from output with the same channel or any Net Input component i e the signal path is one to many relationship There are 48 channels available to carry signals they are numbered and identified by the number For example a signal goes into channel 1 of component Net Output A you can get it from the component Net Input A channel 1 The following article is a simple example using IDA8
6. 222 Ateis Studio 5 1 8 Properties Open the window of Properties which allow you to inspect various parameters of an object in graphic editor PPM AS Manager a Open the window of PPM AS Manager to have a overview of all PPM AS in configuration file Message Library Open the window of Message Library to manage message files in the software 3rd Party Control List Open the window of 3rd Party Control List to have a overview of elements that are 3rd party controllable 3rd Party Control Command Open the window of 3rd Party Control Command that display 3rd party control string of focused element Device Management Open the window of Device Management that discovery the devices over network and maintenance Logo Library rA Open the window of Log Library to manage Logos for Ateis devices User Management t Open the window of User Management for editing the users of configuration file Geometry Zoom In Zoom Qut Zoom Original Room Ratio Ruler Ruler Unit Show Grid Pixels E Q 100 S Snap to Grid Layer Layer Default Layer Im B e Zoom In Q 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 223 Zoom in the graphic editor e Zoom Out Q Zoom out the graphic editor e Zoom Original LA Zoom to original size of graphic editor e Room Ratio Set graphic editor to a specific ratio e Ruler E To show or hide ruler of graphic editor I IDASC DSP Configuration IDA8C 1 po t the oo
7. O 2012 ATEIS 305 Ateis Studio e Axis o X Input signal level dB o Y Output signal level dB e Control Points o Blue Adjust Threshold Compressor o Red Adjust Threshold Limiter 6 4 5 DNM Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component ER Delay Advanced EHE Delay Basic ww Auto Noise Gain A N G HH Compressor Compressor Stereo H Component Appearance Description DNM component is basically the same as A N G component but it use DNM microphone to be the S M input of A N G 4 Control Window O 2012 ATEIS Mm sain dB Paing Mic Level Hz db 700 0 Element Properties MinGan 6 0 MaxGan 60 Sampling Tme 50 Level AGC Level Calibration Proceeding Finish Dead Zone Increase Zone Zone Level C Sensing Mic Level 50 Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off 100 0 Output Level 100 0 Differential Level 100 0 2012 ATEIS E SEnsing Mic Level Components of Audio Processor 307 ET OX White Moise aan oise P GC Level Threshold Level dB dB We ret Sampling Time Ome ETE i r 40 0 dB Differential Level dB dB ado 1000 Sitt 10000 308 Ateis Studio ve Element Description e Min Gain The minimum AGC level compensation e Max Gain The maximum AGC level compensation e Sampling Time Determine the period time between two ambien
8. Protocol Ateis 3rd p Part Ethernet UDP UDP Port es Read Write value of parameters SE 19761 e Stepped adjustment for parameters bere Ethernet TCP TCP Port 502 e Level control PDC RS485 PDC Port 1 e Paging 2012 ATEIS EM Ateis Studio 4 1 2 4 1 2 1 Protocol ma e Protocol Lam Read Monitoring Status Read Evacuation Status Play Message Logic I O Control IDA8SAB Overview CD 16 Fire Panel BGM CD Player Redundancy Network ATEIS NET E WWW WWW gt Redundancy Speaker Line A B i 1 Zone 1A e IDA8SX Zone 1B Backup S Amplifier Q IDA8SX Zone ns Zone BA Amplifier E x8 x ue Zone 8B gxindjno 12e uo gl jndu eur euoudsja L The IDA8SAB Slave units provide audio in and output expansion of the IDA8 Systems using a secured 48 channel audio and data network over CATS or fiber optic Each IDA8SAB expands the IDA8 System with an additional 8 audio inputs and outputs 2 additional security microphone consoles PSS AS and security programmable switching contacts 2012 ATEIS Product Features 41 The Network cards that comes with the unit provides a redundant 48 channels audio and data connection Atels Net between one controller and a maximum of 32 IDA8SX Slave units in one rack system 4 1 2 2 Front Panel System Fault LED This LED lights on when a system fault fault is detected G Fault LED This LED lights on when a
9. ResponseTime 0 0 Hold Time ve Element Description e Trigger On Show the input signal is active or not If the input signal continuously greater than Threshold over Response Time the trigger on value will be set to 1 and the corresponding logic output is set to hi Threshold The threshold to determine audio input is active or not e Volume The volume of the input signal e Response Time The time to determine audio input is active or not Hold Time The time to determine audio input is active or not 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 430 6 25 Telephone Card 6 25 1 TC Transmit ve Component Template Main DSP Components Fi d DSP Component H JP Page Control o ER Recorder 2 R RS485 Audio ere Selector er Signal Monitor vo ae Telephone Card mH S Voxnet Control GJ Custom Component Device ModuldDAsc Component Appearance Description This component allow Ateis Dewce to dial or receive phone calls it need to work with telephone card hardware The following items are definition of pins on component Pins on top side Rd Redial if state of signal from lo to hi F Flash to make a 3 way calling active if state of signal from lo to hi Pins on bottom side Rd Ready status o Set status F Fault status C Connect status D Dialing status Ri Ringing status B Busy status 2012 ATEIS o Ateis Studio
10. There are three types of redundancy unit e RU MAIN Switch digital audio and processing matrix like IDA8C paging consoles and interfaces e RU CTL Switch security and normal contacts IN and OUT e RU PDC Switch auxiliary audio IN and OUT two additional paging consoles and telephone line The steps to configuration redundancy system in IDA8 system listed below 1 Setup H W connection redundancy system 2012 ATEIS Product Features 113 2 Search primary and secondary IDA8C using Ateis Studio and connect to them Device Management 3rd Party Control Command 3rd Party Control List 2 Device Management Devices Type ere Serial Number Redundancy Addr Deve status Nome Communication ECS 1 ECS 1 1 192 168 100 88 Normal Dicini Ateis Fa IDASC 1 IDASC 1 1 192 168 102 232 Ateis IDASC 1 IDASC ila ah 192 168 102 68 g wes Reverse Ateis Torna Redundancy IDASC 1 IDASC 1 1 192 168 102 126 Normal e Read Version Update Telephone Card Search o Search den Clear Clear Search Timeout Interval 5 5 Search By IP ATEIS NET Depl 3 Select the IDA8C to be primary Click button Rendundancy on functions window Communication 4 LAP G2T 1 LAP G2T 1 1 2299689 192 168 100 218 Normal e Disconnect Ateis Fault Update IDASC 1 IDASC 1 1 246 192 168 102 232 Fault z p Ateis Normal d Telephone Card beso EGS 1591 131 192 168 100
11. Status Frequency Act There are faults in audio processor 5 EVAC Indicator Light up when the system is under evacuation paging 6 Power Indicator This LED light up when the CD8 is powered on 7 Monitoring Speaker This embedded speaker to play chime when paging or monitor signal from audio processor it needs to work with rs485 output component to get audio signal from other DSP components in audio processor 8 Fireman Microphone Connector DIN Connector for fireman microphone connection 9 Music Input Connector There are two music input channels of CDPA Users can select one of them by pressing music selection button 10 Talk Indicator This LED light up if PCP is allowed to paging on the other word the paging request has been acknowledged PN Sometime after paging request is granted zones under paging still can be occupied by other sources In such a case the talk led still light up but you can check busy LED to know the situation 11 Talk Button Press this button to request paging There are two modes for this button push to talk and lock 12 All Call Release Button This button is used to select or deselect all keys 13 All Call Release Indicator This indicator lights up if all keys are selected 14 Busy Indicator 1 8 Show the status of zone Color Status Frequency Activity Red Permanent Priority of the zone is lower than other sources Blinking Priority of the zone i
12. o Bypass Monitoring LED Show the monitoring function is enabled or not This LED lights on if monitoring of IDA8 is disabled by user T Touch Screen 3 5 Color touch panel offer a graphical interface for user to control or read the status of system There is a multi layered menu on it to get set parameters or change settings of device w ESC Button To Navigate menu of touch screen OK Button To Navigate menu of touch screen 13 Up Button To Navigate menu of touch screen W Down Button To Navigate menu of touch screen 15 Plus Button To Navigate menu of touch screen 16 Down Button To Navigate menu of touch screen W Zone EVAC LEDs To show the audio channel is in EVAC paging or not Each LED is correspond to a output channel of Network Paging component for example 1st LED is for pin M1 2nd LED for pin M2 and so on 2012 ATEIS Product Features 33 U Zone Fault LEDs To show fault status of zone This LED light on if one of following faults is detected e Normal AMP Error e ine A Error e Line B Error e Backup AMP Error e AMP Line Leakage Error EVAC Reset Button Cancel the event triggered by EVAC button Power LED This LED lights on when IDA8C is power on ED Network LED Show the status of Ateis Net This LED lights on if more than two deployed IDA8 devices in Ateis Net E EVAC Button To trigger event bind with this button 4 1 1 3 Rear Panel WEE bk CT a z CH
13. 10 w Speaker Zone Outputs There are 8 zones for speaker amp amplifier connection each zone consists of following connectors from left to right e connector of line A speaker e connector of line B speaker e connector of 100V audio coming from amplifier IDA8 output exactly the same audio signal to line A and B Two speakers can connect to one zone for redundancy purpose one connect to line A another connect to line B Both speaker lines are monitored that s mean if a damage of speaker is detected a global fault Line A B Error will be generated Backup Amplifier I Os Two backup amplifier connectors included 0 dB to amplifiers and 100V return from amplifiers Amplifier Zone Outputs 8 Zone OdB output to amplifiers Bypass Mode Outputs This port to share the bypass mode microphone signals through the IDA8C IDA8S network only needed when using fiber optic network PDC Peripherals Device Controller Connectors 2012 ATEIS Product Features Two RJ 45 connectors to connect consoles or peripheral devices For examples PSS AS URC AS PPM AS are connect to IDA8SAB wa this connector Oo Local Ateis Net Connectors Optional card to build a local dedicated IDA8C IDA8S network Configurable Audio I Os Two configurable OdB audio I O port A and B Each port is available to assemble an audio card There are 4 channels on each audio I O card Telephone Line Input A connector for telephone sig
14. 4 EVAC LED Light up when system is under evacuation paging 5 Touch Screen O 2012 ATEIS 152 Ateis Studio A back lit touch screen with 5 diagonal and 800 x 480 resolution contains 14 pages 12 keys for each pages can freely config to paging or adjustment parameters in audio processor 6 Left Button No function for the moment 7 Middle Button No function for the moment 8 Right Button Press and hold it for a while to calibrate touch screen 9 Monitoring Speaker This embedded speaker to play chime when paging or monitor signal from audio processor it needs to work with rs485 output component to get audio signal from other DSP components in audio processor 4 2 4 3 Characteristics d Case Dimension 250mm W x 140mm L x 75mm H Weight 1 1Kg Color RAL 016 Goose neck length with microphone 300 mm d Screen Diagonal 5 Resolution 800 x 480 r Power tem Voltage ___ Current Consumption Comment DC Input 18V 26V Typical 24V 200mA Microphone Output e Maximum level 6dBu e Output Impedance 100Ohm e THD 1kHz 1 e Bandwidth 3dB 100Hz 18kHz e Noise Gate Threshold 84dBu 24dBu e Target Output Level 0 e Max Output Level 54dBu 6dBu e Attack Time 8ms e Release Time 100ms 2012 ATEIS Product Features 153 va Front Panel Speaker e Impedance 4Ohm e Maximum Power 1kHz 1W e THD 1kHz lt 1 e Bandwidth 3
15. 9 4 3 If you already known the IP address of a device you can search it by that address Select the Device Management tab or open it through the menu View gt Device Management to open Device Management window Read Version To know which versions are loaded in the devices and which version are available with the current Ateis Studio software 1 Open Device Management Window 2 Search and Connect to the device 3 Click Read Version to open Version window _Firmware Unit Compatible Version Current Version 1 2 0 17 1 2 0 9 DSP 1 0 0 25 1 0 0 24 Net Card 2 0 1 1 2 0 1 1 FPGA 2 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 AEC 2 0 0 11 2 0 0 11 Telephone Card 1 0 0 1 Mone Click Read button to get version data from the device e Firmware Unit The firmware program unit in the device e Compatible Version Displays the version required by the installed software e Current Version Displays the firmware version of the device Update Firmware The purpose of update firmware is to match the version contained in your Ateis Studio software with the version contained in the hardware of the devices Read version to know if there is versions mismatching Then if needed proceed to the update Updating the Ateis Studio software sometimes makes necessary to update the audio processor firmware also To do this follow these steps 1 Open Device Management Window 2 Search and Connect to the device needs to update 2012 ATEIS 2
16. Device Modell WD Component Appearance O 2012 ATEIS a2 Ateis Studio Description The job of Network Paging component is to route input source signal to zones using priority arbitration The pins on left side represents the paging sources and the pins on right are zone Pins on top side are able to controls paging activity and pins on bottom output logic signals to tell the status of paging activity Each source can specify which zones want to paging when a source is request for paging not always get success because the zones required maybe already occupied by another source Network Cascading Paging Some application like station PA system requires a huge number of zones for paging It need to have multiple Ateis audio processor connected together using Ateis Net and for each DSP configuration of audio processor there is a Network Paging component in charge of paging tasks The following figure is an example to show that A1 CA A1 n AZ Gt AZ CA Ag Device ca Kei Device ca AA CA AA CA HA DM HA DH S SL L eng Hi Da Hi D 5 eeler L S Sal TOKAN x MA MA NH POG 1 ET PIX POG 1 POC 2 POG 3 PIX A WEE WEE E E E FTT TTT TTF wes ek dE RRE n pn mp Ip mn mp e Aal 3 err m mp re e st 1 2 3 d 5 LR e d Peai n en de Qo Pa E 5 br Double click the Network Paging component open the settings window the following sections describe f
17. GaeOn Of Sidechain Gain 0 350 350 01 dB hptGan 0 350 350 01 dB Td 20 900 350 0 1 dB Response Time 2 1 500 1 ms AtakTme 5 1 J 1 00 1 ms HodTim 200 1 500 1 ms Release Time 5 t 100 1 m Depth 200 1000 o 01 oe ve Element Description e Mute Mute the gate s module e Bypass owitch off the gate s operation e Gate On 2012 ATEIS O 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor Flash when the gate is active open Sidechain Gain Set the volume of the signal connected in the input S Input Gain Set the volume of the signal connected in the input I Thd Sets the threshold level input S above which Gate will open Response Time Adjust the time between the level s detection and the beginning of the Gate operation Attack Time Adjust the fade in time of the signal when Gate is working Hold Time Adjust the time between the end level s detection and the end of the Gate operation Release Time Adjust the fade out time of the signal when Gate is no longer working Depth Attenuate the level when the Gate is active 325 326 Ateis Studio 6 4 9 Limiter Limiter Stereo Component Template Main DSF Components Ste DSP Component BH Delay Advanced e H Delay Basic E Je Dynamic EX Auto Noise Gain A N G EH Compressor 1 Ducker Stereo E Expander EB Expand
18. Parameters d IE DSP Component lE AEC M p AEC This component is used to avoid reflected signals caused by acoustic echo between microphones and speakers in remote conference applications The control window of the AEC module is opened by a double click on the icon in the DESIGN AREA and appears like this 2012 ATEIS 276 Ateis Studio adad Le Peri Pert Peri IMM dr Reset fe ai L La Far End Near End Volume dB Near End Level dE p NLP NLP Threshold dB Noise Reduction En able Threshold AEC Coefficient Selector Function supplied for AEC controlled status It offers 4 functions Perform e Perform turn on the AEC function Bypass Hold e Bypass turn off the AEC function e Hold hold the parameters of the echo coefficient Reset the echo cancellation on the channel 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 277 Far End Vu meter Audio volume of the Far end audio signal Volume dB Near End Vu meter Volume dB dB Audio volume of the Near end audio signal volume adjustment of the near end audio signal NonLinear Process The purpose is to suppress the remain echo in complex environment It offers four functions e off NLP function off Near End Level 90 to 20 dB e soft weak intensity of remain echo suppression e medium medium intensity of remain echo suppression NLP Selector Soft Medium Aggressive Off e aggressive aggressive
19. Path C Program Files x86 ATEIS ATEIS Studio v1 0 0 67 Messages Be BEE Sample Rate kHz 16 ani GNGSTONS WAY You can select chime listed in grid table of PC tab or from Device tab The button Open allow you to change the directory for discovery the sound files 2012 ATEIS ao Ateis Studio Logic Out Trigger IE Network Paging General Settings Refreshing Condition Chime Logic Out Trigger Relay Audio In CH i Logic Out CH1 LogicOut CH 2 Logic Qut CH 3 Audio In CH 3 VM There 20 channel logic output for each Network Paging component this section shows the configuration about it e Start Generate a pulse to a specific logic out when paging begins Stop Generate a pulse to a specific logic out when paging stoped e ACK The specific logic output stay hi during paging session e Busy Check any of selected zoned if it is occupied by the other source with higher priority Fault The specific logic output stay hi if any selected zone is error Relay 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor o Sa Network Paging General Settings Refreshing Condition Chime Logic Out Trigger Relay d 14 gt n n 74 5 EN E EJ EN ks es It is able to output a logical hi to a specific output channel in condition of zone occupied by a specific source In the above figure logic out channel 1 will stay hi if
20. The center frequency to be cut Graphical Control Window Ju GFC Notch Filter em SES Te c i d em e Axis o X Frequency of output signal Hz o Y Level of input signal dB e Control Points o Blue Adjust element Frequency Horizontal and Level Vertical o Yellow Adjust element Bandwidth O 2012 ATEIS 354 Ateis Studio 6 7 7 Shelving Filter Component Template Main DSP Components gt DSP Component EET Filter o All Pass Filter Band Pass gp Crossover H Crossover Stereo DEN Input Ph Inverter Component Appearance Description Shelving Filter component implements a first order response and provide an adjustable boost or cut to frequencies above or lower than a certain point r Control Window va Element Properties 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 355 Teel 399 209 91 38 1000 10 2200 1 Hz Element Description todo e Mode Type of filtering high pass or low pass e Bypass Bypass the filter s function e Level The gain of audio signal e Frequency The frequency of cut amp Graphical Control Window Sa GFC Shelving Filter E na 1 R Oe LI S MS nm d S EW F e 4 a pa JI ET L EE VW a JE IU T m ga mm LM Ir E Lu Ir mm E Ett m Ett VW E SH EW SM 2mm LEN d Pa Er EN D T t i ee
21. oP da HH Voir Component Appearance ve Description This component corresponds to the Evacuation Input of IDA8C S output logic signal be the other logic component s input r Control Window 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 375 UNI External Control Hardware Settings Evac in Monitor Mode MASA Response Time 50 Latch Mode Open Lo Open Lo Close Hi Close Hi Close Hi Close Hi Close Hi Close Hi Close Hi Parameters e Monitor Mode There are two options o Voltage Logic output of component trigger by a voltage polarization change o Contact Logic output of component trigger by a open or close the pin of connector in rear panel e Response Time Determine how quick of the system response for changing of hardware status from Open Lo to Close Hi or from Close Hi to Open Lo e Activation Specify this parameter to determine what hardware condition generate 1 output There are two chooses o Open Lo Component output 1 when contact open contact mode or voltage low voltage mode output O vise versa o Close Hi Component output 1 when contact close contact mode or voltage hi voltage mode output 1 vise versa 6 12 4 Event The components work with events will be listed in this section O 2012 ATEIS 376 Ateis Studio 6 12 4 1 Trigger Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component Ste Logic Bl AND e HR Evac Boar
22. 0 200 200 01 dB Ovetoadthd LL 30 200 200 01 dB ve Element Description e Overload Indicates channel level above chosen Overload Threshold dB e Volume Meter showing the channel level e Mute Mutes or un mutes the output channel LED lit red with channel muted e Signal To indicate the channel is active or not 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 4m e Level Signal output level of the module e Overload thd Sets the threshold of the overload indicator 6 20 Page Control 6 20 1 S W Page Control Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component GJ Page Control EMET SAN Page Control ee Recorder s R5485 Audio gp Selector Device Madulelbi sc Component Appearance Q0 4 Ch Ch oh 00 EC fs 0 Rc Description With this component you can active and route the audio inputs to the outputs Caution this is not a mixer only one input can be routed to an output You can never have two inputs channels mixed to an output even if they have the same priority in this case the busy led of the lower channel number will light and theses channels won t be routed Each outputs work separately On each one output only the channels with the gate ON and with the highest priority will be routed r Control Window O 2012 ATEIS a20 Ateis Studio S Faze Control EFE LA EE ETE e e Pr t e en e e e e n Be EE PP OTE
23. 10 4100 10 Audio Depth 50 1000 0 01 Speech Gan o LL 600 200 01 Element Description ms ms ms ms 0 1 10 10 10 10 0 1 0 1 e Bypass owitches off the Ducker s operations e Active Light on when the Ducker is active Signal has been detected on input S e Thd Threshold of detection on the input channel S The input channel A is attenuate when input channel S goes above this threshold Advice To avoid unexpected attenuation don t set a low threshold level e Response Time Adjust the time between the S level s detection and the beginning of the Ducker s operation on the A signal Advice Don t set a long response time otherwise you won t hear the beginning the S signal as the first words of the speech e Attack Time Adjust the fade in time of the A signal when Duckers is working e Hold Time Adjust the time between the end S level s detection and the end of the Ducker s operation Advice Set enough Hold time to avoid unexpected background level during the speech s breaks e Release Time Adjust the fade out time of the A signal when Ducker s is no longer working e Audio Depth Adjusts the A level when the Ducker is active e Speech Gain Adjusts the S level when the Ducker is active Use the Ducker Component 2012 ATEIS 312 Ateis Studio As simple example we will set a system for a speaker with background music When the s
24. 2 Standard 3 Hat 4 Blue 5 Caramel 6 iMaginary 7 London Liquid Sky 8 Mc Skin 9 Memory Twins A Office2007 Black B Office2007 Blue C Office2007 Green D Pumpkin E Silver F Stardust a X Mas 2008 By changing skin you modify the global style colour and appearance of the windows You can choose one of the skin in the long list Here are examples of skins e Office 2003 Blue 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 233 DSP Component J Delay Advanced LB Delay Basic 25 Dynamic Equalizer Feedback t O 2012 ATEIS 234 Ateis Studio i COAICT File Edit View ey Component Operation Tools Window Help TTT TTT m IT Res O 2 Hl NN E I IS E Aic H Delay Basic H Dynamic JOA Equalizer D Feedback H Filter 100 EE H 3rd Party Control List 3rd Party Control Command e London Liquid Sky 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 235 Ateis Studio Untitle IDABC DSP Configuration IDABC 1 Pa ey N File Edit View Geometry Nimm Operation Tools Window Help A8 Delay Advanced A3 Delay Basic 129 Dynamic AJB Equalizer J Feedback Ateis Mets Ateis FE No Compiled Fault W Evac Fl 398 x 179 Felt 949 x 535 5 1 11 Operation Compile All Store All 2 EE ae In this menu you will find the major operations related to system connection allowing to compile the configura
25. CR200 and then click the item Update in the Function List box to open the update window ZS Remote G2 z Ateis Device i LAP iS ECS ECS 1 ECS 1 ECS 3 ECS2 ERT IDASC 1 IDASC 1 1010101 131 113 126 129 237 IDAS Chris URC200 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 192 168 100 231 192 168 100 12 192 168 101 182 192 168 100 46 192 168 100 5 192 168 100 19 192 168 101 5 192 168 101 6 192 168 101 3 192 168 101 7 192 168 101 192 Ateis Device i LAP is ECS ECS 1 ECS 1 ECS 3 ECS 2 1DA8 CR200 URC200 E Machine Update Viewer NO 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 252 0 192 168 100 254 192 168 10 254 192 168 100 254 192 168 100 254 192 168 100 254 192 168 100 254 192 168 100 254 192 168 100 254 192 168 100 254 192 168 100 254 192 168 100 254 Pete List 100806 Pu DIVA TFT I Eterra 3rd party cmds zip mix L zip 00 1 asu Display Icon URC200 M IDA4 Comm 111 zip LAP G2T Scheduler 20100720 URC200 test MIX zip Er Remote Device Logo Store Restart YoxGNet Info IP Strings 6 Select the desired URC200 TPC for updating by clicking the check box in the field Selected Press the but
26. Current Amp Show the amplifier for the zone is normal amplifier or backup amplifier Measure ohm Show the impedance value of Line A amp B Diff Show the difference percentage of Measure ohm and Reference A amp B ohm 4 Faults 2012 ATEIS Product Features 99 zone Monitor Normal Amplifier Monitor Backup Amplifier Monitor Zone Leakage Impedance ohm Reference 4 ohm Reference B ohm Reference 4 amp 6 ohm Current Amp Measure ohm Diff 95 18k or 20k Zone 1 10 00m 325 4 310 4 160 4 Normal AMP 160 2 0 156 lr 10 00m 315 1 357 6 157 2 Normal AMP OFEN 39 3 10 00m 346 6 326 7 169 9 Normal AMP 5 C 99 4 10 00m 335 9 321 4 165 5 Normal AMP 295 0 78 24 5 10 00 Normal AMP 6 10 00 Normal AMP H 10 00 Normal AMF B8 10 00M Normal AMP Global Settings Zone Settings Normal Amplifier Settings Backup Amplifier Settings Tone Settings Tolerance Get Reference Reset Reference Get All References 1 v v ZDMIZONTIDDNM 15 Get Reference Reset Reference EE 2 d d 25V 70VH0QV 15 Tc Get Reference Reset Reference Reset All References 3 y d 2oviFOVILOOY 15 7c Get Reference Reset Reference GS MS IMG 4 7 y 2SWIT V 100V 15 Get Reference Reset Reference Reset Monitoring 5 v v ZDMIZONTIDDNM 15 r lc Get Reference Reset Reference amp v v ZDMIZONTIDDNM 15 7 7 Get Reference Reset Reference v zi SouIFOV1OO 15 r lc Get Reference Reset Reference 5 v v Z
27. Delay Basic o ER Dynamic B Je Equalizer E GEQ ME 1 Octave 8 2 3 Octave 2 1 3 Octave E Je GEO Stereo 1 3 Octave m PEQ D ie FEQ Stereo e IHR Feedback e DH Filter Sr Fireman I DR Input a Inverter s Level Controller M Local Echo Suppressor o a Logic a Meter amp 3 Message e DH Mixer e Net Input e 5 Met Output H a Moise Generator Component Appearance Description 2012 ATEIS 330 Ateis Studio GEQ is abbreviation of graphic equalizer in the graphic equalizer the input signal is sent to a bank of filters Each filter passes the portion of the signal present in its own frequency range or band The amplitude passed by each filter is adjust using a slider in control window of Ateis Studio control to boost or cut frequency components passed by that filter The vertical position of each slider thus indicates the gain applied at that frequency band The number of frequency channels and therefore each one s bandwidth affects the consuming DSP power of audio processor and may be matched to the requirements of the intended application An equalizer for professional live sound reinforcement typically has some 25 to 31 bands for more precise control of feedback problems and equalization of room modes There are three types of GEQ 1 Octave 2 3 Octave and 1 3 Octave 1 3 Octave GEQ spoken informally as third octave EQ because the center frequency of its filters are spaced one third of
28. Description This component allows the logical operation AND applied on logic signal 2012 ATEIS 372 Ateis Studio 6 12 2 EVAC Board Component Template Main DSP Components x gc DSF Component E EHE Logic 3 AND GJ Evac Board belt ICH 0 Ee 32CH i i pp Evacuation Innut b Device ModuldDAsST a Component Appearance ve Description This component is corresponds to URGP peripheral devices it extend audio processors logic input channel r Control Window r Parameters e Monitor Enable or disable external device monitoring If this option is enabled it need two 4 7k Ohm resisters in external devce circuit 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 373 Monitoring Mode Non Monitoring Mode e Type To specify mode of activate there are two chooses o N O Normally open close the contact to output signal o N C Normally close open the contact to output signal e Status Shows states of external device There are four states o Open A open circuit of external devce is detected o Short A short circuit of external device is detected o Activate Logic output is activate o Deactivate Logic output is deactivate 2012 ATEIS 374 Ateis Studio 6 12 3 Evacution Input Component Template Main DSP Components GJ DSP Component E Je Logic X pp AND a i Evac Board erc Evacuation Input ZEN B CH gp Event t Fault Definer
29. Status Frequency Aefvi O o Red Permanent Priority of the zone is lower than other sources Blinking Priority of the zone is higher than other sources Green Trommel The zone only desired for paging is not using by other Sources 3 Fault Indicator To display fault status of system Following table list the states of fault O 2012 ATEIS Product Features 187 Status Frequency Activit Permanent LM There are faults in audio processor Lost communication with audio processor 4 EVAC Indicator Light up when the system is under evacuation paging 5 Power Indicator This LED light up when the PCP is powered on 6 Microphone Connector A phone jack connector for connection of telephone styled microphone 7 Talk Button Press this button to request paging There are two modes for this button push to talk and lock 8 Talk Indicator This LED light up if PCP is allowed to paging on the other word the paging request has been acknowledged A Sometime after paging request is granted zones under paging still can be occupied by other sources In such a case the talk led still light up but you can check busy LED to know the situation 9 Hold Indicator 1 8 These LEDs Indicate which keys are selected 10 All Call Release Button This button is used to select or deselect all keys 11 All Call Release Indicator This indicator lights up if all keys are selected 12 Event Select Key 1 8 The
30. o Percent Knob adjust value of elements by percentage e Element Indicate which element of the component controlled by value trigger e Component Indicate which component of the device contains element prior mentioned e Device Indicate which device contains component prior mentioned e System Indicate which system contains device prior mentioned e Min Specify the minimum value of simulating knob e Max Specify the maximum value of simulating knob e Remove Remove the element controlled by the event al This operation only remove the relation between element and event not delete element e Clear Remove all elements controlled by the event 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 257 e Close Close the settings window 5 3 4 Step Trigger Event Description This event is used to control the element value It adjust value of element by step when source triggers the event There are multiple states in an step trigger event each state contains a step value r Event Creation Event 1 Value Trigger 2 Event 3 Integration Select Zone m Event 4 Value Trigger 2 x Mame Event 5 States Count 2 Type Step Trigger Click button Add to create a new event a second window open to query you which kind of event is desired Select item Step Trigger on Type combo box Then press button OK Event Settings After create a value control event you need to assign an element to it Then the assigned ele
31. 54dB 44 0dB 0dB di JJ OdB e Maximum level 14 dBu e Input Impedance 10k Ohm e THD N Total Harmonic Distortion plus Noise ERE EE E a mw 00 2 po0 20kHzQ 4dBu 12dBu o p 20 20kHz 2dBu 24dBu 20 20kHz 14dBu 30dBu 44dBu e Bandwidth 20Hz 20kHz PDC O 2012 ATEIS Ateis Studio 4 1 2 5 e Maximum Output Level 10 dBu e Output Impedance 300 Ohm e THD 1kHz at output 0 02 e Bandwidth 3dB at output 20Hz 20kHz e Noise 22Hz 22kHz 85dBu e Maximum Input Level 16 dBu e Input Impedance 11k Ohm e THD 1kHz at input lt 0 02 e Bandwidth 3dB at input lt 20Hz 22kHz e RS232 voltages 6 5 6 5 Evacuation Inputs Contact Mode e Bias voltage Voltage e Monitoring resistor 4 7k Ohm Evacuation Inputs Voltage Mode On Voltage Voltage Current S Working Temperature e 0 C 40 C Peripherals Following table is the peripherals supported by IDA8SAB Device Connection Fireman MIC m n 1 Paging where operator is close to IDA8C 0 PPM AS 31 PDC Remote console for with paging ability Remote console for Master Sub Preset Controlling Element Controlling URGP PDC 1 PDC Evacuation Input extension PDC 1 PDC 2012 ATEIS Product Features Device Connection Max Num 1 Funcio Auto noise gain for audio signals PPM IT5 Ethernet e Paging Element Control Master S
32. 90 200 01 dB e tem list of Mode No Name e tem list of Slope Element Description e Mode O 2012 ATEIS a Ateis Studio Type of filtering e Slope Slope of attenuation e Bandwidth Difference between the upper and lower frequencies in a contiguous set of frequencies todo Kevin e Mute Mute the filter s module e Level Gain of filter s module e Frequency Frequency of cut Graphical Control Window d F 1 1 ke m 1 L V 2 IL ech R Pa E E ME EL zur m x e am wm Ei lali E mamae M Sr E 8 8 E 8 i K 8 Il Pad l 21 x E E E E E 8 B B ev Li La Le e Axis o X Frequency of output signal Hz o Y Level of input signal dB e Control Points o Blue Adjust element Frequency Horizontal and Level Vertical o Yellow Adjust element Bandwidth 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 343 6 7 3 Band Stop Component Template Main DSP Components E ig DSP Component E Je Filter D a ER All Pass Filter Je Band Pass a Band Stop Ef Crossover El p Crassover Stereo Je Hi Lo Pass ef Notch Filter Je Shelving Filter Fireman E JP Input Inverter Component Appearance ve Description A Band Stop filter is a filter that passes most frequencies unaltered but attenuates those in a specific range to very low levels It is the opposit
33. C Program Files amp ATEISVATEIS Studio v1 0 0 67 7 As usual with the install shield wizard a window appears showing all information before the actual installation You can enter corrections at this point by clicking Back If there is nothing to change click Next gt to execute the installation 2012 ATEIS me Ateis Studio Ta ATEIS Studio v1 0 0 67 InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation IF you want bo review or change any oF your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard Current Settings Setup Type Typical Destination Folder C Program Files ATEISVATEIS Studia v1 0 0 67 User Information Mame user Company penton 8 Wait until the end of installation CS ATEIS Studio v1 0 0 67 InstallShield Wizard Installing ATEI Studio 1 0 0 67 The program Features vau selected are being installed Please wait while the InstallShield Wizard installs ATEIS Studio v1 0 0 67 This may take several minutes Status 9 After all installation tasks have been finished successfully click Finish to exit wizard 2012 ATEIS System Functionality omm GG ATEIS Studio v1 0 0 67 InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Completed The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed ATEIS Studia vil 0 064 Click Finish to exit the wizard 10 The installation program creates a shortcut to the ATEI
34. External Control Third Party Control Sub Preset Control URC AS Event e Use Evacuation Input component e By use Evacuation Input component you can control the other logic components Logic signal is coming from Evacuation Input component and goes any other input pins of logic component as you want please refer to topic Evacuation Input component They also can be used in UGA mode trigger by a voltage polarization change To setting this option you need use Evacuation Input component please refer to topic Evacuation Input component Contact Output In the IDA8C S devices there are logic outputs channels to close open circuit for an external device There are two ways to config it e Assign element to evacuation output control 2012 ATEIS Product Features 111 Sub Preset Control URC AS Event e Use Logic Out component By using Logic Out component you can output signal coming from any logic component please refer to topic Logic Out component 4 2 Consoles and Accessories 4 2 1 Redundancy Unit 4 2 1 1 Overview PAVA systems in very highly sensitive places like nuclear power centrals underground industrial systems or places where people have to thrust on a 100 availability of a PAVA system may require for redundancy on any part of the PAVA system Redundancy is a very widely spread expression that needs to be further specified into a required level of redundancy
35. In normal PAVA systems where other communication means are available spare amplifiers and surveillance of essential components is more than enough Higher levels of redundancy may require for A B wiring of the loudspeaker lines where loss of the A or B line or system still ensures a minimum coverage of 50 of the venue Such requirement is detailed described in the BSI 5839 part 8 But even that could not be enough in situations where the PAVA is the only and last means of communication In this case an even higher level of redundancy may be required At this level not only the amplifiers have redundancy by means of active spare amplifiers also the central equipment will have a full back up This is what we call Full Redundancy Atels RU provides this high level of redundancy RU is a thorough switching device that acts as a Primary Secondary switching device 2012 ATEIS 112 Ateis Studio Primary system Secondary system 4 2 1 2 IDA8C RU PDC IDABSAB 1 Local Network Configuration RU PDC i EN PSSAS RU MAIN i Zone 1 A B Zone 2 A B Bj Zone 3 A B zeg Zone 4 A B D Zone 5 A B zc Zone 6 A B Zone 7 A B A Zone 8 A B e IDA8SAB 1 i RU CTL t Local Network ost IDABSAB 31 RU MAIN Zone 9 A B Dag Zone 10 A B E ai Zone 11 A B oc Zone 12 A B Bx Zone 13 A B oz Zone 14 A B EX Zone 15 A B oc Zone 16 A B zo
36. Network ATEIS NET f Redundancy hd A Speaker Zone1 Fos o ei Zone 2 e I3 Backup ee _ UU ES Zone 4 Zorn i s IDABSX Amplifier c 3 x4 x co The IDA8SL Slave units provide audio output expansion of the IDA8 Systems using a secured 48 channel audio and data network over CAT5 or fiber optic Each IDA8SL expands the IDA8 System with an additional 4 outputs 2 additional security microphone consoles PSS AS and security programmable switching contacts The Network cards that comes with the unit proudes a redundant 48 channels audio and data connection Atels Net between one controller and a maximum of 32 IDA8SX Slave units in one rack system The IDA8SL is used on PA VA applications that need large amplifier power The maximum power may reach 1000W RMS The connectors for audio are Speakon style which is mostly used in professional audio systems for connecting loudspeakers to amplifiers 2012 ATEIS Product Features 49 4 1 3 2 Front Panel W System Fault LED This LED lights on when a system fault fault is detected G Fault LED This LED lights on when a global fault is detected Bypass Mode LED To indicate IDA8C is in bypass mode or not Bypass Monitoring LED Show the monitoring function is enabled or not This LED lights on if monitoring of IDA8 is disabled by user Global EVAC LED To indicate system is in EVAC paging state or not This LED lights on if any IDA8
37. O 2012 ATEIS 370 Ateis Studio Time Time ime ime 28 me Element Properties Dass asin Resin 88 EC PreProcessingThreshod 22 0 400 0 01 oe Post Processing Threshold 400 40 0 200 01 dB ve Element Description e Bypass owitches off the component operations Gain Reduction Display the gain of output volume e Pre Processing Threshold When input volume is bigger than Pre Processing Threshold it will Reduce the volume to Threshold e Pre Processing Attack Time The time needed to change the volume from original level to the expected level e Pre Processing Release Time The time needed to change the volume from original level to the expected level 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 371 e Post Processing Threshold When input volume is smaller than Post Processing Threshold it will suppress the residue echo sound e Post Processing Attack Time The time needed to change the volume from original level to the expected level e Post Processing Release Time The time needed to change the volume from expected level to the original level 6 12 Logic Components process logic signal listed inside this section 6 12 1 AND Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component er Logic GJ AND e Evac Board e H Evacuation Input H Event e Fault Definer Component Appearance
38. Select the mode manual or automatic Manual mode Only manual channel activation threshold and priority are ignored Automatic mode With priority and threshold channel activation e Last Mic On Designated Defines which channel will stay open Only if Last Mic On is activated the channel will stay open even if it s muted e Mute Mutes or un mutes the channel input e Invert Inverts the polarity of the input channel e Solo Solos the input channel the channel goes directly to the output e Gate On Shows activation status of the input channel e Level Adjusts the level of the output channel e Manual mode Only used in manual mode see Manual Automatic It allows manual channel activation e Automatic mode priority level Sets the priority level of the channel 1 is the most priority e Output Mute Mutes or un mutes the module s output O 2012 ATEIS 398 Ateis Studio e Matrix Output Mute Mute the input for the output mixing This is different with the Mute element this element only affect the output channel itself e Matrix Output Level The attenuation of input for the output mixing This is different with the Mute element this element only affect the output channel itself e Output Level Sets the module s output level e Threshold sets the threshold for channel activation e Background Threshold Sets how the input signal is interpreted to open a gate The background level will increase the input
39. Thank you for choosing ATEIS We here at ATEIS hope you will enjoy our technology as much as we enjoyed developing and building it This manual is intended to provide the user with the necessary understanding of our system architecture as well as guide users through the configuration process This manual can be updated at any time without prior notice in order to keep it up to date If you find errors in this manual or would like to improve on the presentation feel free to submit mistakes Suggestions or questions by sending an email We hope that this Help File Manual will provide you all the information you need However if you have any questions feel free to contact us 1 2 Ateis Presentation ATEIS has been in the professional audio market for close to thirty years and is viewed as a leading competitor in the Public Address Voice Alarm and Professional Audio Market in Europe Asia and the Middle East Products The company offers a full range of audio equipment microphones preamplifiers digital processors digital audio matrixes loud speaker monitoring systems amplifiers etc ATEIS designs and manufactures leading products in the voice alarm systems market which have been certified EN60849 compliant by the T V and UL listed Development Thanks to a development team of over forty engineers and a close connection to our customer base we are able to respond rapidly to the demands of our various vertical markets wit
40. The peripheral devices PSS AS PPM AS URC AS cant Remote Ale communication with IDA8C S URGP Fault URGP is fault Remote Fault The hw error microphone speaker on PSS of peripheral devices 4 1 6 2 1 Normal Backup Amplifier Error Fault Meaning e Amplifier gain is not high e Amplifier gain is too low e Amplifier is fail Fault Indication e LED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S O 2012 ATEIS Ateis Studio o Zone Fault LEDs on front panel of IDA8C S e Log o Amplifier Gain Too High Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Normal AMP Error where Normal AMP can be Backup AMP Z1 Normal AMP Too High where Z1 can be any zone Normal AMP can be Backup AMP Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio Sam Liachne Fault Record AX More Detail Normal AMP monitor fault Zone 1 Too High o Amplifier Gain Too Low Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Normal AMP Error where Normal AMP can be Backup AMP Z1 Normal AMP Too Low where Z1 can be any zone Normal AMP can be Backup AMP Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio Sa Machine Fault Record D xX Description More Detail Normal AMP monitor fault Zone 1 Too Low o Amplifier Fail Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Normal AMP
41. e Maximum Power 700W RMS e Maximum Power Siren Message 1000W e Monitoring Speaker e Impedance 8 Ohm e Maximum Power 1kHz 1 6W 2012 ATEIS Product Features e THD 1kHz lt 1 e Bandwidth 3dB 100Hz 12kHz e Configurable Audio Output e Maximum level 14 dBu e Output Impedance 50 Ohm e THD N Total Harmonic Distortion plus Noise __Sensitivity Minimum Maximum Unit Frequency 20 20kHz 4dBu 20 20kHz 2dBu 20 20kHz 14dBu 20 20kHz 30dBu 20 20kHz 44dBu e Bandwidth 20Hz 20kHz e EIN Equivalent Input Noise ge Configurable Audio Input e Sensitivity For each channel of configurable audio input card there are five levels to gain the audio signal They are sensitivity values of OdBu 12dbBu 24dBu 40dBu and 54dBu respectively The meaning of sensitivity value is how large the gain for an audio source and to amplify the giving minus input source to OdBu the figure below is an example when the sensitivity value is set to 54dBu and input source is 54dBu after the gaining circuit of audio card you ll get the OdBu of output Sensitivity of Input A channel 2 54dB kis JENES ISensitivity Gas E CAE Tile EI 54dB OdB OdB OdB J J PED e Maximum level 14 dBu O 2012 ATEIS 38 Ateis Studio e Input Impedance 10k Ohm e THD N Total Harmonic Distortion plus Noise L Sensitivity Minimum __ _Maximum__ __Unit__ _Fr
42. to determine which source is allowed to paging to zones it desired The zones are M1 M8 on Network Paging component You need create an integration paging event to link with PPM AS See topic Network Paging to learn editing paging settings 2012 ATEIS we Ateis Studio PPM AS Manager PPM AS Manager is an unit of the software to manage settings about PPM AS that connect to audio processors like IDA8 series Click main menu of software View PPM AS Manager to open PPM AS Manager Main Compile Resource Object Tree Layers Bird s Eye Properties PPM AS Manager Message Library 3rd Party Control List 3rd Party Control Command Logo Library User Management Sa PFM Devices Settings n postamouncanent Jusen ame ie arget alk Mode Announcemen Enabled Enabled 8 GNGSTONS WA il GNGSTONS WA 7 B8 AM cr e Name The name of PPM AS object e Rs485 Target Indicates the connector on audio processor that PPM AS connected in the design window e Talk Mode todo rider To specify the behavor of key pressing for paging There are two modes Push Push and hold the key for paging request release the key to end paging Lock First push for paging request if request is grant then start paging push again to end paging 2012 ATEIS Product Features 147 e Key Priority todo rider The priority of key e Key Count To specify how many keys on PPM AS e Pre Announcement Enabled Enabl
43. ute of Lo LLL Sgna J Of j Le 0 60 200 01 dB Oveload Thd 30 200 200 01 dB ve Element Description e Overload Indicates channel level above chosen Overload Threshold dB e Volume Meter showing the channel level e Mute Mutes or un mutes the output channel LED lit red with channel muted e Signal To indicate the channel is active or not 2012 ATEIS me Ateis Studio e Level Signal output level of the module e Overload Thd Sets the threshold of the overload indicator 6 23 Selector Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component Ste Selector o Pw 4x1 Component Appearance Description oimple selector allowing to select which input is routed to the single output r Control Window Element Properties 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 437 ve Element Description e nput Select 6 24 Signal Monitor ve Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component mE Selector A s Telephone Card bh ka Device Modell WD Component Appearance Description This component detect the input signal and show the active status of it If the condition is satisfied element Trigger On will be set to On and logic output channel will be set to hi 4 Control Window O 2012 ATEIS 438 Ateis Studio Fold Time Element Properties
44. 0 200 01 dB Element Description e Mute Mute the sound coming out from the component e evel Level of the pink noise 6 19 Output 6 19 1 Output ve Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component GES Output El Output A xm m E Output B E Monitor Output C E Monitor Output D E Mono Output A E Mono Output B E Mono Output C E Mono Output D Device MaduleDAsc Component Appearance Description The analogue output modules represent the physical analogue outputs accessible on the rear panel of the device There are several separate modules for use with each of the audio board Analogue input and output modules are added automatically to the DSP window of the relevant processor by defining their module configuration at the time you create them and should not be altered r Control Window O 2012 ATEIS ato Ateis Studio 4 a4 Valu me Ou Element Properties Overload r j j Voume 500 500 200 01 dBu ute of o Lo LLL Signal J Of J Led 0 200 200 01 dB Ovetoadthd LL 30 200 200 01 dB ve Element Description e Overload Indicates channel level above chosen Overload Threshold dB e Volume Meter showing the channel level e Mute Mutes or un mutes the output channel LED lit red with channel muted e Signal To ind
45. 0 26 DSP 1 0 8 0 Net Card 21 1 4 FPGA 0 0 0 0 10 Update firmware Close the window of Version go back to Devce Management window click link Update O 2012 ATEIS 22 Ateis Studio Device Management 3rd Party Control Command Device Management Ateis Net Redundancy Addr Device Status Disconnect Update Telephone Card Setting 192 168 100 251 192 168 100 79 e i Reverse Redundancy 192 168 100 11 Head Version ATEIS NET Deploying Search Timeout Interval 5 gt 5 Search By IP Search Remote A file manager opened Goes into directory Update file IDA8C select asu file to update 2012 ATEIS Quick Start 23 Look in O IDABC M o p m IDASAI 027 asu Mu Recent Documents Ra 3 Desktop Mu Documents Mu Computer File name IDASAL 27 asu v Mu Hebwork Files of type Ateis Studio update files 7 seul wv Then the update process start and pop a window after update file is transferred to device click Yes to restart device O 2012 ATEIS EA Ateis Studio a Serial ID Level 1ID LevelZID Update Status 241 Update completed Information o 1 The update will take effect after restart machine Do you want restart machine aes 425 45 EBI Sec 0 0 6 Elapsed 0 0 0 Left Eng ver todo Check device version using step 9 again the version should become compatible this time if version is compat
46. 1 12 Main FPGA Error Fault Meaning Internal hardware error Fault Indication e ED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up o System Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S e Log Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Main FPGA Er Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio 2012 ATEIS Product Features More Detail Main board FPGA cod e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C ga Fault Handling Contact service to repair device 4 1 6 2 Table of Global Faults Amplifier gain too high Normal Backup AMP Error Amplifier gain too low Amplifier fail Line A B Open speaker is not connected to IDA8C S Line A B Bad Impedance the impedance of speaker is changed over the tolerance Line A B Error Line A B short circuit outside the speaker zone output connector is shorted no sound of if this fault happen may damage the amplifier EVAC Input Error When evacuation input is set to contact mode if the voltage of EVAC input is not in the range Atek Nat Bakes This fault happens if one or more than one IDA8C or IDA8S over Ateis Net are lost connection FiremanEmor Fireman microphone is error VOX NET Error IDA8C S can t communicate with VOX NET server fear Deine Ew This fault happens if Fault Definer DSP component get a logic signal from input
47. 200 TPC 2 IR Receiver It receives the control signals of handheld devices for controlling the system 3 Back Button This button is used for going back to the upper layer of the menu 4 Encoder Rotate this encoder for select the item of the menu 5 Enter Button This button is used for going into to the inner layer of the menu Characteristic d Case Dimension 140mm W x 108mm L x 34mm H Weight 0 35Kg Color RAL7016 d Screen Diagonal 2 Resolution 176 x 220 Power 2012 ATEIS Product Features 193 item Voltage Current Consumption _____Comment___ DC Input 18V 26V Typical 24V Maximum Cable Length 100m on Category 5 cable 4 2 14 4 Configuration This topic with sub topics which describe configuration of URC200 TPC This is the basic procedure to setup URC200 TPC for controlling the system 1 Connect URC200 TPC to ethernet switch that the targeted devices connected The target devices are IDA8C ECS etc 2 Set IP Subnet Mask Gateway in Protected Mode menu 3 Edit Control Items see topic Edit Control Items for more detail 4 Save Configuration to URC200 TPC see topic Save Load Configuration for more detail 4 2 14 4 1 Edit Control Items The menu system of URC200TPC is configurable that means users need to create items of menu for what they want to control The menu system is multi layered it the first layer there are three items ECS LAP G2 AMP indicates what
48. 42022 e ah rei MT EE 173 41 2 9 9 JOHAFACIOTISIICS o dn ee e e e ee dn 174 LONE BD EE 175 429 1 JSOVOFVIO Wie to otto see tee eh ew eee 175 4292 Control Pano E 176 W293 2 D RAFAGIOTISIICS no De ee 178 4 2 10 Fireman Microphone 179 4 20 23OVOFUIO EE 179 422192 e AC CO E e 179 4 2 10 3 Configurallon eoe tona datu dia tutte Los dtes 179 A2 ME Op NA nns 181 un DN EE a E TT EE 181 22 11 2 Control ECH e CH EE 182 A210 GChafacteri e 184 EEN ei SE 185 42024 SJUOFUIOW S ibo ee ett ac ecce et 185 42712 2 Control Paneles a d a ene hit ai dette Iuliam I MIU 196 421239 CChAaractefistioS on boe ote e dei esa dus 188 A E GL e 189 A2131 CONE ON ear se eh ee ee ee a ee 189 722 13 2 Ch haracteori ei 190 A214 BI eil Eih e 191 DUNS BI I A REO OL EE 191 42142 AX Gontrol Erreechen ee ee ee S 192 4221455 Gharacteristie E 192 4 2 14 4 Configura d EE 193 O 2012 ATEIS 6 Ateis Studio 42 14 4 Edit Control Te Ettel 193 4 2 144 Import Export Configuration eene 198 4 2 144 SavelLoad Configuration eee 198 42144 Reset Configuation onere bete erg os an eee 198 4 2 14 5 Device Nr 199 42 149 Update EAR EE 199 42 45 Protected IV OCA One foe reir iei itane ione id Opened ee 202 42 195 a 2 Eo E 204 ee oval H 112 gd O W Recreate sete ae aera tee eer see re nee Reider ene eter ee ere te ia ane eee er eee ene ee eee ers 204 EE 205 4231 DA duissaiissdseutus us eec eI D iu rario e EcD
49. 54 Device Manageimie nb iatis bas oed pad Messa etu uu cui MEE 263 5 4 41 Search and Settings p H 263 542 Read Versi n 5e dou retta rana a wa via ioco ides doa ovd us aue Lone d var dux du va wo eu en iode da avi va ve E xg Day RUNDE 265 5 4 3 Update Firmware 265 5 4 4 Ateis Net s Jy TT 268 5 4 5 Remote Plugin nnne nnn 268 546 Roversa E 270 5 5 Steeg 270 5 5 1 Ateis 3rd Party Control neee 270 SOLT e LE 1 4 1 gt 0 EE 2 0 5 5 1 2 Assign Elements to 3rd Party Control 2 0 5 5 1 3 3rd Party Control DC nr 271 5 5 1 4 3rd Party Control Command 271 552 OC UNS CO Er Ol M EE TOT DITE ETE 0 56 User EE ure indi ele ua dora i dcc o n d dct alcun 272 IOL OWOCOW RETTULIT 272 9 52 Meer enee oe eran ed ere eto eres ec er c t er dcn ctt T AL 273 9363 USEF POCO UIT LS DERE TET D DD LN SD ELS 274 Wale cete 0 D8 SOTO ea LL 0 MESSA E EE 0 5 10 el ele d TEE 0 514 Audio Enable DISable i REED nets Sateen eet cu Catus cutus eaters Ad Uo EE cube 0 Components of Audio Processor 275 Sr WE e 275 D LT EN Na th EE 275 012 Tute dein anciana a via as ade Ga Oo besten vd Deed xe a xr ccfa VOCE vae rid a V aae ea vo a a a Cua eo c een aa Coi a dva dO 277 62 ER VE E 280 MERITI c l2 awanwy ange ut A Ar AE ANE N 284 64 EISE 287 5641 AGG AGG Stereo DE 287 6
50. AS E Event After the assignment is done you can have a preview of the string to be used by 3rd party device for controlling Ateis devices The 3rd Party Control Command is the preview window for the command To have a global view of all element controlled by 3rd party devices you can use the 3rd Party Control List window The window is described in later topic 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 271 5 5 1 3 3rd Party Control List 3rd Party Control List IDASC 1 IDA8S 1 This window list all elements available for 3rd party controlling To open this window click menu View gt 3rd Party Control List Followings are description for it e Tab for devices There are separate tabs for each devices In the tab a grid list all elements controllable by 3rd party device Item Field of Grid This show the elements set to 3rd party controlling by a tree structure The parent item is single means the type is single A single 3rd party control command controls only one element e Element Field of Grid The name of element listed e Channel of Grid The channel in component element belonged e Device Name of Grid The component contains element listed 5 5 1 4 3rd Party Control Command 3rd Party Control Command Read Ox02 R x03 xl1 x D O02 52 30 30 30 Write 0x02 W Ox03 Ox46 OxO0D 02 57 30 30 30 This window can have a preview of the element that assigned for 3rd party control
51. Audio 24VDC Input Output x 2 Active Control Input Telephone Line E gt _ Telephone Line urable Audio I O x 8 Telephone Audio Output 24VDC Output Y oH B Active Control Output EK Telephone Line x 2 Configurable Audio I O x 8 RU CTL RU PDC is a device for audio processor redundancy the peripherals are connected with RU PDC not directly to audio processor RU PDC is in charge of switching primary and secondary audio processor to O 2012 ATEIS Product Features 121 active one of them If primary audio processor is active all signal of peripherals are redirect to primary audio processor by RU PDC RU PDC monitor the status of the other RUs for switching active audio processor 4 2 1 4 2 Front Panel 1 Secondary Active Indicator This LED light up if active system is primary audio processor 2 Primary Active Indicator This LED light up if active system is secondary audio processor 3 Fault Indicator This LED light up if the unit is set to be slave and a short or open is detected on S WD Secondary Watching Dog port If this indicator light up it means there is an error of the unit user needs to check wiring of S WD connector or replace by a good unit 4 Power Indicator This LED light up if this unit is power on 4 2 1 4 3 Rear Panel O CPU 3 NEW QUOS V cs SRR Pop Pare LLLI T D E a ee ee ee ee 1 PDC Audio Output for Record The audio output of peripheral pl
52. Control Device Madulelb ac i ge Component Appearance T C4 C E uc dn p co Description This component transfer logic signals over Ateis Net The logic signal goes into the Logic Net Out component in one device using Ateis Net card and come out to Logic Net In component in another device using Ateis Net card as well The signal path is one to many relationship There are 48 channels available to carry signals they are numbered and identified by the number For example a signal goes into channel 1 of component Logic Net Out A you can get it from the component Logic Net In A channel 1 O 2012 ATEIS 382 Ateis Studio 6 12 9 NOT Component Template Mam DSP Components EL Je DSP Component E Si 1 Logic mE Logic Trigger Control E ya E it Output ef Scheduler ge Component Appearance Description This component performs logic not operation 6 12 10 OR Component Template Main DSP Components EL E DSP Component E Je Logic H Gre Logic Trigger Control ER NOT SE e D Output m 3 Scheduler 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor a83 Component Appearance Description This component performs logic or operation 6 12 11 Output ve Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component Ste Logic E Logic Trigger Control g 3 NOT ee OR He Output J A Le a cH a Scheduler SH Meter e DH Message Devic
53. D Weight 4 5Kg Color RAL 035 d Screen Diagonal 5 Resolution 800 x 480 n Power iem Voltage CurrentConsumption Comment DC Input 18V 26V Typical 24V 200mA Microphone Output e Maximum level 6dBu e Output Impedance 100Ohm e THD 1kHz 0 5 e Bandwidth 3dB 50Hz 20kHz e Noise Gate Threshold 84dBu 24dBu e Target Output Level 0 e Max Output Level 54dBu 6dBu e Attack Time 8ms e Release Time 100ms va Front Panel Speaker e Impedance 4Ohm e Maximum Power 1kHz 1W e THD 1kHz lt 0 5 O 2012 ATEIS 172 Ateis Studio e Bandwidth 3dB 50Hz 20kHz Maximum Cable Length 100m on Category 5 cable 42 8 CD8 4 2 8 1 Overview CD8 Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console for Ateis audio processor FAULT EJ ALL CALL RELEASE Wall mount heaw duty remote paging console with Access level 2 protection to comply with the EN 54 16 Compatible with Ateis audio processor and communicates over a dedicated RS485 for Power audio and DATA The unit comprises of 8 zones 8 buttons with fist firemen s microphone in a metal surface mount wall box It provides robust IP 30 protection Each CD8 contains a PMM PS Master PCB with extension keypad and uses the same architecture as for the PPM AS series of microphone consoles Each Ateis audio processor like IDA8C can handle up to 31 CD8 units per 485 port in Master Slave config
54. DSP Component EM T Logic EHE Logic Control EHE Logic Gate Sy Logic Meter lt e HR Logic Net Input e ER Logic Net Output HR Logic Pulse Control amp L3 Logic Trigger Control CR NOT ge Component Appearance Description This component have LEDs to indicate state of logic signal r Control Window O 2012 ATEIS 380 Ateis Studio Sa Logic Weter Viewer 6 12 7 Logic Net Input Component Template ens Components GES DSP Component EM T Logic Sr Logic Met Input p np besa C CL7 24 e A D 25 32 ww E 33 40 0 wx E G A e DH Logic Net Output Device Modua vo ooo l Component Appearance Description This component transfer logic signals over Ateis Net The logic signal goes into the Logic Net Out component in one device using Ateis Net card and come out to Logic Net In component in another device using Ateis Net card as well The signal path is one to many relationship There are 48 channels available to carry signals they are numbered and identified by the number For example a signal goes into channel 1 of component Logic Net Out A you can get it from the component Logic Net In A channel 1 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor set 6 12 8 Logic Net Output Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component GJ Logic GJ Logic Net Output ME C 17 24 ww D 25 32 we E 33 40 0 wee F 41 48 SR Logic Pulse
55. DSP component field Message Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio Set LAachune Fault Record DI A Description More Detail User define error e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C Fault Handling Define on the configuration of DSP component Basically you need check the component which is the input of Fault Definer 4 1 6 2 9 Remote Offline ve Fault Meaning e IDA8C S can t communicate with peripheral devices Fault Indication e ED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S e Log Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Remote Offline PPM Port 2 ID 1 where Port N is the N PDC port for peripheral connection ID is the unique number for each peripheral device on the PDC port Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio Sa achine Fault Record Description More Detail Remote affline e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C O 2012 ATEIS Product Features 93 Fault Handling Replace the peripheral device by a good one if the fault is solved the problem is coming from peripheral device send the peripheral device and contact service If fault is not solved change IDA8C S and contact service 4 1 6 2 10 URGP Fault Fault Meaning e Evacuation inputs or fault in
56. Device ModulaDAse Component Appearance Description This component play the audio message files which stored in Ateis devices It is able to have multiple events binding with a message in the event list each event can be assigned to a source to trigger it If more than one event are triggered in the same message player component The event with the highest priority will play the message The smaller value with higher priority Control Window Sa Iessage Player Event 1 Event 2 O 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor sat 6 14 2 MM Player Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component EL Logic SR Meter EH Message Ld Message Player d MM Player af ee Miner e H Net Input e IHR Net Output e DH Noise Generator Device Modell WD Component Appearance Description This component play the messages stored in Ateis device It allow user to specify playing sequence of message and is possible to play message by logic signal input of the component 2012 ATEIS 392 Ateis Studio 6 15 Mixer 6 15 1 AutoMixer Component Template Main DSF Components Ste DSP Component er Mixer EE Autalvlixer e ER Matrix CH Standard e DH Net Input Device Modell WD Component Appearance a Description This component Allows mix several signals to one output The Activation of channel s can be done manually o
57. Element Description e Overload Indicates channel level above chosen Overload Threshold dB e Volume Meter showing the channel level e Mute Mutes or un mutes the output channel LED lit red with channel muted e Signal To indicate the channel is active or not 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 417 e Level Signal output level of the module e Overload thd Sets the threshold of the overload indicator 6 19 5 Duplex Output Component Template Main DSP Components Be DSP Component EYE Output E Stereo Output A E Stereo Output B El Stereo Output C Su E Stereo Output D E Duplex Output B x 2 E Duplex Output D E 9 Page Control H Recorder Device MacdulelD sc Component Appearance ve Description For AES EBU output the duplex output modules represent the physical outputs accessible on the rear panel of the device There are several separate modules for use with each of the audio board Input and output modules are added automatically to the DSP window of the relevant processor by defining their module configuration at the time you create them and should not be altered r Control Window O 2012 ATEIS ais Ateis Studio Gw Duplex S B 4 a4 Valu me Ou Element Properties Overload r j j Voume 500 500 200 01 dBu ute of o Lo LLL Signal J Of J Led
58. Error where Normal AMP can be Backup AMP Z1 Normal AMP Fail where Z1 can be any zone Normal AMP can be Backup AMP Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio sw Machine Fault Record DI A More Detail Normal AMP monitor fault Zone 1 Fail e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C Fault Handling O 2012 ATEIS Product Features Is amplifier gain changed after get gt reference Is fault solved lt Amplifier Gain Too High 2012 ATEIS s Ateis Studio Increase tolerante or Decrease volume or Change amplifer with more power then get reference 1s amplifier gain l changed after get reference s amplifier s overloaded Is fault solved Amplifier Gain Too Low 2012 ATEIS Product Features 81 i ls amplifier power on Is wiring comedi Repair wiring between Is amplifier IDASC 5 and power on amplifier i Is fault Solved y Amplifier Fail 4 1 6 2 2 Line A B Error Fault Meaning This error is mainly for loudspeaker connected to IDA8C S s speaker zone output connectors there are three kind of faults e Line A B Open If the value of Measure ohm is greater than 4000 ohm this fault can be recognized by IDA8C S In the field of Measure ohm shows OPEN e Line A B Bad Impedance If the va
59. Expander 7 HH Expander Stereo gp Gate fee Device ModuldDAgsc Component Appearance Description An expander works in an opposite fashion than the compressor the threshold is set and any part of the signal dropping below this threshold will be affected by the expander and this level will be raised The expander therefore like the compressor balances out the signal making it sound more professional The expander able to have a signal with a bigger dynamic range 4 Control Window O 2012 ATEIS ata Ateis Studio Tht Attack Release Gain range time time reduction dB fh ame i ttm B Element Properties Name __Initial_ __ SoftKnee On Threshold 0 Threshold Range Attack Time 1 Gain Reduction 250 250 0 o ve Element Description 20 0 e Bypass Bypasses the expander function e Soft Knee Enables disables the Soft Knee mode e Expand Indicates that the function is active e Ratio Sets expansion ratio e hreshold oets the threshold level above which expansion begins e Threshold Range Sets the range of level in which the ratio gradually alters from 1 1 to the value set by the ratio parameter soft knee function Attack Time Sets the time it takes to respond to the input signal 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 315 e Release Time Adjusts the time to stop the gain reduction e Gain Reduction Reflects th
60. Ge Aa Set i i a a oo o oom iG Ex Bee ee Bee ee ED EBD ee ee mmm mamm ENN WEN ee mH Pai Pei GE BSP RSM Bee geehi says n LI L5 MODE DLUIPUTE FESCH x FRI E EI n EIS DUR BEBE Ge FIIR Ka TTT ER Pen ee eee nt Te Ea RST UP wm IN le en HIT dJa E w Speaker Zone Outputs There are 8 zones for speaker amp amplifier connection each zone consists of following connectors from left to right e connector of line A speaker e connector of line B speaker O 2012 ATEIS Ateis Studio e connector of 100V audio coming from amplifier IDA8 output exactly the same audio signal to line A and B Two speakers can connect to one zone for redundancy purpose one connect to line A another connect to line B Both speaker lines are monitored that s mean if a damage of speaker is detected a global fault Line A B Error will be generated o Backup Amplifier I Os Two backup amplifier connectors included O dB to amplifiers and 100V return from amplifiers Amplifier Zone Outputs 8 Zone OdB output to amplifiers o Bypass Mode Input e Contact input to engage the bypass mode paging CMD e Contact output to display the state of bypass mode paging ACK o EVAC Fault State Outputs e EVAC Output Contact this contact is closed if system is under EVAC paging e Fault Output Contact this contact is open if a fault is detected PDC Peripherals Devce
61. IEC connector is located on the left of the amplifiers rear panel It accepts a standard 2012 ATEIS Product Features 209 mains power lead fitted with an IEC connector For 115 V fuse rating e SPA 2060 2 5A e SPA 2120 5A e SPA 2240 8A For 230 V fuse rating e SPA 2060 1 25A e SPA 2120 2 5A e SPA 2240 5A Channel 1 2 Audio Output For each amplifier channel there is a dedicated Audio Output connector for connection of either 8 Ohm speakers 75V speakers or 100V speakers For the 8 Ohm connection and if you are using more than 1 speaker please ensure that speakers are wired in a way that the total impedance load is between 8 Ohm and 16 Ohm The Com point is the terminal and 8 Ohm 75V and 100V are the terminals L Fault Contact The fault contact indicates an amplifier fault by an opening contact Channel 1 2 Outputs Each channel outputs a replica of the corresponding balanced audio input signal either on XLR or on Euro terminal block W Channel 1 2 Inputs For each channel there is an XLR balanced input and a Euro terminal block balanced input Each input can be gain adjusted to suit the users needs The On Off gain switch can instantaneously bypass the gain controller and set the channel gain amplifier to maximum 4 3 1 4 Characteristics Case e Dimension o SPA2060 SPA2120 483mm W x 305mm D x 88mm H o SPA2240 483mm W x 420mm D x 88mm H e Weight o SPA2060 10 6 Kg o SPA2
62. Internal hw error 4 1 6 1 1 Flash Error Fault Meaning Nand flash inside IDA8C S is error Fault Indication e ED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up o System Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S e Log Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Flash Error Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio More Detail Flash Error e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C Fault Handling Contact service to repair device 4 1 6 1 2 12C Error Fault Meaning This is an internal error of I2C communication between micro controllers Fault Indication e LED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up o System Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S e Log 2012 ATEIS Product Features Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C I2C Error Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio A achine Fault Record Category Description More Detail L Error e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C Fault Handling Contact service to repair device 4 1 6 1 3 Net Card Error Fault Meaning This is error about bad communication between main cpu in IDA8C S and net card Fault Indication e LED Indicator When this
63. Meter l pasa lm Device ModuldDAsST Component Appearance 4 Level Controller 4 Buh Tn Description This component can adjust the signal level r Control Window O 2012 ATEIS oe Ateis Studio Level Controller Element Properties L Name Initial Minimum Maximum Precision Unit Bypass J Of Off J Mi JS Of j j J dmutlee 0 900 200 01 dB Ouputleel 0 900 200 01 dB va Element Description e Bypass Bypass the module s function e Mute Mute the sound coming out from the component e nput Level Adjust the level of an input channel e Output Level Adjust the level of output 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 36 6 11 Local Echo Suppressor Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component Il Local Echo Suppressor m ee Logic e IHR Meter amp 3 Message ER Mixer gp Met Input e Net Output o ER Noise Generator ENS Ne rm it Device MadulelDA8c Component Appearance Description This component is designed for suppressing local Echo or feedback It s shared in two parts pre processing and post processing The Pre Processing reduces the level above the threshold This is to avoid feedback The Post Processing removes the echo below a threshold This is to avoid the residual echo r Control Window
64. PTS Mic On Designated JETE 0 0 e p Input I0 JETA 0 0 Inputs gll Han 0 0 Inputs FS Han 0 0 ca Non pon d attenuation Attenuation Gand E Time mas f StepidB up Mactd 100 0 Open Mic Limits AutoMixer nM 2 Input va Element Properties Type Mana J LastMic On Designated Mic On Designated Chanel 1 MEM On Mute Sol GaeOn Of J j J dmpulee 0 900 200 01 dB Manualmode On j Automatic mode priority level 1 2 3 4 Output Mute j Jo Jj c 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 397 Mat Output Mute Of J j Matrix QutputLevel 0 900 0 01 Ouptlee 0 3900 200 01 Threshold 400 900 200 01 Background Threshold 150 0 1000 01 HodTme D 0 01 Attenuation Response Time Lie a NENNEN 01 0 01 20 0 01 L5 O 100 10 O NOM Attenuation Step EE EN G 100 0 10000 Ca a 10 Second ms 10 NOM Attenuation Max 100 Attenuation Gain 100 0 20 0 100 0 Open Mic Limits Nolimt e pouce NOM Attenuation Mode 1 NOM 1 step Element Description Name Initial Minimum Maximum Precision 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Off 5 10 e Type
65. R W The right of reading or writing parameters in Ateis devices e System Online The right of online with Ateis devices e Master Preset To select all authorities in master preset e Master Preset View The right of vewing master preset configuration e Master Preset Edit The right of vewing editing settings belong to master presets e Master Preset Control The right of switching master presets On the right bottom of window there are two buttons e Create To create a new user level and enable desired authorities e Delete To remove select user level Notes that Administrator Power User and User is not allowed to remove 5 6 3 User Accounts Ateis device allow you to create multiple sers for controlling system For each user you can specify different access right by giving an user level By clicking page Accounts you can create or remove users By User Manager Settings Levels Accounts Jeffrey Power User admin Administrator There is a grid to list all users followings are description of each field e User The name of user O 2012 ATEIS 6 1 6 1 1 System Functionality 275 e Level The level user belongs to e Link A ellipsis button to switch page to Levels and focus on the level that user belongs to Three buttons on the right bottom of window e Create Create a new user e Delete Remove selected user e Edit Change password of selected user Components of Audio Processor AEC
66. Secondary Active Indicator This LED light up if active system is primary audio processor 2 Primary Active Indicator This LED light up if active system is secondary audio processor 3 Fault Indicator This LED light up if the unit is set to be slave and a short or open is detected on S WD Secondary Watching Dog port A If this indicator light up it means there is an error of the unit user needs to check wiring of S WD connector or replace by a good unit 4 Power Indicator This LED light up if this unit is power on 4 2 1 5 3 Rear Panel r RI a E KI D x amp m p om m DE LX F i LJ x om m EE E ooo 1 Output Contacts There are 8 channels for output contacts each channel consist of three connectors where N is the number of channel e P N Connect to Nt output contact of primary audio processor e N NP channel of output contact e S N Connect to N output contact of secondary audio processor 2012 ATEIS Product Features 125 2 Expansion Power Supply Output 24V DC power to next RU MAIN PDC CTL devices There are two connectors of this output e PRI Connect to Power Supply PRI connector next RU MAIN PDC CTL e SEC Connect to Power Supply SEC connector next RU MAIN PDC CTL 3 Power Supply 24V DC power input which is connect to 24V DC Output of audio processor There are two connectors of this input e PRI 24V DC power input from primary audio processor e SEC 24V DC powe
67. Temp and Distance to compute delay time Element Type is can switch between two modes r Control Window eg CIS d ail ll P l T Distance 1 Maximum value of Delay time in various type of Delay Basic 2 Precision value of Delay time in various type of Delay Basic 20 us 2012 ATEIS 286 Ateis Studio 1000ms 2000ms 20 us 3 Maximum value of Distance is depend on the type of Delay Basic Element Description e Type Choose between adjustments with Time or with Distance and temperature e Delay time opecify how much time will be delayed for the audio signal of channel e Temp opecify the temperate to compute the delay time for channel e Distance opecify the Distance to compute the delay time for channel Note If a channel is mute and bypass at the same time the audio signal of the channel will mute Application Refer to Delay Advanced O 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 287 6 4 Dynamic 6 4 1 AGC AGC Stereo Component Template Main DSP Components 4 der DSP sac Auto Noise Gain A N G Compressor Compressor Stereo de mp Limiter Stereo mr a IDASC sg Component Appearance Description With this Automatic Gain Control the input signal can be increase or decrease to a target level For example without AGC the sound emitted from an AM radio receiver would vary to an extreme extent from a weak to a strong signal The AGC
68. When RU is set to be master it monitor both P WD and S WD for choose which IDA8 network will be active but if RU is set to slave it only 2012 ATEIS Product Features 119 monitor S_WD to determine which one can be active 8 P ACT Primary Active Output Output a logic signal to indicate primary audio processor is active 9 P WD Primary Watching Dog RU devices monitor this logic signal for determining active audio processor please refer to item S_WD Secondary Watching Dog 10 Master Slave Switch A dip switch to set RU MAIN be master or slave The difference between master and slave please refer to item S WD Secondary Watching Dog 11 Expansion Power Supply Output 24V DC power to next RU MAIN PDC CTL devices There are two connectors of this output e PRI Connect to Power Supply PRI connector next RU MAIN PDC CTL e SEC Connect to Power Supply SEC connector next RU MAIN PDC CTL 12 Power Supply 24V DC power input which is connect to 24V DC Output of IDA8C S There are two connectors of this input e PRI 24V DC power input from primary audio processor e SEC 24V DC power input from secondary audio processor 13 Speaker Zone Output There are 8 zones for speaker connection each zone consists of following connectors from left to right e P LINEA Connect to speaker zone output line A of primary audio processor e P LINEB Connect to speaker zone output line B of primary audio processor e UNE A Connec
69. a certain threshold and stops when it returns to normal values Four LEDs display the status of each amplifier AC or DC power supply Line Overload and Temperature overload Furthermore a three LEDs Vu Meter indicates the presence and level of audio signal 2012 ATEIS Product Features 207 A surveillance circuit continuously monitors the temperature and the presence of AC and DC power supplies for both amplifiers In case of a problem the overload LEDs will be switched ON and the Fault relay will be activated SPA series SPA 2060 2120 2240 can be ordered with optional 115V power supply Please contact your local dealer or your regional ATEIS branch office Specifications e Output power o SPA 2060 2 X60W o SPA 2120 2 X 120W o SPA 2240 2 X 240W e Output voltage 8 U 70 amp 100 V e Power indicate 24 V and 230 V Yes e Frequency respond 60 18000 Hz e Distortion 1 e Output 4 8 U 70 100 V e Fault contact s yes e Signal indication Yes 4 3 1 2 Front Panel n Front Panel Q VU Meter The VU meter is composed of three LEDs that represent three different level thresholds 40dB 20dB and OdB When the input signal reaches those thresholds the corresponding LED will blink Overload The overload LED will blink as soon as the output power exceeds the nominal value If the Overload LED is blinking check that the output load is well connected and still in good condition as well as 2012 A
70. a combo box is used to switch rs485 channel for settings Option of Only PSS AS To specify the channel is connected with PSS AS When you enable this option it means no other remote devices are allowed connected to this channel Refresh Read data from audio processor to refresh display information e Plug In Set the editing data to audio processor 4 Select Remote Type Select which type of remote device you ll using in the RS485 channel 5 Input SN Type serial number of the remote device 6 Press Plug In Button Write settings to audio processor to register remote devices 2012 ATEIS 270 5 4 6 9 9 5 5 1 5 5 1 1 5 5 1 2 Ateis Studio Reverse This function allow user to reverse design from audio processors 1 Open Device Management Window 2 Search and Connect to the device 3 Click Reverse to execute reverse procedure 3rd Party Control Ateis 3rd Party Control Overview Ateis device supplies a flexible way for controlling parameters inside it Ateis 3rd party protocol allow external device to control Ateis device through Ethernet or RS232 depend on devices Assign Elements to 3rd Party Control To make a element to be controlled by 3rd party protocol you need to specify it is able to controlled by 3rd party devices to do this setting right click the element and click on menu 3rd Party Control gt Single Release Thresholc Max ida fusion Lo P Sub Preset Control URC
71. about settings of event linking PSS AS with the ability of triggering event using key You need to specify the link relation of key and event at design time 2012 ATEIS Product Features 157 4 Event 2 Trigger H dun 5 Event3 Trigger Le e Event Select the event linked to the key e Control Mode opecify the control mode is Trigger or Control see more details on topic Event Management e State Enter a value for the state that processed by event control procedure each state number result different adjustment of system see more details on topic Event Management e ink Open settings window of the event PSS AS Settings Message Tab O 2012 ATEIS 158 Ateis Studio Processor Message 1 GNGSTONS WAV 2 3 4 2 6 H 8 9 This section is talking about to setup the message list for play on runtime in PSS AS Before selection you need to build chime list which settings in on the tab Setting todo check with rider e Ch Left The channel number for a message on local e Local Message The message belongs to local list indicates this message is inside the PSS AS itself e Ch Right The channel number for a message on audio processor e Processor Message The message belongs to processor list indicates this message Is inside the audio processor A It need to work with Message Player component PSS AS Settings Setting Tab O 2012 ATEIS Product Features 159
72. activation level e Hold Time Sets the threshold for channel activation e Attenuation Response Time Sets a pre delay time for automatic attenuation That s means the transition time of the attenuation when a channel is added or removed e NOM Attenuation Step Sets the amount of attenuation to be applied each time the number of activated channels increases e NOM Attenuation Max Limits the amount of attenuation to be applied e Attenuation Gain Indicates the amount of current gain reduction e Open Mic Limits Chooses the maximum number of simultaneously activated channels e NOM Attenuation Mode Chose here if you want a linear attenuation or a logarithmic attenuation which is more near of the reality Eq1 NOM 1 x step same attenuation for each addicting channel Eq2 log2 NOM x step 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 399 6 15 3 Matrix Component Template Main DSP Components Be DSP Component EHE Miner ef AUtoMixer o ER AutoMixer MM EET Matrix gp Met Input Device Modullen Component Appearance Description Matrix Mixers offer three main functionalities e Mixing summing signals together e Routing allows the routing of source signals to external processing components Clicking the orange colored function Output n buttons under the label Variable Matrix in the middle of the window opens the sub control windows of the particular output chann
73. allow user to edit a list for the exceptions of the triggering each exception consist of a start time and stop time During the exception time all triggering will be masked 388 Ateis Studio 6 13 Meter 6 13 1 Peak RMS Meter ve Component Template Main DSP Components EE DSP Component EL Logic EE Meter e Mixer Device MadulelDi amp sc Component Appearance Description This component display the amplitude of the audio signal coming in There are two approaches available for measuring the signal The first one is RMS which is offend use to measure complex waveforms especially non repeating signals like noise The second is Peak approach 4 Control Window 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 389 alume algun Element Properties fF Name Initial Minimum Maximum Precision Unit Indefinite Of J J MeasureType RMS ve Element Description e Indefinite Block the display of level value e Measure Type Type of measure e Hold Time Able to see keep displayed the value along a the hold time e Volume Measured value of signal O 2012 ATEIS 390 Ateis Studio 6 14 Message 6 14 1 Message Player Component Template Main DSF Components Be DSP Component er Logic er Meter EE Message d Message Player d MM Player er Miner er Met Input GR Net Output gp Moise Generator
74. ap Bos 34 Dynamic LH Equalizer LH Feedback 8 Filter E s Fireman Input E Inverter EE EE Local Echo Suppressor gt DN AND Rv ti sa Capturer zi n Detector mm D Emeraencv Dep power W 7846 It oee more details in topic Fireman component 2012 ATEIS Product Features 181 4 2 11 CDPA 4 2 11 1 Overview CD PAGING CONSOLE EVAC MUSIC 1 MUSIC 2 2 em gt ALL RELEASE MUSIC IN CDPA Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console for Ateis audio processor Wall mount heaw duty remote paging console with Access level 2 protection to comply with the EN 54 16 Compatible with Ateis audio processor and communicates over a dedicated RS485 for Power audio and DATA CDPA supports 2 channels of music input Users can press the button for music channel selection There are two LED indicators to show which music channel is active The unit comprises of 24 zones 24 buttons with fist firemen s microphone in a metal surface mount wall box It provides robust IP 30 protection Each CDPA contains two PMM PS Master PCBs with extension keypads and uses the same architecture as for the PPM AS series of microphone consoles Each Ateis audio processor like IDA8C can handle up to 31 CDPA units per 485 port in Master Slave configuration Note that only the Master unit is secured Slaves are not The buttons can represent a single zone or a group of zones All buttons can be
75. configuration of the device can be set to the physical one Click Name field of device list to select correspond device object Refer to topic search and settings for more detail 42 4 PSSAS 4 2 4 4 Overview 2012 ATEIS Product Features 151 The PSS AS touch paging microphone console is a man machine interface which allows paging call messages broadcasting and DSP matrix parameter control Its back lit touch screen is designed for simple and user friendly operating Various operating levels with password protection make the PSS AS a versatile device that fits well in a commercial shopping center as for an industrial high security environment All paging parameters needed for site operating can be programmed zones assigned to the different buttons name of zones group of zones messages triggering levels adjustments and pre call chime but also for fader control button control or event control A total of twelve keys on fourteen pages allow zone or group of zones selections Each key contains a color changing field indicating that the zone is occupied by a different process 4 2 4 2 Control Panel POWER FAULT 1 Microphone A 280mm flex microphone 2 Power LED This LED light up when the PSS AS is powered on 3 Fault LED To display fault status of system Following table list the states of fault Activit Permanent There are faults in audio processor Blinking Lost communication with audio processor
76. device can be controlled by URC200 TPC Following steps is an instruction for building menus 1 Lunch the Remote G2 software On the left there is a grid lists all the devices could be found by it select the node CR200 and click IP settings in Remote Device page Remote G2 Sele Devices Type Serial No Ateis Net ID IP Sub Mask Gateway TCP Connect Function List Remote Device J Ateis Device 3 IDAS Update IDAS 11234 255 255 192 168 101 4 255 255 252 0 192 168 100 254 2 Logo Store IDAS 1115 1 1 192 168 101 8 255 255 252 0 192 168 100 254 Eo IDAS 237 1 1 192 168 100 19 255 255 252 0 192 168 100 254 e IDABC 1 IDAS 1110 1 1 192 168 101 7 255 255 252 0 192 168 100 254 ER IDABC 1 IDAS 1113 1 1 192 168 101 6 255 255 252 0 192 168 100 254 IDASC 1 IDAS 1114 1 1 192 168 101 3 255 255 252 0 192 168 100 254 zJECS ECS 1 ECS 121 1 1 192 168 100 228 255 255 255 0 192 168 100 254 ECS1 ECS 113 1 1 192 168 101 182 255 255 252 0 192 168 100 254 ECS2 ECS 129 1 2 192 168 100 5 255 255 255 0 192 168 100 254 ECS 3 ECS 126 1 3 192 168 100 46 255 255 255 0 192 168 100 254 URC200 CR200 2021 1 1 192 168 101 192 255 255 252 0 192 168 100 254 Yes G8 Search lll stop Clear Search Timeout Interval 3 5 2 It open the window lpStringsSettingsFm This window lists all the URC200 TPC that ready to save or load the configuration Click the button CMD to open the settings window for the first la
77. e LED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S e Log o PPM AS PSS AS Capsule Microphone Open Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Remote Fault PSS Port 1 ID 1 Microphone Fault where Port N is the NI PDC port for peripheral connection ID is the unique number for each peripheral device on the PDC port Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio O 2012 ATEIS Product Features 95 M Iachine Fault Record More Detail Remote Fault o PPM AS PSS AS Capsule Microphone Short Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Remote Fault PSS Port 1 ID 1 Microphone Fault where Port N is the NI PDC port for peripheral connection ID is the unique number for each peripheral device on the PDC port Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio Set Ilachine Fault Record M X Description More Detail Remote Fault o PPM AS PSS Speaker Error Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Remote Fault PSS Port 1 ID 1 Speaker Fault where Port N is the N PDC port for peripheral connection ID is the unique number for each peripheral device on the PDC port Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio A achine Fault Record amp A Description More Detail Remote Fault e Buzze
78. error is detected following LEDs will light up o System Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S e Log Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C NetCard Error Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio More Detail Netcard Error e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C ge Fault Handling Contact service to repair device 4 1 6 1 4 DSP Error Fault Meaning It s an internal error of communication between micro controllers inside devices r Fault Indication 2012 ATEIS Ateis Studio e LED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up o System Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S e Log Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C DSP Error Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio More Detail DSP Error e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C Fault Handling Contact service to repair device 4 1 6 1 5 Preset Table Error Fault Meaning The structure of configuration is not compatible with current firmware Fault Indication e LED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up o System Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S e Log Text messages display at touch screen on front pan
79. features from the software The PTT button can be programmed for Push To Talk or for latching functionality The unit offers Hold and Busy LED signals in addition to the zone LED s and these allow the easy identification of Selection Busy signals for the user In addition to comply with EN 54 16 separate POWER FAULT and EVAC indicators are provided The RS485 communication protocol offers daisy chaining of up to 300 m on a simple CATS cable and yet makes outlets easy to connect via a standard RJ45 connector Control Panel ATEIS CD16 PAGING CONSOLE A EVAC FAULT POWER TALK LED TEST wl S W I wu Mel Gel Med Ww 1 Fireman Microphone Hook An U shape hook to place fireman microphone 2 Busy Indicator 1 8 Show the status of zone 2012 ATEIS Product Features 177 M MI M Priority of the zone is lower than other sources Priority of the zone is higher than other sources 3 The zone only desired for paging is not using by other Sources 3 Fault Indicator To display fault status of system Following table list the states of fault Activit Permanent v There are faults in audio processor Blinking Ba w Lost communication with audio processor 4 Monitoring Speaker This embedded speaker to play chime when paging or monitor signal from audio processor it needs to work with rs485 output component to get audio signal from other DSP components in audio
80. global fault is detected Bypass Mode LED To indicate IDA8C is in bypass mode or not Bypass Monitoring LED Show the monitoring function is enabled or not This LED lights on if monitoring of IDA8 is disabled by user Global EVAC LED To indicate system is in EVAC paging state or not This LED lights on if any IDA8 device over Ateis Net do an EVAC paging See the topic of Network Paging Component to learn more about how to config a EVAC paging Zone EVAC LEDs To show the audio channel is in EVAC paging or not Each LED is correspond to a output channel of Network Paging component for example ist LED is for pin M1 2nd LED for pin M2 and so on Power LED This LED lights on when IDA8SAB is power on Network LED Show the status of Ateis Net This LED lights on if more than two deployed IDA8 devices in Ateis Net o Zone Fault LEDs O 2012 ATEIS a2 Ateis Studio To show fault status of zone This LED light on if one of following faults is detected e Normal AMP Error e Line A Error e Line B Error e Backup AMP Error e AMP Line Leakage Error 4 1 2 3 Rear Panel ms E Mun i Zeep d a o E eepe e e ea ea e ALEI LL RRC ae ROUEN Pai Pai Pei Pei Pi Fei Pei Pei Pei Pei Fei Fei TT MMPPIEITTII A Be a AR FECI e Gate FoI e Ben c BIG RRR ER E E TE EIER EE E E EN Pose TAAL F280 vee Ar ae CNEL UI p di DL T3
81. gt Properties you can open properties window O 2012 ATEIS 244 Ateis Studio 5 1 20 Message Library Message Library provides a easy interface to manage messages used in Ateis Studio By click menu View gt Message Library you can open message library window sw Ivlessage Library Path C Data Ateis Projects Ateis Studio Resource ClipboardlExecutable Messages 16 GNGSTONS WAV WAVE Mono Add Delete Close e Path The working directory for message files e Open Open a file browser to change working directory e Message File Llst A grid to list all messages in working directory and display information about it e Add To add a message into working directory e Delete Remove selected entry of message list e Close Close Message Libraray window 2012 ATEIS System Functionality mss 5 1 21 Logo Library Logo Library is a settings windows about Logo Library management By click menu View gt Logo Library you can open logo library window Add Delete The left of window list all Logo files On right of window there is a preview window for selected logo file Button Add to add a logo file Button Delete to remove selected logo file 5 2 Presets 5 2 1 Overview The Ateis systems include two types of presets e The Master presets design preset they enable completely different designs to be restored e The Sub Presets parameters preset They enable values of
82. intensity of remain echo suppression NLP Threshold 90 to 20 dB The threshold value of the Nonlinear Process dB Noise Button Enable the noise gate Reduction Enable NR Threshold 90 to 20 dB Threshold of the noise gate 6 1 2 Functions The AEC component provides four fully independent channels far ancd far end 2 far end 3 far and 4 far in 3 output 3 far in 1 1 far in 2 output 1 output 2 far in 4 output 4 On the component each channel has one input called far in one output and one reference called far end The far end signal will be removed of the far in signal in order to send a proper signal to the other room O 2012 ATEIS 278 Ateis Studio Signal x Ge 0 0 d 0 0 F 0 0 0 0 Coeficien vmm f Volume dB Near End Volume dB Near End Level dB e NLP NLP Threshold dB Reduction En able MR E Threshold r AEC Coefficient Reset On each channel you can independently activate the echo cancellation process by setting the AEC Coefficient parameter on Perform You can also let it working without the process activates by keeping the AEC coefficient by choosing Hold Of course you can deactivate it on Off Co E cient The reset button is used to reset the AEC coefficient Volume display and control The far end volume and near end volume vu meters display respectively the far end and near end 2012 ATEI
83. multiple parameters of the same design such as levels gains EQ etc to be restored either from the PC software the remote controllers or the control inputs These Master Presets and Sub Presets residing in the devices memory which can be accessed in many ways PC Logic inputs Third party The max number of master presets and sub presets depends on machine memory size and content of each preset O 2012 ATEIS Me Ateis Studio 5 2 2 Master Presets FF SS Se E E E E E E E EE E WE WEE k AT Ci AT C ZIZZEEREEEEEIIIIIEIIIILIIIIIEIELILIIIIIII Ad Ca si 2E em in s099209090999090090090909000000 92 H3 Da e H H4 DA A H e MA EERSTEN g PEG Master Preset 1 En e MX Master Preset 2 The Master Preset function allows switching between several designs on the same device Each Master Preset can contains different components design path sub preset etc Then the user can switch of the complete design simply by change of Master Presets That can be done by using logic input contact or by third party Master Preset Management This section describe how to create or remove master presets On the main window top click on the ellipsis button next to Master Preset combo box Master Preset Master Preset The Presets window opens Select the Master Presets tab 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 2a7 e Master Preset Name The name of master preset e Edit By clicking ell
84. mutes the output channel LED lit red with channel muted e Signal To indicate the channel is active or not 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 4m e Level Signal output level of the module e Overload thd Sets the threshold of the overload indicator 6 19 3 Mono Output Component Template Main DSP Components Ee DSP Component F Output E Mono Output A JE Mono Output B E Mena Output C E lE Mono Output D E Stereo Output A fg Stereo Output B E Stereo Output C El Stereo Output D Device MacdulelD sc Component Appearance Description For AES EBU output the mono output modules represent the physical outputs accessible on the rear panel of the device There are several separate modules for use with each of the audio board Input and output modules are added automatically to the DSP window of the relevant processor by defining their module configuration at the time you create them and should not be altered r Control Window O 2012 ATEIS ata Ateis Studio SCH Mono iud A 4 a4 Valu me Ou Element Properties Overload r j j Voume 500 500 200 01 dBu ute of o Lo LLL Signal J Of J Led 0 200 200 01 dB Ovetoadthd LL 30 200 200 01 dB ve Element Description e Overload Indicates channel level above chosen Overload Thres
85. pick up from the user and hence less interference from the surroundings thanks to the cardioid polar pick up pattern The RS485 communication protocol offers daisy chaining of up to 100 m on a CAT5 cable and yet makes outlets easy to connect via a standard RJ45 connectors The microphone compatibility listing shows the maximum number of units per System O 2012 ATEIS 142 Ateis Studio 4 2 3 2 Control Panel 1 Microphone The sleek condenser gooseneck microphone This unidirectional condenser microphone warrants high quality directive signal pick up from the user and hence less interference from the surroundings 2 Monitoring Speaker This embedded speaker to play chime when paging or monitor signal from audio processor it needs to work with rs485 output component to get audio signal from other DSP components in audio processor 3 Fault LED To display fault status of system Following table list the states of fault Permanent There are faults in audio processor Blinking Lost communication with audio processor 4 EVAC LED Frequenc Activit Permanent p System is under evacuation paging PPM AS does not do a Plug in in Ateis Studio before using 2012 ATEIS Product Features 143 ah Plug in make audio processor to recognize the peripheral devices 5 Power LED This LED light up when the PPM AS is powered on 6 Hold LED These LEDs Indicate which keys are selected 7 Event Sele
86. pins between URC AS object and audio processor 100 200 A Je Audio Processors ER IDASS Em IDASS 1U mm IDASSL BSEHEZTURZ WEE e een EE LE e SEET e URC AS Settings Double click URC AS object to open settings window O 2012 ATEIS Product Features 163 Delte Control Type Assign Right Preset Selector a e Serial Number serial number of the URC AS e Name Name of the URC AS e Memory Indicate memory usage of the URC AS for current settings ve URC AS Settings About Tab This page include settings for About function in URC AS About is the last item of first layered menu in URC AS Click the item to enter second layer of About function that is a list of texts that set in design time f e Title The text of about title e tem The item No for the text in About text list O 2012 ATEIS 164 Ateis Studio e Text The text in About text list e Add To add a text in About text list e Delete To remove selected text from About text list URC AS Settings Global Parameters Tab Global Parameters Label Control Type Assign Right A 1 3 MP Sel Preset Selector First Layer 0 This page is settings about items in URC AS for controlling global parameters like changing master sub presets Users are allow to create arbitrary number of items until reach the memory limit which displayed on the bottom of window e Add Add a item in URC AS for controllin
87. programmed with drag amp drop features from the software The PTT button can be programmed for Push To Talk or for latching functionality The unit offers Hold and Busy LED signals in addition to the zone LED s and these allow the easy identification of Selection Busy signals for the user In addition to comply with EN 54 16 separate POWER FAULT and EVAC indicators are provided O 2012 ATEIS 182 Ateis Studio Additional RCA connectors with selection buttons support local audio injection for commercial usage The RS485 communication protocol offers daisy chaining of up to 300 m on a simple CAT5 cable and yet makes outlets easy to connect via a standard RJ45 connector 4 2 11 2 Control Panel ATEIS CD PAGING CONSOLE A EVAC POWER MUSIC 1 MUSIC H OG mm an ALLIRELEASE MUSIC IN 9 D Kk 1 Fireman Microphone The Fireman Microphone SHM 1 is a small compact microphone dedicated to security calling It is a totally monitored microphone with internal resistor network to detect four different states Shortcut Closed Contact Open Contact Absent Firemen Microphone SHM 1 for All call group or zone calls 2 Music Active Indicator These two led to indicate which music input channel is active 3 Music Selection Button To select music input channel 4 Fault Indicator To display fault status of system Following table list the states of fault 2012 ATEIS Product Features 183
88. root menu O 2012 ATEIS 204 Ateis Studio 4 2 15 PPM IT5 4 2 15 1 Overview The PPMIT5 IP paging console is a man machine interface which allows call paging messages broadcasting Its back lit touch screen is designed for simple and user friendly operating The 3 hardware keys can be freely assigned by software The PPM IT5 Media console is a versatile device that fits well in a commercial shopping center as for an industrial environment where paging over IP networking brings flexibility and easy access All paging parameters needed for site operating can be programmed zones assigned to the different buttons name of zones group of zones messages triggering or event control A total of 168 keys over 12 pages allow zone or group of zones selections The prerecorded messages and the chime are stored into the PPM IT5 IP paging console O 2012 ATEIS Product Features 205 All the settings are done through web pages with your favorite web browser Thanks to powerful echo cancellation the PPM IT5 delivers clear sound for full duplex talk PPM IT5 is made of e 5 TFT full color paging console e High quality gooseneck microphone e Built in loudspeaker e Ethernet interface including PoE Power Over Ethernet e 24 VDC power supply if no PoE available e Automatic gain control on microphone input e Echo cancellation noise reduction e G 711 G 722 MP3 audio encoding decoding e Half or full duplex talk e Memory spa
89. settings e Zone Indicate zone number of parameters e Mute To mute tone signal e Level dB The level of tone signal e Frequency Hz The frequency of tone signal Zones with 100V e Frequency The frequency of tone signal e Enable 1K Tone 2012 ATEIS 108 Ateis Studio Enable 1K tone for monitoring If this option is on during Start Time and End Time a 1K tone signal send to amplifier for monitoring o Start Time hh mm The time to start sending 1K tone o End Time hh mm The time of end 1K tone sending 4 1 7 Bypass Mode Paging IDA8C SX provide a safe mechanism for paging when microchip inside the device is not working We call it bypass mode paging When system is in bypass mode paging paging source through normal amplifier directly without DSP component processing and backup amplifier can t working due to micro controller is crash Source of bypass mode paging There are two source can be the input of bypass mode paging e Fireman microphone Fireman microphone is a microphone with a button can be plugged in front panel of IDA8 When system under bypass mode paging press the button to start paging release button to end paging e Audio coming from PDC1 IDA8C allow you to use PDC1 be the source of bypass paging it need a button to start paging also the by pass mode input contact can connect to a button for triggering bypass mode paging PN Fireman microphone with higher priority than PDC1 sour
90. the contrary if the DNM is installed around quiet side the volume of broadcast is too small for the loud side To avoid this problem the user can separate the area to several zones and one DNM for one separated zone and all of the DNM are same input source ex Department store etc bu nom 4 m Eege KH Wi t 2012 ATEIS Product Features 129 Note The sound of loudspeakers from another zone can t effect each other otherwise the DNM will consider the sounds from another zone as a background noise 4 2 2 3 Characteristics 4 Case Dimension 100mm O x 130mm H Weight 7 0 13 Kg n Power Current Consumption DC Input 18V 26V Typical 24V 250mA ERE TERRE Microphone e Sensitivity adjustment rang 60 120dBA 5dBA e THD 1kHz lt 0 2 e Bandwidth 3dB 50Hz 16kHz e Maximum Cable Length 600M on category 5 cable 4 2 2 4 Configuration 1 Plug the DNM to the RS485 PDC port of IDA8C S Here s the example using IDA8 the configuration is the same for other Ateis Audio Processor 2 Search and click on the entry of IDA8C S in the Devce Management window O 2012 ATEIS 130 Ateis Studio Device Management Ateis Nets Ateis ECS 1 Ateis LAP G2T 1 ak h Ateis Nets Ateis ECS 1 E Ateis LAF G2T 1 zh Search Timeout Interval 5 2 Remote Update Chime Data Store Ateis Nets
91. time between the end level s detection and the end of the Gate operation e Release Time Adjust the fade out time of the signal when Gate is no longer working e Depth Attenuate the level when the Gate is active 6 4 8 2 Gate Stereo ve Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component ER Delay Advanced e H Delay Basic M Dvnamic Ds Auto Noise Gain A N G EB Compressor m Lo pre es Stereo f7 Ducker Stereo EB Expander EB Expander Stereo B 7 Gate r Device E ac Component Appearance O 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor we Description Simple double channel Gate r Control Window E F Right xesponse aem Hala Release Lett Right ain Time Time Time Time Depth Depth va Element Description e Mute Mute the gate s module e Bypass owitch off the gate s operation Gate On Light on when the gate is active open e Left Gain Set the volume of the signal connected in the input L Right Gain O 2012 ATEIS 320 Ateis Studio Set the volume of the signal connected in the input R Thd Sets the threshold level above which Gate will open Response Time Adjust the time between the level s detection and the beginning of the Gate operation Attack Time Adjust the fade in time of the signal when Gate is working Hold Time Adjust the time between the end level s detection and the end of the G
92. voltage polarization change L 24V DC Output This connector supplies a 24VDC source W 24V DC Input Main 24VDC power supply connector 18 AC Power Socket Main 110 240 V 1 2A 47 63Hz AC power input with fuse If 24V DC and AC power input at the same time IDA8C will use AC power and switch to DC power if there is no AC power input Fuse Rating 3 15A e Zone Boards e Zone Board1 The following I Os are belong to zone board1 in IDA8C speaker zone output ch1 ch4 backup amplifier1 amplifier zone output chi ch4 e Zone Board2 The following I Os are belong to zone board2 in IDA8C speaker zone output ch5 ch8 backup amplifier2 amplifier zone output ch5 ch O 2012 ATEIS 36 Ateis Studio 4 1 1 4 Characteristics Case e Dimension 436mm W x 313mm L x 88mm H e Weight 5 36Kg e Color RAL 016 d Screen e 3 5 Color touch panel n Power Item Voltage Current Consumption __Comment__ AC Input 100V 240V 1 6A 100V 0 7A 240V _Frequency 47Hz 63Hz DC Input 18V 26V Typical 24V DC Output 18V 26V Typical 24V 05A o o O e AC Maximum Consumption 45 W Amplifier Zone Outputs e Maximum level 14 dB e Output Impedance 50 Ohm e THD N Total Harmonic Distortion plus Noise 20 20kHz Q 44dBu e Bandwidth 20Hz 20kHz e ElN Equivalent Input Noise 20 20kHz 150U 20 20kHz 150U 0 20 20kHz 150U 20 20kHz 150U 20 20kHz 150U Speaker line Amplifier
93. zone 1 is occupied by source PSS AS O 2012 ATEIS a2 Ateis Studio 6 22 RS485 Audio 6 22 1 RS485 Input ve Component Template Main DSP Components Fi d DSP Component H JP Page Control H 3 3 Recorder en R5485 Audio a H Selector o ER Signal Monitor vo a Telephone Card S Voxnet Control GJ Custom Component Component Appearance Description This component control the RS485 input signals parameters and monitor it The input component represent the physical analogue inputs accessible on the 485 port of the Audio Processor There are A D four ports represent for different channel of 485 port Some consoles like PSS AS it transfer audio signal va PDC port which is RS485 interface To process audio signal with other DSP component you need to create RS485 Input component in design window 4 Control Window O 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor om EN RS485 Inpu Laii Overload ature ag Signal S Overload Thea dB Element Properties Bypass Mute Of J RO JJ Jj ot J Overload Of J j j Voume 200 200 200 01 dB Signal J Of J Led 0 60 200 01 dB OveloadThd 20 0 200 200 201 dB va Element Description e Bypass Bypass audio of the channel e Mute Mute audio of t
94. 012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor a r Control Window Phone 4nevyer EN EE We all al Phone Answer Manual Element Description e Caller Mute Mute the audio of caller Caller Level Adjust audio level of caller e Ring Mute Mute ring audio Ring Level Adjust level of ring DIMF After an incoming call was accepted if caller press any key on phone telephone card will detect and display the status on control window also change the state of logic output corresponding the number detected O 2012 ATEIS aaa Ateis Studio e History Display the DIMF number ever detected e Phone Answer The mode of action for answering incoming calls There are two kind of modes o Manual Press Dial button on control window of TC Transmit for accepting calls o After N Rings Telephone accept calls automatically after rings N times e Noise Suppression To enable or disable noise suppression function e Line Echo Cancellation To enable or disable line echo cancellation function e Voice Enhance To enable or disable voice enhance function 6 27 Voxnet Control Component Template Main DSP Components Er d DSP Component H JP Page Control H 3 3 Recorder o a R5485 Audio amp 3 Selector e DH Signal Monitor F a Telephone Card ge Voxnet Contro E P Custom Component Component Appearance Descr
95. 0kHzQ 1500 MdBu 04 dBu 20 20kHzQ 1500 40dBu LL 112 dB 20 20kHzQ 1500 54dBu ms TI dBu 20 20kHzQ 1500 ve Speaker line Amplifier e Maximum Power 700W RMS e Maximum Power Siren Message 1000W Configurable Audio Output e Maximum level 14 dBu e Output Impedance 50 Ohm e THD N Total Harmonic Distortion plus Noise pa a A e S 00 239 X 20 20kHzQ 4dBu 12dBu 3L e h 20 20kHz 2dBu 14dBu 30dBu 44dBu 2012 ATEIS Product Features 45 e Bandwidth 20Hz 20kHz e ElN Equivalent Input Noise Oda LL 8 dBu 20 20kHzQ 1500 2dBu e dBu 20 20kHzQ 1500 24du ou dBu 20 20kHzQ 150U 40ddu 112 dBu X 20 20kHzQ 1500 54dBu II 1155 TI dBu 20 20kHzQ 1500 ge Configurable Audio Input e Sensitivity For each channel of configurable audio input card there are five levels to gain the audio signal They are sensitivity values of OdBu 12dbBu 24dBu 40dBu and 54dBu respectively The meaning of sensitivity value is how large the gain for an audio source and to amplify the giving minus input source to OdBu the figure below is an example when the sensitivty value is set to 54dBu and input source is 54dBu after the gaining circuit of audio card you ll get the OdBu of output Sensitivity of Input A channel 2 54dB Card Input A di
96. 1 Input Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component GJ Input E Input A E Input B m E Input C Input D ST Mana Input A E Mona Input B B E Mono Input i JET Mone Tnnut D Device MadulelDi amp sc Component Appearance O 2012 ATEIS oe Ateis Studio ve Description Control the input signals parameters and monitor it The analogue input modules represent the physical analogue inputs accessible on the rear panel of the Audio Processor There are several separate modules for use with each of the audio board slots Analogue input and output modules are added automatically to the DSP window of the relevant processor by defining their module configuration at the time you create them and should not be altered r Control Window FERA ntom Power e Overload une HEP m signal yerload The dB va Element Properties wem Am Ss a Sensitivity oB PhatomPower Of J J RO J m Jj ot j j Overload Of Voume 500 50 0 200 todo dB Signal J Of j Pte HL 600 200 01 dB 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 359 m e Element Description e Bypass Bypass audio of the channel e Mute Mute audio of the channel e Sensitivity Sets the input gain of the cha
97. 12 Normal SS ei Ateis Fault gi Redundancy s 239 192 168 102 68 Fault BD E UU TST ATEIS NET Depl Singular URC200 1 1 445544 192 168 101 66 Normal e 4 Choose the system of secondary IDA8C belongs to You can click item in combo box of redundancy then check if the device in device list grid is desired by it s serial number Redundancy System Evac Input Control Channel Device List ISO Configure Clear Cancel 5 Set Evacuation input Control Channel 2012 ATEIS o Ateis Studio za Redundancy Configuration Redundancy System Ateis Evac Input Control Channel CHS CH1 Device List CH CHa IDAST 1 Configure Cancel 6 Press button Configure A window shows message Redundancy Configuration Success if the procedure successfully done Otherwise a error window shows It the procedure was not success try to choose the other system aw Redundancy System Ateis Evac Input Control Channel CHS Device Lis IDASC 1 246 Information Clear Cancel Configure 2012 ATEIS Product Features 115 Redundancy System Ateis Evac Input Control Channel CH1 Device List Configure Clear Cancel 7 After this setting was finished you can see the information on devices window show the two IDA8C are redundancy for each other The field Redundancy Addr now are filled with the redundant IDA8C s ad
98. 120 12 3 Kg o SPA2240 18 5 Kg e Color RAL 016 O 2012 ATEIS 210 Ateis Studio n Power Item Voltage Current Consumption Comment AC Input 230V 10 Frequency 47Hz 63Hz DC Output 21 28V Typical 24V 1A le Audio e Frequency response 40 20 000 Hz e Distortion at nominal power lt 1 e Signal noise ratio gt 90 dB amp Inputs Outputs e Power output 100 V e Main line input 770 mV e Input impedance 20 KOhms n Current consumption Current consumption with 28 VDC suppl Standby 1 8 1 4 1 2 Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Power Power Power Power Audi 50 Siren Messages Message 50 Siren Current consumption with 230 AC suppl er channel Working Temperature e 0 C 40 C 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 211 5 System Functionality 5 1 Ateis Studio 5 1 1 Overiew of Ateis Studio ATEIS amily Res ba n D p LI e P LEES 1 3 a ee bk K t p A 5 F t Ateis Studio allows complete audio systems with a multitude of similar or different devices to be configured supervised and controlled centrally from a single user interface Ateis Studio supports all IP based products with the Ateis product family such as IDA8 LAP ECS By this way you can have a large view of the system containing every devices remote devices and virtual connection between them Ateis Studio is ready for future expansion in conjunction
99. 16 Compatible with Ateis audio processor and communicates over a dedicated RS485 for Power audio and DATA The unit comprises of 16 zones 16 buttons with fist firemen s microphone in a metal surface mount wall box It provides robust IP 30 protection Each PCP contains a PMM PS Master PCB with extension keypad and uses the same architecture as for the PPM AS series of microphone consoles Each Ateis audio processor like IDA8C can handle up to 31 PCP units per 485 port in Master Slave configuration Note that only the Master unit is secured Slaves are not The buttons can represent a single zone or a group of zones All buttons can be programmed with drag amp drop features from the software The PTT button can be programmed for Push To Talk or for latching functionality The unit offers Hold and Busy LED signals in addition to the zone LED s and these allow the easy identification of Selection Busy signals for the user In addition to comply with EN 54 16 separate POWER FAULT and EVAC indicators are provided The RS485 communication protocol offers daisy chaining of up to 300 m on a simple CATS cable and yet makes outlets easy to connect via a standard RJ45 connector O 2012 ATEIS 186 Ateis Studio 4 2 12 2 Control Panel PCP PAGING CONSOLE ATEIS e EVAC FAULT POWER ALLIRELEASE 90 dX b dx 1 A telephone styled microphone for paging 2 Busy Indicator 1 8 Show the status of zone Color
100. 17 SYSTEM SET MENU 2 arEim There are three field IP ADDRESS SUBMASK and GATEWAY Click for each to setup O 2012 ATEIS nm Ateis Studio d A You need to reboot device take effect 4 Install Ateis Studio 5 Run Ateis Studio 6 Network settings of Ateis Studio If there are more than one network interface card on PC it need to select which one is used to connect to device To open the window for network interface card click main menu of Ateis Studio View gt Device Management 2012 ATEIS Quick star 19 Geometry Component Operation Main Compile Resource Object Tree Layers Bird s Eye Properties PPM AS Manager Message Library 3rd Party Control List 3rd Party Control Command Logo Library User Management There are three pages on the right side of window select Network page Choose the right network interface card on NIC field which is labeled using red rectangle ir UDP port is conflict with the other software change to other number Device Management 3rd Party Control Command E 3rd Party Control List 2 Device Management MIC Realtek RTL8158 8111 PCI E Gigabit Ethernet MIC Packet Scheduler Miniport IP Address 192 168 100 71 Protocal UDF Port 19760 7 Search devices Go to Devices page and press Search button 2012 ATEIS om Ateis Studio Device Management After few seconds devices are listed by tree s
101. 28 24 Resource manager is a container for files can be used in device configuration Sections listed below describe each part of the resource manager settings window Path for Resource Manager opecify path for searching resource files Browse the folder The ellipsis button to change path ga Include file When path changing copy files from original path to new path ve Pages of Resource File There are various types of file can be managed by Ateis Studio each of them corresponds to a page in resource manager The files are listed below e Update e Bitmap e Wave G 722 e AsZip e Customized Component e xml Refresh Search resource files in the folder specified in resource manager path Add Add a file to resource manager O 2012 ATEIS System Functionality oa Delete Remove selected files from resource manager Export Export selected files to a single resource packed file Import Import files from a resource packed file By click menu View Resource Manager you can open resource manager window 5 1 16 Object Tree Object tree display designing objects by tree structure make easy understanding and access objects By click menu View gt Object Tree you can open object tree window Object Tree 4 Bed Devices E Je Audio Processors al IDASCs 4 m IDABC 1 External Control FE Presets d a Preset E External Control Parameters Incompatible Zone Em Voxnet
102. 4 16 Multiple users can be created within Ateis Studio each with a unique password and access to specific layers of the GUI This creates a control surface that is specific to the needs of any system designer and or operators O 2012 ATEIS Ateis Studio 9 1 2 In addition you will find a comprehensive selection of tools for system design and programming using our Ateis Studio integrated software platform for all remote controllable devices and systems As you can have a huge system the software provides a lot of function making the navigation inside the system easier by using different layers of the design freely configurable SYHEHEVDRZ OMNE TERETE TEIE zel12801T70DI2988SO9082 After the determination of the devices included in your system you can start designing the internal signal paths independently for each device with all the exiting features the huge component library offers simply by drag and drop and connect different audio component This all is done in a straight forward and clear manner helping you to concentrate on creating state of the art electro acoustic environments Gera oce 2 3 Octave Zr E 1 This software allows management of all devices in the network from one computer That means from one computer and in one software interface you are able to update all the devices to modify the configuration and to store it into each devices independently and of course to check and updat
103. 4 2 Auto Noise Gain 8 RECH 291 6 4 5 CompressonCompressor Stereo ereeeseeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeee nennen nennen enn nnns 299 6 4 4 Comp limiter nennen 303 6 45 n 1 17 RETTEN 306 64 6 D ckernD cker Stere oinnia SERA 310 6 4 7 ExpandernExpander Stereo ereeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeneeeeeene enne rns enitn inne ins nne trate enitn natns 313 GAG 07 1 d ENT noon moro c EH e utr Senece Mc ETUR NONO 316 0649 1 G te dn Ce DEE 316 0902 Gate S H gn EE 318 0 1 0 9 Gate a VOICQ eme eroi eot d eco etae ores Pha etse conde e cuti or Moe cU C d ee REUS eA EET E Re bes 321 0 494 Gate with Sid chaln epe rra eR E ee eter ie eye eae rode cei 323 649 IamiterLimiler SIGreo cnra hie 326 MM zorra eL E E 329 651 GEQUGEQ Sle EE 329 O 2012 ATEIS 8 Ateis Studio 5652 PEPEO Sle Fe O iiisasssieccccaytceed con tecaniann leans ceataaateneaacanctuaa nnsai Ei 332 56 Ge 8 Fs Gece ene nn a eR nar a A eee ee ee er er ae 335 SM FIE EEN 338 EE SRL m H RETE ETT ILI NET 338 6 52 Band E 340 6 7 3 Band Stop C 343 6 4 Crossover Crossover Stere O x civsesccncce cies ccdecsvece ac cnecdeca EES a aaa Rex du EEE RX pEr deeg 346 6 7 9 JALIL EE 349 66 Vo fo a BL Filler EE 351 6 7 7 Shelving Filter 354 UM Frera DEE 356 69 NPU eee 357 6 9 1 Input sesesseseseseensesnensnensnenonnnennunn
104. 66 Ateis Studio 3 Click Update to open the update window 4 Select in the list your device and then click on OK 5 The browser open search the ASU Ateis Studio Update files on your PC Then click Open to start the update process Bao 2 d Organiser sea Affichages Liens favoris es SE L ECSAILO3 asu E Documents Emplacements r cents Type Fichier ASU Taille 1 16 Mo NE B mon Date de modification 03 12 2009 09 29 Autres Dossiers v A Software a 410015 EI Ji Old AteisIpUpdate Jj DIVA ECS N CC The Update window with its progress bar displays the state of the update 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 267 Ex EE LI Level 2ID Update Status 105 1 Updating 119 08 KB Sec KM 0 9 Le 6 When the update is done a pop up window appears asking if you want the restart the device This is necessary so click on Yes E Update Eg Ee 105 SE GES Information Ea The update will take effect after restart machine Do you want restart F machine 119 02 KB Sec 0 10 Elaps 0 0 0 Left 7 Now your device is updated As the device is restarting it is now unconnected When the device is ready then select it and connect it Device Management 192 168 100 7 192 168 100 6 8 Our advice is to check the firmware version to be sure that they are now displayed in black meaning that t
105. AMPO connector of speaker zone outputs see the below figure 2012 ATEIS Product Features 63 speaker speaker speaker Zone Outputs Zone Outputs Zone Outputs Amplifier AMP O AMP O AMP O Zone Outputs CH5 CH 6 CH7 CH5 ZONES ZONE 6 ZONE 8 Linea B Lineb B AM POE Lines H Lineb B AMP O IN Linea B Lined Bl AMP O E Linca Bj Lineb M AMP ON AMP O AMP ZONE 5 ZONE6 ZONE ZONES E ME WW i D E i D WW A U W H l H Gi Gi c 65 O X X e Backup Amplifiers Connection The connection of amplifiers for backup In above figure Basic Amplifier Connection B1 B2 are backup amplifiers There two connectors for each backup amplifier Follow the wire audio signal start from the AMP connector goes into the amplifier s input then gained by amplifier and input to AMP O connector The following figure is an example of backup amplifier connection Backup AMP1 CN 4 1 5 2 Amplifier Backup va Basic Concept IDA8 system apply a flexible mechanism for amplifier backup Before dig deeper inside the rule of amplifier backup let s understand the basic concept of it For most of case audio go through the normal amplifier once the normal is failure IDA8 will switch to backup amplifier to make sure the system still working At this time the technician should analysis the problem of course to replace the bad amplifier with good one The figure Audio Routing witho
106. ATEIS IDA8 amp Ateis Studio User Manual Version 1 0 1 2012 ATEIS DELIVERING YOUR MESSAGE Revision History Time Version 2012 07 23 1 0 1 Modified DNM chapter in the Product Features Consoles and Accessories 2012 07 11 1 0 0 The First Version Contents Table of Contents 0 Introduction 10 USE e 9 EDO EE 10 1 2 Ateis Presentatioris E 10 1 3 EC Declaration of GOHTOFITIEV oerte ean eii eos eta e ca mss pue assa la rane use oc soe nennen naas 12 Safety Declartion 13 Quick Start 14 SEW deele Mc E E 14 Product Features 29 4 1 IDAS8 Series Audio ProcessOor eeeeeee inesse enne nena nnne nnn nna a nnn nn nune nnn nnn 29 CRIMES Ip c o NN Toon TCR 30 ARRI G7 adi a REESE p 30 Akk Front Pane EE 31 41159 Rear Pana DEE 33 ALA Character a 36 4 1 1 5 P npherals eer 39 4 1 1 6 3rd Party C n e EE 39 Atz IDASSAB aminen E AAE eios AE 40 ATAN ER ed TEE 40 42 2 Front PANG iit b deett o voulu eege 41 4212 95 Near El e WE 42 4124 XOBAaracterisli s ee oett ei o atte eo alie dee 43 4 1 2 5 Sr 46 4 1 2 6 3rd Party Ettel a ee ere 47 413 WIR 2 SE 48 4 ds GE Ova AT EE 48 4 1 35 2 Front Panels pit tI aV n abs ae un UL E CoD M pup ess E eae ERR 49 43 9 Rear Pana BEE 50 4134 Bg EH ed d e 51 4 1 3 5 3rd Party Gonttol sip breed dete een ee 54 4 1 3 6 Stull E 54 414 IDASSG 3 usines die edes e Men V dee ea het a de aea qa ooa ecu pa Co MER on Ru EE ot pado Duae AEAEE EAE EL
107. Controller Connectors Four RJ 45 connectors to connect consoles or peripheral devices For examples PSS AS URC AS PPM AS are connect to IDA8C va this connector ap Ethernet Connector RJ 45 connector to link IDA8C on an ethernet network The following end points are communicated with IDA8C through ethernet networking e Ateis Studio software e 3rd party devices e Voxnet Server e PMIP D e VNB e PPM IT5 e TERRA Devcs e Modbus Protocol W Local Ateis Net Connectors Optional card to build a local dedicated IDA8C IDA8S network o Global Ateis Net Connectors O 2012 ATEIS Product Features Optional card to build a global dedicated IDA8C network D Configurable Audio I Os Two configurable OdB audio I O port A and B Each port is available to assemble an audio card There are 4 channels on each audio I O card d Telephone Line Input A connector for telephone signal coming from telephone company optional 12 Telephone Connector A connector for external telephone connection optional 13 Bypass Mode Outputs This port to share the bypass mode microphone signals through the IDA8C IDA8S network only needed when using fiber optic network Contact Outputs 8 logic outputs channels to close open circuit for an external devce this contact is normally open 15 Evacuation Inputs 9 evacuation contact inputs that allow the monitoring of external contact They also can be used in UGA mode trigger by a
108. DMIZONTIDDNM 15 7 lc Get Reference Reset Reference Leakage occurrence If leakage impedance lower than the leakage threshold which is defined in Global Settings tab then a Leakage Occurrence fault is recognized If the internal values of monitoring Line A B become not normal IDA8C S will detect and recognize that error then generate a global fault Line A B Error the error status is showed in the field Measure ohm There are three kinds of Line A B Error listed below e Line A B Open If the value of Measure ohm is greater than 4000 ohm this fault can be recognized by IDA8C S In the field of Measure ohm shows OPEN e Line A B Bad Impedance If the value of Measure ohm is greater than Reference A amp B ohm Tolerance 96 or value of Measure ohm is less than Reference A amp B ohm Tolerance 96 this fault can be recognized by IDA8C S In the field of Diff shows the percentage of difference in above figure the difference percentage of zone 4 is 78 24 which is great than the tolerance 15 a Line A B bad impedance is recognized e Line A B Short The voltage of pin is monitored by IDA8C S if the voltage is zero it means there is a short of circuit outside IDA8C S if this fault is detected the internal relay of zone will be open to stop audio signal output to speaker User need to do a Reset Monitoring described in preview part of this topic to switch the status back i e make audio output to sp
109. E ae SP ee e I I E diae eee a hk ho Ah a as Pe EE SSE eS een Time ELMS mz va Element Properties Activation TTL In Priorit Gate On Solo Hold Time 1 Ch1 1 Ch2 2 etc Element Description e Activation Type of activation of the routing fixe with TTL or with a gate e TTL In If you want to active the routing with a logical input rear panel of UAP e Priority Choose the priority of this input 1 is the biggest priority e Gate On 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor o Flash when the gate is active open e Solo Route this input e Busy Lit if the gate of the channel is open but another channel with highest priority is already activate and unable this channel to be routed to the output Busy means gate open but channel not routed e Output Click on the desired output s button to rout input to desired outputs e Threshold Sets the threshold level above which Gate will open automatically route the signal e Response Time Adjust the time between the level s detection and the beginning of the Gate operation e Hold Time Adjust the time between the end level s detection and the end of the Gate operation 6 20 2 Network Paging Component Template Main DSP Components Ee DSP Component EE Page Control ee GAN Page Control E Network Paging I ere Recorder 2 5 RG485 Audio ee Selector e DH Signal Monitor Telephone Card
110. EL dd E NE S E E NE 399 6134 Standard iiia Ee 401 6 16 Net IDDUCo ears 402 617 Net OOUIBUE E 404 6 15 Noise Generator geneet EE 405 6181 PHK NNNM nno mp 405 61862 bereet Eegen 406 LTE WT rt d DEE 408 2012 ATEIS Contents 9 E39 AH 409 6 19 1 Output 409 6 19 2 Monitor Output M 411 6 19 3 Mono Output M 413 XE R ME 3010 J A 415 6 19 5 Duplex Output M 417 6 20 LLorem 419 6 20 1 S W Page Control nn 419 6 20 2 Network i M 421 621 Recorder EE 0 622 R9485 AMO ON 432 ME iX TTT A 432 6 22 2 RS485 Output A 434 6 23 SOS cto otii UL a INIM ID M CD D EI IM PLI I DRE 436 6 24 Signal tel UE 437 625 Telephone Gal soie eas ses iie tx aba a dic detenta dci dub cun FIDA IN RU EH nim NENERUS 439 625f TO Tat Th E 439 6 29 2 TO PRO GO ETC IE UE 442 6 26 VOIP scio noto tte EN Cesta fam debui Qe Descanso E ages Moxaf CARN TOT Ou uice Maan saan qa S 0 627 Vonet C Oll BEE 444 Contact Infomation 445 Index 0 O 2012 ATEIS o Ateis Studio 1 Introduction 1 1 Welcome LJELIVERING Y OURS MESSAGE
111. EN o Line A B Bad Impedance Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Line A Error where Line A can be Line B Z1 Line A Bad Impedance where Z1 can be any zone Line A can be Line B Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio More Detail Line A monitor fault Zone 1Line A Bad Impedance o Line A B Short Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Line A Error where Line A can be Line B Z1 Line A SHORT OPEN where Z1 can be any zone Line A can be Line B Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio O 2012 ATEIS Product Features 83 Set Machine Fault Record Line A monitor fault Zone 1 Line A SHORT OPEN e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C ve Fault Handling Is line of speaker connected well Repair wire Is fault solved Line A B Open 2012 ATEIS o Ateis Studio lsspeaker changed after get reference s speaker impedance bn changed after get w reference f Line A B Bad Impedance 2012 ATEIS Product Features 85 repair wire connection between IDASCS and Speaker ls connector amp tospesker shot Reset Monitoring Line A B Short 4 1 6 2 3 Amplifier Line Leakage Error Fault Meaning e An electricity leakage between IDA8C S and speaker is dete
112. Element Properties EE E Voume 500 500 200 todo dB Signed Of L Le 0 60 200 01 dB OveloadThd 0 200 200 201 dB va Element Description e Bypass Bypass audio of the channel e Mute Mute audio of the channel e RTO Indicates an input channel Routed To Output s e Overload This LED light up if the signal of input channel greater than Overload Thd 2012 ATEIS 366 Ateis Studio 6 9 5 e Volume Meter showing the channel RMS level e Signal Indicates audio signal presence above 30 dB from chosen Sensitivity e Level Signal output level of the channel Overload Thd A threshold value to determine signal of a channel is overload or not Inverter ve Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component BR Inverter e DH Level Controller cli Local Echo Suppressor ee Logic ER Meter gp Message SH Mixer e Net Input evice Module Component Appearance Description This component change the signal phase of 90 degrees r Control Window m ute Element Properties 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 367 ve Element Description e Mute Mute the inverter module e nvert Active the inverter 6 10 Level Controller Component Template Main DSP Components Ede DSP Component ER Je Level Contraller om Local Echo Suppressor o Gre Logic H
113. In the left part a grid O 2012 ATEIS 272 5 6 5 6 1 Ateis Studio to provide information of command string for 3rd party device to control element The right is a visual object allow user to change it s value to see the command string e Control Indicate the row of command string is for single control or multiple control e Type Show the command string is for reading or writing parameters of ateis devices e Command There are several sub field in this field STX CP CR each of them is part of a complete command string e Command Data The content of command string represented by hexadecimal User Management Overview User management is a critical part of maintaining a secure system Ineffective user and privilege management often lead many systems into being compromised Therefore it is important that you understand how you can protect your device through simple and effective user account management techniques Ateis Studio provide a flexible user management mechanism to ensure the security for accessing system resources By clicking menu View User Management you can open User Manager Settings window Administrator Power User User operator Create There are two pages in the window User Levels An user level is a combination of user privileges where a privilege is the right for executing some specific action There are four default user levels to meet most applications with authority requ
114. LAP GIT i J a VK ime Be um Eva Board i fl Terra Controller e 2 DeskPad E 2 Jl URC As omi CG Speakers WD d AH Amplifiers A d H Others a S 4 To assign the DNM component to devce 2012 ATEIS Product Features 139 Communication NNN 0 S Du CONES Mike O T ee a Ateis Net i 1 j A es a Sa EEN IP F a ee ER E Shes ty a a Soe Sieg Device List Pi x Topology EN sees SS gs ect 00001 E d DEE Ee E oe a a E 2 ee E IDASC 1 E docs a dnm 2 33655 Port Count 1 ce Management 3rd Party Control Command 3rd Party Control List Device Management Devices Ateis IDASC 1 IDSC 11 157 192 168 101 4 Ateis ges ECS 1 ECS 1 1 2 192 168 101 182 Normal eg Ateis Mormal IDASC 1 IDASC 1 1 1110 192 168 101 7 Normal ih B Ateis Normal E IDASC 1 DAC Dn 361046 192 168 101 50 Normal Daci gt DNM DNM i 1 00001 Click gt dnm 1 DNM DNM 1 2 33655 dnm 2 5 Draw DSP DNM component and connect the input and output 4 JS DSP Component Pop JM Delay Advanced HH Delay Basic Ef Dynamic La AGC Stereo Auto Noise Gain A N G j pan Compressor Stereo LI LA A Compdimiter GE Expander Stereo ma 6 To modify the DSP component name You can simply use property to do this 2012 ATEIS o Ateis Studio Property AGC Level Calibration By 7 Go to device ed
115. La 55 ded d e ER TEE ttu a hber dus fes idibus GRE LAU ida addc qid nC RI EIE dne EE 55 4 14 2 Front Pana EE 56 4 1 59x Rear E e DEE 57 Mes ChAFACGTeTISIICS o Doe eie taies 58 4 1 4 5 3rd Party GONE EE 61 4 1 4 6 P enpheral Secede errr e a err dE 61 4 1 5 Amplifier Configuration s sssesesesesrnsnsrsrsususnnnnrnsnnunununennnnnnunnnununnnennnnnnnnununennnnnnnnununnnnnennnnnnununnnennnene natns 62 4 1 5 1 Basic Amplifier Connection eene eene 62 4 1 5 2 Amplifier Backup pr ntt dde ER un copre iei nb tavi Prope ii ph needs did mene rte deua dientes 63 4 1 6 MON itoring Fault 68 4 1 6 1 Table of System Faults eege eege EE 69 O 2012 ATEIS 4 Ateis Studio ATO E Flash d e EE 70 40 1 EC Eror EE Ee 70 4 P5 NetCard EITOI int Eo En css es ee eterna 71 ATOT DSP Error oid oe DD itep e po eoe bates cv dev v v uet bota uae ree Po ud T1 4 1 6 1 Preset Table EFEOEF zat ata THE ete ma ente etd entem Oye eg 712 ALOT N Preset EITOF v oo ebrei ebur b dee ect bu Y e v ER S v iet i i o Re HE EYED e CENE En 13 rs Bd od Imes CAR ool gt hg Bal Erro EE 13 41 0 1 JP ara Table Err anaha vei ete eee tes 14 ATOT Trans d d o WEE 14 410 1 P weor EFFOE 2o ele ee 15 ALOL TELEFO annn a a a a N 76 4 10 1 Main FPGA EFO EEN 16 4162 Table of Global Eu CN TT 4 1 6 2 Normal Backup Amplifier Error HH TT ALA Eine AIBR ErrO non DTE 81 4 1 6 2 Ampli
116. M MCU status 4 Control Window EN TE Transmit PPP Telephone Element Description e Dial This button has two functions Dial Make a phone call dial the number in Current Number field Accept phone call When there is a phone call ringing press Dial button can accept it e Hang up This button to hang up the telephone 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor aa e Digit Keys Digit keys are the buttons with circled shape on the left part of control window There are 16 Digit Keys on panel including Numbers 0 to 9 symbols and Alphabets from A to AE If status is ready The digits be pressed will be recorded in Current Number When press digit key during a phone call session This component send DTMF signal to remote e Current Number Recode the number dialed or display incoming calls e Back Erase the last digit of current Number e Last Number The latest number dialed e Redial Redial the Last Number e Dialing Indicates the telephone card is dialing a number e Ringing Indicates there is an incoming call need to accept e Set This LED light up if the external telephone which connect to the telephone card is off hook e Ready Indicate the status of telephone card This led light up if the telephone line is ready to make a call e Connect Indicate the telephone card is in the session of call e Busy This LED shows the remote telephone is in busy
117. Ohm e Maximum Power 1kHz 1W e THD 1kHz lt 1 e Bandwidth 3dB 200Hz 8kHz Cable length 100m control and power on the same cable 900m when power line connects to junction box d Comes standard with Junction box JB and CAT5 cable 1 5 Configuration To make PPM AS work it need to edit configuration using Ateis Studio Following sections are about configuration editing The example here is IDA8 the configuration is the same for ESC LAPG2T and other Ateis Audio Processor Create PPM AS Object Open or create a Ateis studio configuration file in the Device design window create audio processor and PPM AS object 1 Drag IDA8C to design window to create audio processor object 2 Drag PPM AS to design window to create PPM AS object 3 Wiring to connect green pins between PPM AS object and audio processor 2012 ATEIS Product Features 145 Sa Devices DSP component configuration It need to route audio from PPM AS to paging component for paging processing See the following example 500 ing OI 200 Omm Logic gt IHE Meter gt 429 Message Du Mixer gt Hs Net Input DH Net Output 5439 Noise Generator t A Output JEF Page Control Pin A D of RS485 Input component is corresponds to PPM AS 1 4 audio plugged in PDC1 4 respectively Network Paging component process paging request coming from various sources and
118. Paging Event Bind a paging event for zone selection only events with singular type are selectable See Zone and Priority section for more details about paging events e Zone and Priority d Network Pa ging CH 1 Name 1 Sow Integration Event 1 Singular This section mainly talk about the zone section of a paging request and to specify priority for judgment if there are zones conflict with another paging source which occupy it There are two type of paging event o Integration An integration paging event has multiple code for zone selection for each code is able to assign to the key of control console for example PPM AS PSS AS By clicking the ellipsis button a settings window of integration paging event is opened 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 427 zi4 z15 v 3 4 2 6 T B8 4 Ld Source Type Priority Visible d Remove e Code A code is a zone combination so called a selection of zones the figure above is an example the zone combination of code is Z1 Z2 and Z3 means zone 1 2 and 3 will be selected when requesting a paging e All To select all zones for the code Zone Selection Click the check box to specify a zone is included in a code The table lists all the zones of paging component under the same Ateis Net e Source Type opecify the source type to bind with the paging event When a paging event is active i e paging request is acknowledg
119. Processor 297 Sampling P Noise Ambient time I Generator B Noise 70ms L dB dB Sensing Mic Level EjSensing Mir Lee Output Level gt MGifferential Level dB dB Ob dB As the noise level is near than during the calibration the differential level is almost null You can see the AGC level near from 0 dB meaning no compensation Increase Zone H the sensing microphone detects more noise than during the calibration the A N G works in the Increase Zone which means that the gain must be increased to compensate the ambient noise Calibration Le IF ww FSampiing Weise f Ambient time tsenerator keen Noise 10m5 dB dB Mm gJ eso Level Maer Ental Level dB EXT m In our example the noise is now louder than during the calibration The differential level is around 4 4dB You can see the AGC level at 3 5dB meaning the P M signal is increased of 3 5dB As soon as the AGC level reach the level needed to compensate the ambient noise or the Max Gain the A N G will goes back in the Dead Zone Fast Increase Zone If the sensing microphone detects more noise than during the calibration the A N G works in the 298 Ateis Studio Fast Increase Zone which means that the gain must be quickly increased to compensate the loud ambient noise a KC KE Ke Tn j Ka 7 RIES Gei d rie A et EE d St mas s E Kr i Ce bk P Calibration Mi Je JE Weise mbi
120. Reset Monitorin Get Reference Reset Reference Reset Monitoring Get Reference Reset Reference Amplifier Amount Get Reference Reset Reference Get Reference Reset Reference dk ak 4k Ak Ak 4k AE Ak Get Reference Reset Reference e Unloaded Reference Display the value of unloaded reference which is the gain of amplifier when there is no load to the zone This value use to determine if there is a fault of normal amplifier or not e Full Loaded Reference Display the value of full loaded reference which is the gain of amplifier when there is full load to the zone This value use to determine if there is a fault of normal amplifier or not e Measure Display the value of measured which is the gain of amplifier Faults e Amplifier Too High If Measure gt Unloaded Reference x 100 Tolerance96 an Amplifier Too High fault is recognized once this fault is happen do the following checks O 2012 ATEIS Product Features 105 o Make sure there is good connection between speaker and IDA8C S o Ensure the speaker is a good one o Check gain of amplifier maybe the value is changed after get reference If all check passed but still get a amplifier too high fault change amplifier e Amplifier Too Low If Measure lt Full Unloaded Reference x 100 Tolerance96 an Amplifier Too Low fault is recognized once this fault is happen do the following checks o Check if the signal goes into amplifier is too larg
121. S Components of Audio Processor 279 volume level If you want to modify the volume of a source near end inputs then you have to use the Near End Level knobs in the AEC component When the system is properly adjusted it is not advised to change the volume by using another parameter than this one Volume dB Wear End Volume dB Non Linear Process NLP The microphone captures the sound coming from the loudspeaker and also the speaker s voice WLP Threshold dB If on the microphone capsule the sound pressure level of the loudspeaker sound is near of the sound pressure level of the speaker s voice then the AEC component won t be able to recognize them In this case the AEC process is stopped and the non linear process is activated All you have to do is to choose the type of the non linear process soft medium aggressive or off Aggressive Off 2012 ATEIS 280 Ateis Studio The NLP threshold parameter is not available the threshold is now automatically set 6 2 Delay Advanced ve Component Template Main DSP Components d Je DEP Component a Je Delay Advanced E ig Delay 5 ms 8 CH E ig Delay 50 ms PO 1 CH 8 CH a Je Delay 100 ms ZEE 1 CH 8 CH a ig Delay 200 ms 1 CH 8 CH 3 ig Delay 500 ms 1 CH 8 CH al Je Delay 1000 ms a 1CH 4 CH 8 CH d Je Delay 2000 ms v Basic Device Module IDASC i Component Appearance D
122. S Studio v 1 x x ee named ATEIS Studio W X X X on your Desktop ATEIS t Ve eg m m Dar Ju EJ a Studi A Double click the icon to start the program O 2012 ATEIS ms Ateis Studio 5 1 4 Windows Layout 8 BE Q Q Q 10096 i System IDA8C 1 z Master Preset Master Preset Er pa ee a miocAgH zg amp mv w X EN f Ducker Stereo LG Expander 4 Expander Stereo T Limiter 27 Limiter Stereo Equalizer Device Management Device Management 3rd Party Control List 3rd Party Control Command eset Serial Number Redundancy Ad Device Status Name Communkaton 18 oves 7 Ateis Nets ls lh Network Atei Normal Fe E _ Z R232 IDASC 1 1 241 192 168 100 79 al P Ateis al ECS 1 2 148 192 168 100 11 Normal S Ateis Normal Search Clear Search Timeout Interval 5 S Search By IP d Disconnected 2 Modified KI No Compied Net Faut pue E 939 x 327 Pr 946 T lis 419 208 lt empty gt ai The basic windows layout should like the figure showed above but the layout can be changed if you drag the dock panel circle No 5 amp 6 in are examples of dock panel For each part of area in the software which is labeled using orange circles in the figure there are brief description of them 1 Title Bar Displays the path name of the current file 2 Menu Bar Hol
123. Search Ces 5 A window Remote Plug In pop up Select RS485 port number and Remote Type and key in a series number which is different with another DNM Click the Plug In button in the window After plug in click the refresh button to read back the DNM information from the RS485 port If the information is same with your plug in the plug in is successful 2012 ATEIS Product Features 131 ZN Remote Plug In Remote Tyne DMM MES 1 0 0 2 hs Y Ke h O c c A R GA ba rz e e e LI M oe CH R5485 1 Only P553 AS Refresh Plug In 7 Double click the IDA8C S to open DSP component editing window then drag and drop to create DNM component In this case it simply input audio from Input component and output to Output component O 2012 ATEIS 132 Ateis Studio Devices IDABC DSP Configuration IDA amp C 1 Main DSP Components n x oye Dynamic pt AGC 4 AGC Steren des Auto Noise Gain A N gs Compressor Sram E Stereo ane Ax Limiter Limiter Stereo S UU t i hog 777777 ls F7 gag I eI Gen I m m A ETT I sla m m be ais 01 m I v i es ela E I I Ke E c wt 0 I D T ae LU I I ES Gell I e m m SN I sl m I SZ I ou m I all CH MI Wes I H i sl m I ge I sl m m a I P I I 8 Go back
124. Sub Presets e DSP Configuration 4 T Remotes 4 ig PPM ASs A PPMAS1 p Networkings 5 1 17 Layers For each design windows can be separate to multiple layers every objects in design window belongs to a layer By click menu View gt Layers you can open layers window On top of windows there is a grid to list all layers The field are describes below 2012 ATEIS 242 Ateis Studio 5 1 18 Current Indicate which layer is current layer The newly created objects will put into current layer Lock Lock selected layer All objects belongs to the locked layer can t be edited Hide To hide all objects belongs to selected layer Name The name of layer Select An ellipsis button to select objects of the layer There are four buttons on bottom of window Add Layer Add a layer The new layer becomes current layer Remove Layer Remove selected layer and components belongs to the layer are removed too d Move up Layer Move up selected layer a row ve Move down layer Move down selected layer a row Bird s Eye When the design area is huge bird s eye gives a overview for user to easy understand the layout of design By click menu View gt Bird s Eye you can open bird s eye window 2012 ATEIS System Functionality oma 5 1 19 Properties Properties window allow user to browse edit settings of selected objects in design window By click menu View
125. T Edu onu doy CE essi OU EE 205 BORN ME QR ERE 205 435 7 Front En EE 207 4 3 1 3 Rear Panel DEE 208 A314 E gu EE ei Te 209 AA Optional E E 0 441 Network e EN e EE 0 System Functionality 211 ST MEI d eee ETE TM 211 5 1 1 Overiew of Ateis Studio xiii ao aioe oes osax kun du ek NEES EENS EENS 211 5 1 2 System Requirement 212 9 1 3 Install Ateis d Ce Te EE 213 5 1 4 Windows y T 218 9 1 9 Bil Supiniumnsdasdieeidetauecie E maserp tias dur eese uSegai cede ctoi cse d co cgR T PA IIT DUNS ER rd eS 219 916 LU EE 220 SE NIO NN EE 221 5 1 8 Geomeiry 222 9 1 9 Comoponent Editing erereernnnennnnnennn enne enne nenne nenne nnne nns en etnia tnis tne tn annee anna a tnus 225 DN oh TOOS EE 232 5 1 11 Operation 235 NN NET Ate Ce Ke 7 236 5 1 13 Help RETTEN 238 5 1 14 Component Template s s s s s snsnnsurusnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnennnennnnne ennea 238 5 1 15 Resource Manager s s s esessseneeesesesesesesesesnsurunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnenennnenenenennnenenen ena 240 5 1 16 Object Tree 241 5 1 17 ECHT CHE 241 21 18 Birde Ev
126. T SUO Name Event 2 States Count E ie es w OK AC Cancel O 2012 ATEIS 260 Ateis Studio Click button Add to create a new event a second window open to query you which kind of event is desired Select item Step Control on Type combo box Then press button OK Event Settings After create a value control event you need to assign an element to it Then the assigned element will be controllable by the event To do assignment right click on the desired element click popup menu by sequence Event gt Step Control gt XXX where XXX is the name of event The following figure is an example EN AGC cmm X Release Thresh 28 RH a Level dB m E 20 dB Third Party Control Sub Preset Control E Value Control C Step rigger Element Indicate which element of the component controlled by value trigger e Component Indicate which component of the device contains element prior mentioned e Device Indicate which device contains component prior mentioned System 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 261 Indicate which system contains device prior mentioned e Remove Remove the element controlled by the event PN This operation only remove the relation between element and event not delete element 5 3 6 Master Preset Change Change Description This event is used to change master preset of Ateis devices Each state can be linked to a master preset When a source trig
127. TEIS 28 Ateis Studio checking the level of the input signal Temp If the device internal temperature exceeds 95 degrees C the TEMP LED will light and the pre amp will stop working until the temperature falls below 95 degrees C The pre amp will come back to a working state automatically To avoid temperature failure please insert an external fan to the rack system pc The DC LED indicates that the SPA amplifier is powered by a 24VDC power supply o Power The Power LED indicates the ON OFF status of the SPA amplifier 4 3 1 3 Rear Panel CE rg EVENTS k eim LJ A Fuse Receptacles Two fuse receptacles are located on the left of the amplifiers rear panel Power Switch The power switch is located at the left of the rear panel and is a two position switch Pushing up the power switch I is pushed will power on the device pushing it down 0 is pushed will power it off When the power switch is on the position the front panel power LED will be lit Channel 1 2 24VDC battery backup connector The SPA amplifier can be operated with battery backup Use the channel 1 and channel 2 24VDC Battery Backup connector to do so These connectors are located on the upper part of the channel connectors on the rear panel This 24VDC power supply can be used where no AC power is available When in use the front panel Power LED will be lit as well as the front panel DC LED o AC Power Inlet The 3 pin
128. TT ET E Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console with touch screen and Fireman Microphone Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console with telephone styled microphone Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console with 24 buttons 31 PDC zones and 2 extra selectable microphone sources CD Touch CDPA Box 4 1 4 IDA8S 4 1 4 1 Overview It s a RF transceiver to communication between Deskpad and IDA8 use it Deskpad can working without physcial connection po CD 16 Fire Panel PSS AS Microphone IN 1 BGM CD Player Redundancy Network ATEIS NET tt MEM NE NM NES Redundancy id opeaker Zone1 E IDA8SX Zone 2 z Backup Amplifier O O 2 E 3 8 IDA8SX Zone 7 Zone a oe Amplifier E 9 x8 KE S Zone 8 Se D CO The IDA8S Slave units provide audio in and output expansion of the IDA8 Systems using a secured 48 O 2012 ATEIS s Ateis Studio 4 1 4 2 channel audio and data network over CATS or fiber optic Each IDA8S expands the IDA8 System with an additional 8 outputs 2 additional security microphone consoles PSS AS and security programmable switching contacts The Network cards that comes with the unit proudes a redundant 48 channels audio and data connection Atels Net between one controller and a maximum of 32 IDA8SX Slave units in one rack system Front Panel System Fault LED This LED lights on when a system fault fault is detected G F
129. Unit Frequency 54dBu ge Configurable Audio Input e Sensitivity For each channel of configurable audio input card there are five levels to gain the audio signal They are sensitivity values of OdBu 12dbBu 24dBu 40dBu and 54dBu respectively The meaning of sensitivity value is how large the gain for an audio source and to amplify the giving minus input source to OdBu the figure below is an example when the sensitivty value is set to 54dBu and input source is 54dBu after the gaining circuit of audio card you ll get the OdBu of output 2012 ATEIS Product Features 53 Sensitivity of Input A channel 2 54dB Card Input A NEM I 7 SS 2 fveroad Tr af Thd GB de 54dB JJ 0dB 0dB JJ JJ 0dB e Maximum level 14 dBu e Input Impedance 10k Ohm e THD N Total Harmonic Distortion plus Noise 20 20kHz 4dBu 0 20kHz 2dBu 2 20 20kHz 14dBu 20 20kHz 30dBu 20 20kHz 44dBu e Bandwidth 20Hz 20kHz PDC e Maximum Output Level 10 dBu e Output Impedance 300 Ohm e THD 1kHz at output lt 0 02 e Bandwidth 3dB at output 20Hz 20kHz e Noise 22Hz 22kHz 85dBu e Maximum Input Level 16 dBu e Input Impedance 11k Ohm e THD 1kHz at input lt 0 02 e Bandwidth 3dB at input lt 20Hz 22kHz e RS232 voltages 6 5 6 5 Evacuation Inputs Contact Mode e Bias voltage iem Minimum Maximum Unt Voltage
130. V e Axis o X Frequency of output signal Hz o Y Level of input signal dB e Control Points o Blue Adjust element Frequency Horizontal and Level Vertical O 2012 ATEIS 356 Ateis Studio 6 8 Fireman Component Template Ji C uu ual Components EE DSP Component 2 Fireman aif e EH Input A Inverter e DH Level Controller Wm Local Echo Suppressor H Logic SR Meter EAP Message aAA Mixer ge Component Appearance Description This component represent Fireman Microphone with one channel audio output ready to further DSP processing 4 Control Window Element Properties Element Description e Mute Mute the audio signal e Level 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 357 Signal level of Fireman component e Paging Event Selection Select paging event to bind with Fireman component To do a paging using fireman microphone it need to have a paging event bind with Fireman component ala Before assigning an paging event to the component you need to create it first using settings window of Network Paging Component e Paging Event Link Button To open the settings window of binding paging event Nu Select Zone IDASC 1 Event 2 z1 z2 z3 z4 z5 zs z7 za z9 z zu z12 z213 z14 zis v v v 4 V Source Type Fireman Microphone Priority Visible All See more details in Network Paging topic 6 9 Input 6 9
131. a e Ruler Unit Centimeters 1 Inches Show Grid 2 Centimeters Snap to Grid 3 Pixels Layer Specify ruler unit of graphic editor there are three types of unit o Inches o Centimeters o Pixels To show or hide grid of graphic editor e Snap to Grid a O 2012 ATEIS 224 Ateis Studio To enable or disable moving an object by multiple pixels at a time e Layer Add Layer Remove Layer Lock Layer Hide Layer 1 Detault Layer 2 Layer 1 o Add Layer Add a layer of graphic editor o Remove Layer Remove a layer of graphic editor o Lock Layer Lock a layer of graphic editor to disable moving of any objects belong that layer o Hide Layer Hide a layer all objects belong that layer will become invisible o Select Layer Select a layer to be current any newly created object will belong to current layer e Bird s Eye Open the window of Bird s Eye that allow you to see an overview of graphic editor O 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 225 5 1 9 Comoponent Editing Position Operation Type Aligment Pack space Z Order 1 Size Center o Group UnGroup a H 1 3 E ET TN SA Normal Line Right Angle Auto Corner Signal Path Disable Signal Path Mouse Move Signal Path Temporary Signal Path Fixed Signal Path Lock i Oe el n Position Operation Www mg e Position Operation Type li Some functions as Alignment or Pack use a refer
132. ager window to open settings window of the event e No Indicate state No e Sub Preset Specify which sub preset links to the state e Open 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 263 Open settings window of the sub preset 5 3 8 Intergration Paging Event This event is used to select zones of Networking Paging component with multiple combination before paging see the topic Network Paging for more details 5 3 9 Singular Paging Event This event is used to select zones of Networking Paging component with single combination before paging see the topic Network Paging for more details 5 4 Device Management 5 4 1 Search and Settings Device Management window help user to discover Ateis devices in the network and shows information about it You can modify settings of user by using the command on the window Select the Device EH imn Management Device Management tab or open it through the menu View gt Device Management Device Management Ateis Norr Disconnect ECS 1 ECS 4713 192 168 100 31 Norr Ateis Norr ECS 1 ECS l I 192 168 100 12 Morr Ateis Morr Reverse Update Telephone Card Setting Norr Redundancy Ateis Morr IDASC 92 158 100 7 Nor Norr e b Remote Update Chime Data Store Read Version ATEIS NET Deploying The Device Management window is consist of four part 1 Device Information List information of the device including following fields e Device
133. al link the signal link and the entire signal path linked will be highlighted in red If you click in a free zone the signal path is cancelled In this example the input C1 is routed in the matrix to the output 1 and 2 If you place select the link of the channel 1 then the signal path on the output 1 and 2 will be displayed in red eae 4 mus mes ao mu Ferr selected link e Signal Path Path Fixed In this mode by selecting a signal link the signal link and the entire signal path linked will be highlighted in red The signal path is fixed to cancel it you have to click on another link or component not on a free zone In this example the input C1 is routed in the matrix to the output 1 and 2 If you place select the link of the channel 1 then the signal path on the output 1 and 2 will be displayed in red e Signal Path Lock d In this mode by selecting a signal link the signal link and the entire signal path linked will be highlighted in red then the mouse cursor will change into d asking you to select the link again in order to lock it The signal path is locked to cancel it you have to select the mode Signal Path Disable 2 In this example the input C1 is routed in the matrix to the output 1 and 2 If you place select the link of the channel 1 then the signal path on the output 1 and 2 will be displayed in red 232 Ateis Studio 5 1 10 Tools 1 Office2003 Blue
134. an octave apart three filters to an octave Equalizers with half as many filters per octave are common where less precise control is called a 2 3 octave equalizer and so on the 1 Octave GEQ that is one filters to an octave 4 Control Window GEQ 1 Octave SS rs E SS n Tn Se i Pres ls moo BEN IO i DU Sun Bypsal J Of j j j Bypass JS Of j j j E Ge s 39 iss 91 3 Element Description e Bypass all To bypass the EQ all the frequency band e Bypass Bypasses only the selected frequency band e Gain Set the gain of the selected frequency band ve Graphical Control Window 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 331 ns E dE I B g is E I I III THK 16K 2K 25K3 15K 4K SK 63K BK 10K 12 5K 16K 20K 25h a a CP a BAT K TS u s ZU GK GK a e Axis o X Frequency of output signal Hz o Y Gain of output signal dB e Control Points o Blue Adjust Gain Application Equalizers can correct problems posed by a room s acoustics as an auditorium will generally have an uneven frequency response especially due to standing waves and acoustic dampening The frequency response of a room may be analyzed using a spectrum analyzer and a pink noise generator for instance Then a graphic equalizer can be easily adjusted to compensate fo
135. and follow the instructions to install the software onto your hard drive InstallShield Wizard Preparing to Install ATEIS Studia 1 0 0 67 Setup ts preparing the InstallShield Wizard which will quide vau through the program setup process Please walt Configuring Windows Installer Cancel 2012 ATEIS mu Ateis Studio GG ATEIS Studio v1 0 0 67 InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for ATEIS Studio v1 0 0 67 The InstallShield P Wizard will install ATEIS Studio v1 0 0 67 on your computer To continue click Mext WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Click Next 5 Type in user name and your organization name if you want and click Next CG ATEIS Studio v1 0 0 67 InstallShield Wizard Customer Information Please enter your information User Name Bisi Organization penton Install this application Far Anyone who uses this computer all users Only for me user a EE EE 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 215 6 By default the program the software is installed under the path C Program Files ATEIS ATEIS Studio w x x x Change installation path by clicking Change if required and click Next CS ATEIS Studio v1 0 0 67 InstallShield Wizard Destination Folder Click Next to install to this Folder or click Change to install to a different Folder WR Install ATEIS Studio v1 0 0 67 bo
136. ate operation Release Time Adjust the fade out time of the signal when Gate is no longer working Left Depth Attenuate the level when the Gate is active Right Depth Attenuate the level when the Gate is active 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 321 6 4 8 3 Gate Voice Component Template Main DSP Components E d DSP Component H Delay Advanced H Delay Basic E Je Dynamic EX Auto Noise Gain A N G EH Compressor Ducker Stereo E Expander EB Expander Stereo B ig Gate L Gate Mono Es CR stereo Voice i en sm Loes ModuldDASsc Component Appearance Description This component is gate which is using an active detection algorithm specially dedicated for voice The gate is open only if a human voice pass is detected For example you knock table this noise will be stopped by Gate Voice but when you speak then the voice gate will allow the human voice to open the gate If there is a noise and a human voice present the voice gate will open and both noise and voice will get through A This is NOT a noise cancellation component r Control Window 2012 ATEIS 322 Ateis Studio M Crate Voice ne ee 2 dB T Mute Element Properties Name Initial Minimum Maximum Precision Unit Off Off Op 2000 is oft Recoanition 3 Accurate ve Element Description e Gate On Light on when the Gate Voice is act
137. ault LED This LED lights on when a global fault is detected Bypass Mode LED To indicate IDA8C is in bypass mode or not Bypass Monitoring LED Show the monitoring function is enabled or not This LED lights on if monitoring of IDA8 is disabled by user Global EVAC LED To indicate system is in EVAC paging state or not This LED lights on if any IDA8 device over Ateis Net do an EVAC paging See the topic of Network Paging Component to learn more about how to config a EVAC paging Zone EVAC LEDs To show the audio channel is in EVAC paging or not Each LED is correspond to a output channel of Network Paging component for example 1st LED is for pin M1 2nd LED for pin M2 and so on Power LED This LED lights on when IDA8S is power on Network LED Show the status of Ateis Net This LED lights on if more than two deployed IDA8 devices in Ateis Net o Zone Fault LEDs O 2012 ATEIS Product Features To show fault status of zone This LED light on if one of following faults is detected e Normal AMP Error e Line Speaker Error e Backup AMP Error e AMP Line Leakage Error 4 1 4 3 Rear Panel TIT Br 5 K a i PEETA E Miraa i gt EE E DK TSM Bic i 9 Speaker Zone Outputs There are 8 zones for speaker amp amplifier connection each zone consists of following connectors from left to right e connector of line speaker e connector of 100V aud
138. ault stats EVAC inputs fault stats EVAC inputs fault stats EVAC inputs fault stats EVAC inputs fault stats Store parameter result Channel 1 OPEN Channel 2 OPEN Channel 3 OPEN Channel 4 OPEN Channel 5 OPEN Channel 6 OPEN Channel 7 OPEN Channel 8 OPEN Channel 9 OPEN o EVAC Input Error SHORT Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C EVAC Input Error Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio Set hlachine Fault Record EVAC inputs fault stats Channel 8 SHORT 5tore parameter result e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C Ateis Studio Remove the wire of EVAC Input and replace by a resistor 3K ahm 0 25w Fault Handling 4 1 6 2 5 Ateis Net Broken Fault Meaning e Ateis Net is broken this problem may comes from wire connection between devices on Ateis Net or net card on device Fault Indication e LED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S e Log Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C AteisNet Broken AteisNet Backup Mode Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio A Machine Fault Record x AteisMet Broken AteisNet Backup Mode 2012 ATEIS Product Features 89 e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C Fault Handling e Check wire conne
139. ber of states e Content Open settings window belong the event e Add 2012 ATEIS 252 Ateis Studio New Event Name Event 4l States Count 2 Type Value Trigger Add an event to event manager Some event can t create in this window like paging event you need to create it in settings windows of Network Paging component e Remove Remove selected event 5 3 2 Value Trigger Event Description This event is used to control the element value It set value of element by state number send by source that triggers the event An value trigger event can link more than one elements for controlling r Event Creation Value Triager Event 2 Master Preset Change 4 Event 3 Integration Select Zone S Value Trigger ew Event Name Event 5 States Count 4 Type Value Trigger w OK A Cancel Click button Add to create a new event a second window open to query you which kind of event is desired Select item Value Trigger on Type combo box Then press button OK Event Settings After create a value trigger event you need to assign an element to it Then the assigned element will be controllable by the event To do assignment right click on the desired element click popup menu by sequence Event gt Value Trigger gt XXX where XXX is the name of event The following figure is an example O 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 253 Lg tivity Bt Third Party Control Ti
140. can see on the vu meter that when the speaker talks at 8 dBu the final level is around 10 6 dBu Input Level SS mmm sl E Y d P Le i GER d md D AGC Level RMS VU Meter AGC In AGC Out 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor om 6 4 2 Auto Noise Gain A N G Component Template T Compressor Stereo EE es DNM re Ducker sie FP Ducker Stereo Component Appearance e S M Sensing microphone input e P M Paging input Description Adjust the audio level of the paging input P M depending of the ambient noise The ambient noise is measured with a sensing microphone connected to the sensing microphone input S M Our advice is to use the noise sensing microphone NSM Atels but you can also use another one 4 Control Window O 2012 ATEIS 292 Ateis Studio cum pling White Noisd B Noise Time Level Threshold Level dB dB a 2 100 0 ET PS Ensing Mic Level GiSensing Mic Leve Outp Differential Level Hz dbj dB ius dB 100 0 va Element Properties MinGan 6 0 MaxGan 60 Sampling Time ep Level Proceeding Finish Speed Dead Zone Increase Zone Zone Level C Sensing Mic 100 0 Level Output Level 100 0 Differential Level 100 0 50 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 293 Item list of Response Speed No NE CC Lo w o 38 igh j ve Element Descriptio
141. ce e Condition of Bypass Mode Switching There are two ways to switch system state to bypass mode paging e Hardware monitoring In IDA8 devices there is a hardware monitored mechanism to detect micro controller crash system switch to bypass mode paging if micro controller crash detected e Bypass mode input contact Connect pin CMD and GND of bypass mode input to a button this input contact can trigger bypass mode paging 4 cascade If the application use multiple IDA8s and use fiber optic as Ateis Net transmitting media you need to do an extra wiring for bypass mode paging cascade see following figure O 2012 ATEIS Product Features wm IDA8C P A EL EE rm p Fees pex GEREENT e RT rc AERE poea p m Lun Nc o IRCH BM 0 es TE D a a 7 i t i Thea perm BY PASS MODE OUTPUTS ow e EA 8 reg E a TE bei Pei Ee Gebitztes offi gaye F L L ce CN cee ee amm L O SK M WEEN o aH E Pei Fei fei G i P Lei bai Pei Pei P itseatibs ibei vo ong gug E m ENN LK LUN E LIN I i ee E Lg Te bani ken II LUMINE D 4 1 8 Contact I O 4 1 8 1 Evacuation Input IDA8 Devices have evacuation inputs that allow the monitoring of external contact To config evacuation input you have two ways to do e Assign element to evacuation input control 2012 ATEIS no Ateis Studio 4 1 8 2
142. ce for prerecorded messages e POWER FAULT EVAC LEDs e 3 key buttons User definable using ATEIS Studio GUI e 168 Touch fields 14 pages with 12 keys e RJ 9 for optional telephone headset e 2 mini jack plugs for optional headset Characteristics of PPM IT5 is same as PSS AS the only difference between them is the power supply PPM IT5 can use PoE Configuration To make PPM IT5 work it needs to edit configuration using Ateis Studio you can t find this item in Remotes The right way is using VoIP component 4 3 Amplifier 4 3 1 SPA 4 3 1 1 Overview The SPA Security Power Aamplifier is designed for perfect integration into the SINAPS system but thanks to its flexibility it can also be used for any Public Address application 2012 ATEIS 20 Ateis Studio SPA 2060 SPA 2120 SPA 2240 The SPA amplifiers were specifically developed to meet the requirements of EN 60849 for safety installations Each amplifier module is fitted with its own 220 VAC 24 VDC power supply for increased system reliability To avoid handling errors the volume output is set using the potentiometer located at the back of the apparatus In addition to standard protection via fuses SPA amplifiers also have electronic and thermal protection to protect them from all potential hazards A fan provides forced cooling for the final power shelves and internal parts of the apparatus It starts up automatically when the temperature reaches
143. ce to compute the delay time for channel Note If a channel is mute and bypass at the same time the audio signal of the channel will mute Application Imagine a conference in a large room Normally speakers are beside the people speaking so listeners at the end of the room receive too weak sound Solution is to put also speakers in the 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 283 middle of the room but in this case listeners will receive sound from speakers with time difference due to to distance between speakers Solution is to add delay to speakers placed in the middle of the room delay value compensates the distance 4 Distance to Delay O 2012 ATEIS 284 Ateis Studio 6 3 Delay Basic Component Template Main DSP Components HH Delay Advanced Je Delay 5 ms an 3 1CH 4 CH SCH al Je Delay 50 ms RS 1CH 8 CH 3 ig Delay 100 ms ZN 1CH al gr Delay 200 ms TEE 1 CH 8 CH A Je Delay 500 ms i 1CH 8 CH P JE Delay 1000 ms LE 10H a gr Delay 2000 ms G 1CH Component Appearance Description To delay the audio signal input to the component This component is an compact version of Delay 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 285 Advanced that is not allowed to mute or bypass the signal of input There are two ways to adjust delay time for a channel the first one is to adjust element Delay time the other one is adjust Element
144. chine Fault Record Category Description More Detail Trans code errar e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C Fault Handling Contact service to repair device 4 1 6 1 10 Power Error Fault Meaning The power circuit inside dewce is error Fault Indication e LED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up o System Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S e Log Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Power Error Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio AI Iachine Fault Record More Detail Power error e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C Fault Handling Contact service to repair device 2012 ATEIS Ateis Studio 4 1 6 1 11 TEL Error ve Fault Meaning The communication between main controller unit and telephone is fail ga Fault Indication e ED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up o System Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S e Log Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C TEL Error Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio More Detail TEL code error e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C ve Fault Handling Contact service to repair device 4 1 6
145. click on IDA8C block to open IDA8C DSP Configuration IDA8C1 In this windows allow you to edit dsp configuration let s do a simple setup use a Tone Generator and Output component O 2012 ATEIS Quick Start 27 Layer Untted Qe mswiNDAH mg amp Devices IDASC DSP Configuration IDASC 1 Sp BIS a JS DSP Component A 48 Delay Advance gt Delay Basic Dynamic LB Feedback B Filter Fireman i Input Inverter I AJB Level Controller Local Echo Suppt Pe Logic i P Meter S 4 Message Z Met Input ZZ Met Output ET Noise Generator r Se AL Pink el 100 200 14 Connect Connect to device Device Management Device Management f f Main DSP Components ET Property P Layers 7 Object Tree Search Timeout Interval 5 5 Search By IP 15 Store Click store button on tools bar 2012 ATEIS 28 Ateis Studio System IDASC 1 Master Preset Master Preset A window Store is opened and store process start during the process system will ask user to turn on or off audio click Yes Serial ID Level 1 ID Level 2 ID Store Status 241 1 1 mtd ee Transmission completed Question i Do vou want to turn op the audio after store Report Storing device 41 Done sh Storing reverse table Done Storing user manager table Done Initializing preset Done 16 Adjust element oet e
146. condary Watching Dog port 8 S ACT Secondary Active Output Output a logic signal to indicate secondary audio processor is active 9 S WD Secondary Watching Dog IDA8RU Main PDC CTL determine active system will be primary or secondary audio processor by monitor input logic contacts P WD and S WD The basic philosophy is that master RU monitor the signal coming from primary and secondary audio processor to decide which one can be active and also pass the decision to next RU through EXP OUT port When RU is set to be master it monitor both P WD and S WD for choose which audio processor will be active but if RU is set to slave it only monitor S_WD to determine which one can be active 10 P ACT Primary Active Output Output a logic signal to indicate primary audio processor is active 11 P WD Primary Watching Dog RU devices monitor this logic signal for determining active audio processor please refer to item 2012 ATEIS Product Features 123 S WD Secondary Watching Dog 12 Master Slave Switch A dip switch to set RU PDC be master or slave The difference between master and slave please refer to item S WD Secondary Watching Dog 13 Expansion Power Supply Output 24V DC power to next RU MAIN PDC CTL devces There are two connectors of this output e PRI Connect to Power Supply PRI connector next RU MAIN PDC CTL e SEC Connect to Power Supply SEC connector next RU MAIN PDC CTL 14 Power Supply 24V DC power input w
147. consists of a low pass and a high pass filter A 3 way crossover is constructed as a combination of low pass band pass and high pass filters LPF BPF and HPF respectively r Control Window todo Element Properties Frequenc 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 347 T The Initial Minimum Maximum values are different between types of Crossover Crossover Stereo Frequency 2 Way Low High Band 1000 10 Frequency 3 Way Low Band 250 20 Frequency 3 Way Mid Band Hi Pass 250 26 Frequency 3 Way Mid Band Low Pass 2500 200 Frequency 3 Way High Band 2500 Frequency 4 Way Low Band 0 Frequency 4 Way Mid Low Band Hi ef ST Pass Frequency 4 Way Mid Low Band Low El Pass Frequency 4 Way Mid Hi Band Hi Pass Frequency 4 Way Mid Hi Band Low 4000 1008 20000 Pass Frequency 4 Way Hi Band 4000 1008 2000 1 z Element Description e Invert Invert the phase of the signal e Mode Invert the phase of the signal e Slope Slope of attenuation e Mute Slope of attenuation e Level Gain of signal e Frequency Frequency of cut Graphical Control Window 2012 ATEIS 348 Ateis Studio EN GPC Xover 3 Way e Axis o X Frequency of output signal Hz o Y Level of input signal dB e Control Points o Blue Adjust Level and hi pass Frequency or low pass Frequency of mid band o Yellow Adjust Level and Both hi pass Frequency and low pass Frequency of mid ban
148. ct Key These buttons are used to select keys each key may link to an event for triggering actions like paging or adjust the value of parameters 8 All Release LED This indicator lights up if all keys are selected 9 All Release Button This button is used to select or deselect all keys 10 Talk Key Push this key to request paging 11 Talk Indicator This LED light up if PCP is allowed to paging on the other word the paging request has been acknowledged P Sometime after paging request is granted zones under paging still can be occupied by other sources In such a case the talk led still light up but you can check busy LED to know the situation 12 Busy LED Show the status of zone Color Status Frequency Actiity Red Permanent Priority of the zone is lower than other sources T GK SE Priority of the zone is higher than other sources Green Pemanen The zone only desired for paging is not using by other sources 4 2 3 3 Characteristics Case Dimension 105mm W x 190mm L x 50mm H Weight 0 7Kg Color RAL 035 Goose neck length with microphone 300 mm r Power L Itm Voltage CurrentConsumption Comment 2012 ATEIS a Ateis Studio 4 2 3 4 DC Input 18V 26V Typical 24V 120mA Microphone Output e Maximum level 6dBu e Output Impedance 100Ohm e THD 1kHz lt 1 e Bandwidth 3dB 100Hz 18kHz Front Panel Speaker e Impedance 4
149. cted e An electricity leakage between amplifier output and IDA8C S is detected Fault Indication e LED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S o Zone Fault LEDs on front panel of IDA8C S e Log Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C AMP Line Leakage Error Z1 Line Leakage Error where Z1 can be any zone 2012 ATEIS e Ateis Studio Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio More Dei AMP Line Leakage fault Zone5 Leakage Occurrence e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C ls wire of spesker or AMPO touch ground Do Leakage Calibration Is fault Fault Handling 4 1 6 2 4 Evacuation Intput Error Fault Meaning e When evacuation input is set to contact mode if the voltage of EVAC input is not in the acceptable range Fault Indication e LED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S e Log o EVAC Input Error OPEN 2012 ATEIS Product Features Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C EVAC Input Error Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio O 2012 ATEIS EVAC inputs fault stats EVAC inputs fault stats EVAC inputs fault stats EVAC inputs fault stats EVAC inputs f
150. ction between all IDA8C S on Ateis Net e f wire connection is fine now we can check device o For IDA8C Prepare a good IDA8S establish Ateis Net wire connection between IDA8C and IDASS Deploy Ateis Net using Ateis Studio If fault is not solved change Ateis Net card of IDA8C o For each IDA8S on Ateis Net Prepare a good IDA8C establish Ateis Net wire connection between IDA8C and IDASS Deploy Ateis Net using Ateis Studio If fault is not solved change Ateis Net card of IDA8S 4 1 6 2 6 Fireman Microphone Error Fault Meaning e Fireman microphone is error Fault Indication e LED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S e Log o Fireman Microphone Capsule Open Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Fireman Error Fireman Audio Open Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio y Machine Fault Record x Description More Detail Fireman microphone fault Fireman Audio Open o Fireman Microphone Capsule Short Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Fireman Error Fireman Audio Short Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio 2012 ATEIS o Ateis Studio More Detail Fireman microphone fault Fireman Audio Short o Fireman Microphone Button Open Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Fireman Erro
151. ctive LED Show the activity of the fireman microphone there are two states of this LED test Permanent jActive Fireman microphone is allowed to paging Blinking 9 9 Zones are busy fireman microphone is not allowed to paging Blinking o wv 9 d Pre chime is playing 2 Fireman Microphone Input DIN Connector for fireman microphone connection Fireman Microphone Hook An U shape hook to place fireman microphone Monitoring Speaker The IDA8C integrates a monitoring speaker in front panel There are two functions of this speaker Warning Tone A buzzer sound is generated when some faults is detected in system Source Monitoring Monto audio sources of IDA8C The source to be monitored can be selected H via Ateis Studio software Note If a fault is detected when speaker is monitoring source then the source monitoring will be interrupted and play buzzer sound for the fault Bypass Mode LED To indicate IDA8C is in bypass mode or not 2012 ATEIS Ateis Studio G Fault LED This LED lights on when a global fault is detected Note Fault LED and system fault LED are exclusive if system fault and global fault are detected at the same time system only light the system fault LED X System Fault LED This LED lights on when a system fault fault is detected Global EVAC LED To indicate system is in EVAC paging or not This LED lights on if any IDA8 device over Ateis Net do an EVAC paging
152. ctral density is inversely proportional to the frequency In pink noise each octave carries an equal amount of noise power r Control Window Element Description O 2012 ATEIS 40 Ateis Studio e Mute Mute the sound coming out from the component e Level Level of the pink noise 6 18 2 Tone Component Template Main DSP Components Je DSP Component E Met Output GJ Moise Generator o spo Output H a Page Control fl E Recorder a RB485 Audio sg Component Appearance Description Generates either tone single frequency or sweep sequence between two fixed frequencies and in a defined interval of time r Control Window GEM Tone Generator 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 407 Element Properties Lee 100 0 2000 200 01 dB E MN oe EE Jo o Sweep J O o e S 4 5 1 L e JL cm 5 SweepType LL LL ve Element Description e Level Level of the signal e Tone freq If Tone mode is activated select the frequency played e Start freq If Tone mode is activated select the frequency played e Stop freq oelect the maximum frequency in sweep mode e Inc Time Select the time between the frequencies change in sweep mode e Mute Mute the sound coming out from the component e Sweep Active the sweep mode sweep of frequency e Tone Active Tone mode one single f
153. d o Red Adjust Level and low band or hi band 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor owe 6 7 5 Hi Lo Pass Component Template Main DSP Components gt DSP Component EET Filter o All Pass Filter Band Pass gp Crossover H Crossover Stereo Bu Fireman ee Input Ph Inverter Component Appearance Description Hi Lo Pass component passes high lo frequencies and attenuates i e reduces the amplitude of frequencies lower higher than its cutoff frequency r Control Window Element Properties O 2012 ATEIS 39 Ateis Studio L Name Initial Minimum Maximum Precision Unit Moe gBessl6dB Type jLlowPas Ce ol Ca 90 0 Dass oloa LD Frequency 80 10 Element Description todo e Mode Type of filtering e Type Low or High pass e Bypass Bypass the filter s module e Mute Bypass the filter s module e Level Gain of signal e Frequency Frequency of cut amp Graphical Control Window sn GPC Hi Lo Pass D n SEU mm H i LE m aM m T2 LE a ra VW zap LJ Pd T m T a r D E f GC GA PT VW a am m m mmm zu d TR TR E H m rnm Ae H mara i 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 351 e Axis o X Frequency of output signal Hz o Y Level of input signal dB e Control Points o Red Adjust element Frequency Horizontal and Level Ve
154. d e H Evacuation Input GJ Event Trigger BB zx Fault Definer nae irs ie Tout Device Madulgeb sc Component Appearance Description This component link events to logic signal linked events will be triggered if the input logic signal of component is from lo to hi or hi to lo depending on settings 4 Control Window When component is drag from the component template and drop to the graphic editor for DSP design a window show to specify the input and output channel counts Select Pin Count InputCount J Output Count 8 vw Nei Click the component the control window shows there are several tabs on the top of window each tab is for a logic input channel O 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 377 Sa Event Trigger Component Event Name Content lt No data to display gt 1 Modify EJ Remove After events is linked to the component the control window list it in grids Sa Event Trigger Component Event Mame Content Jie sensns TT e s le TaT f Modify DI Remove Parameters e Event Name Show the name of event linked e Content Open the event settings window m Sa value Trigger Waster Preset Event 1 Status l Status d Component Device 5 Value Bypass Output 1 iut A IDASC 1 IDASC 1 False Ed Remove PX Clear x Close e State opecify the sta
155. d Back One Bring Forward One Center k Bring to Front Jg Send Back One P Group 1 Send to Back Bring to Front i UnGroup h Bring Before Component Send to Back Normal Line Send After Component Bring Before Component Send After Component If you have elements which are under other elements you can define by selecting one element if this will be to the front or to the back Pay attention sometimes element can be totally hidden with this action It is useful with background image and buttons for example e Size ri li L EE 3 CT Make Same Width Make Same Width Op Make Same Height mp Make Same Size Make Same Height Make Same Size These functions resize the component You can select several components and adjust them to have the same dimensions All the selected component will have the size of the component on the window s top left e Center WC LX X IH Center Horizontal i Center Horizontal P Group Center Vertical A UnGroup kel Center Vertical Center Horizontal amp Vertical Center Harizontal amp Vertical 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 22 You can select several component by maintaining left click and move the mouse you will have a selection square then you can move the component to the window s middle horizontally or vertically Grouping e Group D You can select several component by maintaining left click and move the mouse you
156. dB 200Hz 12kHz Maximum Cable Length 100m on Category 5 cable 4 2 4 4 Configuration To make PPM AS work it need to edit configuration using Ateis Studio Following sections are about configuration editing Create PPM AS Object Open or create a Ateis studio configuration file in the Device design window create audio processor and PSS AS object 1 Drag audio processor to design window to create audio processor object 2 Drag PSS AS to design window to create PPM AS object 3 Wiring to connect green pins between PSS AS object and audio processor a Je Audio Processors LAP GZT BSEBESZBRS dh HI M mh SEET DSP component configuration It need to route audio from PPM AS to paging component for paging processing See the following 2012 ATEIS 154 Ateis Studio example FSS See FFF TFF FTF C4 SE D D E Ao not ipm ms CL gt iF Message gt oe Mixer gt ea Net Input 5 4129 Met Output H Noise Generator 1 d T 4 D L a R5485 Audio P Recorder selector Signal Monitor Pin A D of RS485 Input component is corresponds to PPM AS 1 4 audio plugged in PDC1 4 respectively Network Paging component process paging request coming from various sources and to determine which source is allowed to paging to zones it desired The zones are M1 MB8 on Network Paging component You need create an integration paging event to link with PSS AS see topic Network Paging to learn
157. dance will be 850 1150 ohm if measured impedance value is 1300 ohm a bad impedance fault is recognized by IDA8C S e Get Reference When system is construction user need to get the impedance value of speaker for further reference this value will utilized to detect fault of zones The rule of fault detection is described in preview item Tolerance e Reset Reference Reset the reference value to empty result to disable zone monitoring but the measure value still updated There are buttons in the right side of page Zone Settings e Get All Reference Get reference for all zones e Reset All Reference Reset reference for all zones e Reset Monitoring This will tell IDA8C S to reset monitoring to initial state of device In the case of zone short fault IDA8C S will open the internal relay to stop output audio signal to speaker after the relay is opened IDA8C S has no way to know if the circuit outside is short or not so after user repair the circuit it needs to reset monitoring to switch relay close to output audio signal to speaker again then IDA8C S can monitor the short problem again 2012 ATEIS o Ateis Studio Measurement After parameter settings are done in lower part grid IDA8C S start to measure value get from internal circuit and display it on the grid at upper part of window Zi Monitor Matrix Mode IDA8C 1 Zone Monitor Normal Amplifier Monitor Backup Amplifier Monitor Zo
158. ddress Industriestrasse 8 D 63801 Kleinostheim Deutschland Tel 49 0 60 27 97 98 85 Fax 49 0 60 27 97 98 80 Ateis UK Address ATEIS UK Ltd Fountain Court 2 Victoria Square Victoria Street St Albans Hertfordshire AL1 3TF UK T l 44 0 8456 521 511 Fax 44 0 8456 522 527 Address Room 610 No 255 Wubao Road Minxing district Shanghai China Tel 021 54495191 92 Fax 021 54495193 E mail sales ateis com cn http www ateis com cn O 2012 ATEIS
159. determines the cycle type of triggering there are five types available Hourly Daily Weekly Monthly Yearly It allow user to define the interval between cycles by specify the parameter of Every N cycle units where cycle unit could be Hour Day Week Month Y ear In the box of List of Triggering Time you can add or remove the triggering time in the cycle e By Excel File A B C D E E G H 2011 1 24HR 1 08 00 00 09 00 00 10 00 00 11 00 00 12 00 00 13 00 00 14 00 00 2 08 00 00 09 00 00 10 00 00 11 00 00 12 00 00 13 00 00 14 00 00 3 08 00 00 09 00 00 10 00 00 11 00 00 12 00 00 13 00 00 14 00 00 4 08 00 00 09 00 00 10 00 00 11 00 00 12 00 00 13 00 00 14 00 00 5S 08 00 00 09 00 00 10 00 00 11 00 00 12 00 00 13 00 00 14 00 00 6 08 00 00 09 00 00 10 00 00 11 00 00 12 00 00 It allow user specify triggering times using an excel file the rules are listed below e Field A1 is the Year Month to scheduling e B1 X1 is the field for time format there are two choose o 24HR o AM PM e A2 A 32 represent the day of a month e For each row B to Xfields are the time to be trigged Exception Duration O 2012 ATEIS Exception Duration Add 02 35 30 IEEE D2 35 41 e 2011 10 11 2011 10 23 02 36 39 2011 10 19 02 36 41 2011 10 25 Delete Event the mechanism for triggering time setup is very flexible but there still always need the exceptions On the lower part of scheduler settings window A block Exception Duration
160. device over Ateis Net do an EVAC paging See the topic of Network Paging Component to learn more about how to config a EVAC paging Zone EVAC LEDs To show the audio channel is in EVAC paging or not Each LED is correspond to a output channel of Network Paging component for example 1st LED is for pin M1 2nd LED for pin M2 and so on Power LED This LED lights on when IDA8SL is power on Network LED Show the status of Ateis Net This LED lights on if more than two deployed IDA8 devices in Ateis Net Ki Zone Fault LEDs To show fault status of zone This LED light on if one of following faults is detected e Normal AMP Error e Line A Error O 2012 ATEIS am Ateis Studio e Line B Error e Backup AMP Error e AMP Line Leakage Error 4 1 3 3 Rear Panel OP PLE NOH QUIFETE Pot FOCI is ss a SS Ke Enero dE d 4 IT amp Lar mo OT EE H E aa 10 11712 Backup Amplifier Output This connector connects to the output of the backup amplifier for receiving the 100V audio signal powered by the amplifier Bypass Mode Outputs This port to share the bypass mode microphone signals through the IDA8C IDA8S network only needed when using fiber optic network PDC Peripherals Device Controller Connectors Two RJ 45 connectors to connect consoles or peripheral devices For examples PSS AS URC AS PPM AS are connect to IDA8SAB via this connector L
161. devices to show the configuration of Net Input and Net Output In Device editing window create an IDA8C and an IDA8SAB wires connect NB NA pins on the block to make up a Ateis Net system IDASC IDASS LEEEEEERE SECRET Pg e EEEE Ad AZ Ad AA H1 Hz Hd 5 Hg E tl Aue ET PIX PIX PIX PIX in Mi b mh In DSP design window of IDA8C it utilizes the Net Input Output channel 1 to transport audio signal from Input A channel in IDA8C to Monitor Out C channel 1 IDA8C DSP Design IDA8S DSP Design O 2012 ATEIS 404 Ateis Studio 6 17 Net Output Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component GES Net Output we PA A 1 5 sx B 9 16 sage C 17 24 4A D 25 32 A E 33 40 0 we F 41 48 IHR Noise Generator YY Output Device ModulaDAse Component Appearance Description This component transfer audio signals over Ateis Net It must work with Net Input please go to the topic Net Input for more details O 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 40 6 18 Noise Generator 6 18 1 Pink ve Component Template Main DSP Components x EH DSP Component DR Net Output GJ Noise Generator PA Pink 0E white H Output IHR Page Control e DH Recorder w R5485 Audio P evice Module 1 Component Appearance Description Pink noise or 1 f noise is a signal or process with a frequency spectrum such that the power spe
162. dicate the component containing the linked element e Parameter The element be controlled by the sub preset e Value Value stored in sub preset e ink To open the window containing the linked element e Save To save current value of elements to the sub preset e Load To load value stored in sub preset and set to linked elements 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 251 5 3 Event Management 5 3 1 Event Manager There are various type of events for controlling Ateis devices For example to adjust value of elements or change presets Each event is able to link with a controller The following list are sources able to link events e Event Trigger component e Event Value Control component e PPM AS e PSS AS e Terra Controller e Front Panel on some Ateis devices like IDA8C Event manager is an container to store all events and manage them There is one event manager for each master preset Open Event manager by click on tools bar System IDASC 1 Waster Preset Master Preset The settings window shows below VN Event Manager Master Preset Value Trigger Master Preset Change e Name The name of an event e Type The type of an event different type of event executes different tasks when it triggers e States Count Some of events trigger with a state number For example to control a element like mute you need to set State Count to 2 because mute have two states On Off States count is the num
163. dio In CH 15 Audio In CH 16 oh bd oh b di Ah Edd Ah T Ah Ah K oh b Ah T oh K oh Lh Ah T oh m Ah T oh T oh IW AA m e Recovery If this option is enabled a paging source will try to take back the zones after another source which occupy the zones finish paging session A The occupied zone gives back to the active source if Both options Recovery of active source and Release of releasing source are enabled e Release If this option is enabled a paging source will release the zone to other active sources after finish paging session e Zone Available Percentage 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor a2 This is the condition to determine a paging request can be allowed or denied If the percentage of available zones is greater than the number on the settings Zone Available Percentage the paging is grand On the contrary the paging request is denied The available zones means the zones to be paged are not occupied by other sources or occupied by other sources with lower priority Chime Sa Network Paging Post chime Audio In CH 1 GNG3STONS WAV Audio In CH 2 Audio In CH 3 Network Paging component prowde the ability of chime playing before and end of an paging session To specify the chimes binding to a source using the tab chime of Network Paging setting window click the cell on grid the second layer window opened Sa Message List f PC Device
164. djustments URC AS connect to audio processor via RS485 cable that allow you to remote control parameters of audio processor with a long distance A elegant OLED to display information of parameters or the status It give extreme simple and effective experience of control interface with only Two buttons EXIT BACK and a Knob to achieve whatever action desired The URC AS is definitely the best choose for remote controlling with low cost consideration 2012 ATEIS Product Features 4 2 5 2 Control Panel 4 2 5 3 UNIVERSAL REMOTE CONTROL 1 OLED Display 2 Exit Button Back to the main menu 3 Knob Turn Select items or change volume Press Enter in the sub menu 4 Back Button Back to the root menu Characteristics 4 Case Dimension 84mm W x 33mm L x 84mm H Weight 0 08KG Power item Voltage Current Consumption Comment DC Input 24VDC O 2012 ATEIS 162 Ateis Studio 4 2 5 4 Maximum Cable Length 1200m on Category 5 cable Configuration To make URC AS work it need to edit configuration using Ateis Studio Following sections are about configuration editing Create URC AS Object Open or create a Ateis studio configuration file in the Device design window create audio processor and URC AS object 1 Drag audio processor to design window to create audio processor object 2 Drag URC AS to design window to create URC AS object 3 Wiring to connect green
165. does not have a touch screen use the other method to setup see the related topics of it In this case set IP 192 168 100 79 the subnet mask and geteway address should be the same as computer s You can find information from cmd window Type ipconfig in cmd window ox CAWINDOWS system3 cmd exe Microsoft Windows AF Version 5 1 2688 CC Copyright 1985 26681 Microsoft Corp C o Documents and Settings user ipconfig_ After execute command ipconfig IP Subnet Mask Gateway information is displayed in window inside the green rectangle ef CAWINDOWS system3 cmd exe Microsoft Windows AFP Wersion 5 1 2600 G Copyright 1985 2681 Microsoft Corp Co Documents and Settings user ipconfig Mindows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connect aun xao xL 3c nc Core so IPF Address u 192 168 1068 71 Subnet Mask 255 255 252 0 Default Gateway 192 168 166 254 C 5 Documents and Settings user gt _ In IDA8C IP Subnet Mask Gateway allow modify if user login the system Follow the steps to login Click SYSTEM SET in MAIN MENU page 2012 ATEIS 16 Ateis Studio Click LOGIN in SYSTEM SET MENU 1 page Click USER NAME in LOGIN page NO LOGI SRRERRERREERESRREERRRREERRRRRERERERERREERERESRRRERESRRERERRERREREERRRRRRRRREO Input ID ADMIN which is the default user of IDA8C Remain the blank of password 2012 ATEIS Quick Start
166. dress z ic Ateis Normal ECS 1 ECS Pil ta 115 192 168 100 588 Normal B i Ateis rient IDAacC 1 IDA amp SC a 1 19z 158 102 232 192 166 102 68 Faulk di i Ateis Fault IDAacC 1 IDAST il 1 192 158 102 58 192 166 102 232 Fault ZS i Ateis l OI IDA amp SC 1 IDA l 13 e42 192 158 102 1265 Normal zm p Sites T 8 Store one of redundancy systems the other will store the same configuration automatically 9 There is a window shows the information of current system if a error detected and system switching for redundancy O 2012 ATEIS ne Ateis Studio Sa Online Serial ID Level 1 ID Level 2 ID 246 i 1 AR gd Report verifying DSP Configuration Done Checking device status Done Retrieving data From device 246 Done Sending display info Done Online successful The system is online now 4 2 1 3 RU Main 4 2 1 3 1 Overview Primary IDA8C Normal Amp Normal Amp Output x 8 Input x 8 A B x 8 SPA Backup Backup Active Control Amp Amp Output Input 24VDC Output for Expansion 2012 ATEIS Product Features 117 RU MAIN is a device for audio processor redundancy the peripherals are connected with RU MAIN not directly to audio processor RU MAIN is in charge of switching primary and secondary audio processor to active one of them If primary audio processor is active all signal of peripherals are redirect to primary audio processor by RU MAIN RU MAIN monitor the stat
167. ds all the functionalities of the software windows and tools arranged by topic 3 Tools Bar Short access to main functionalities that are hidden into menu bar 4 Tab Bar Shows the window title of all opened windows design components control windows for quick access 5 Dock Panel Component Template A dock panel on left side of software it contains all devices and DSP components you can use to build up and design your system 6 Dock Panel Device Management A dock panel on bottom side of software it list information about devices and allow user to connect to device for maintenance 2012 ATEIS System Functionality ome T Status Bar Display the status of software including the modification indication of editing file mouse cursor position etc 8 Working Area DSP Components Editor A graphical interface allow user to design system put the components which performs specific audio signal processing and wiring between components to make complete audio path from input to output 5 1 5 File New ave Save As Open Recent Files Close PERE e New Fi Opens a new blank project e Save ki Saves the current file you are currently working with e Save As ka Opens the Save as dialog box to save the current working project with a different name and or path e Open 3 Opens the Open dialog box which allows you to select a path and open a saved file e Recent Files Quick access to the
168. e M 242 5 1 19 Properties 243 5 1 20 Message Library M 244 5 1 21 Logo Library 245 52 E ET E TTE LT ILLIS 245 SU NES 80 821 A W aia ea uU DT 245 5 2 2 Master Prosla non n aaaea iaaa aaa Ea e aia VE a aa Aaa EEA a aS A a AAVA SW RR do ZR ROME 246 523 Su uUD Preseis ainne aca cesses ect v ME ce de ana EDEN VI AE EREN E AENA AEAEE a EEA 248 B S Event Mabnagelmentb uet a evecta ic uxM Edd D MEE I UNE dMEEEI ME 251 5 3 1 Event Manager ena 251 5 3 2 Value Trigger Event 252 9539 Value Control PETERE a a a 254 5 3 4 Step Trigger Event 4 AA M 257 5 3 5 Step Control Event s ses sesesesnennsnusnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnnnnnn nna 259 5 3 6 Master Preset Change Change E 261 2012 ATEIS Contents 5 3 7 Sub Preset Change Evinet 262 5 3 8 Intergration Paging Event e ueuEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE 263 5 3 9 Singular Paging Event sueeeseENEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEN 263
169. e and make sure to use adequate cables ve Do not use benzene thinner or chemicals to clean the device Use only a soft dry cloth If the device is moved from a cold place e g overnight in a car to a warmer environment condensation may form inside the unit which may affect performance Allow the device to acclimatize for about one hour before use Quick Start for IDA8 Here is a simple demonstration showing how to configure one of our platforms and how to adjust parameters to get a 2K tone from the connected speaker This example uses an IDA8C but the other audio processors follow the same procedure 1 Setup device and wiring Ethernet ES SE Lm n m n e S pro eg bat Pai Gei Pei fei G i Fei Pei Pei Fei Pai Pi Fei Fei ee M ya EAA DE E M M fei Pei Pei Pai l Pei l M 1 M M M 2 METTI r SS prx Kg n LLL a ul T m TET DX RRP GARR GG RR EIERE E i nn Ateis Studio e Speaker is connect to Amplifier Zone Output Zone1 O 2012 ATEIS Quick Start 15 e Connect ethernet wire for device and PC IDA8C 2 Power up device Power up device and make sure power LED is on 3 Set IP Subnet mask and gateway address of device To set IP Subnet mask and Gateway address use the menu on the touch screen on the front of the IDA8C If you are using a platform that
170. e some amplifier has an indicator Overload you can check this indicator o Check if speaker is good or damaged If all check passed but still get a amplifier too low fault change amplifier If this fault generated after speaker configuration changed you can do a get reference again to get new values for reference e Amplifier Fail Measure Unloaded Reference 10 once this fault is happen do the following checks o Check if amplifier is power on or not o Check if the gain of amplifier is set to O if it is set to a suitable value o Check if the wires between amplifier and IDA8 are good connection If all check passed but still get a amplifier fail fault change amplifier O 2012 ATEIS 106 Ateis Studio 4 1 6 7 Global Settings Sa Monitor Matrix Mode IDASC 1 Zone Monitor Normal Amplifier Monitor Backup Amplifier Monitor Leakage Impedance ohm Reference A ohm Reference B ohm Reference A amp B ohm Current Amp Measure ohm Diff 35 18k or 20k Zone 1kTone 1 2 3 A 5 6 T B8 Global Settings Zone Settings Normal Amplifier Settings Backup Amplifier Settings Tone Settings Enable Monitor Enable Leakage Leakeage Threshold 1k ohm Leakage Calibration There are global settings listed below e Enable Monitor A check box to determine enable or disable monitor function e Enable Leakage A check box to determine enable or disable leakage detect func
171. e MadulelDi amp sc Component Appearance ere Se ST SS T C4 0 SP Wo 00 Logic Out ve Description This component is corresponding to contact outputs 2012 ATEIS a84 Ateis Studio 6 12 12 Scheduler Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component Ste Logic EE Scheduler E Scheduler 1 CH E Scheduler 2 CH REI Scheduler d CH fi Scheduler 8 CH E 3 Meter DH Message e DH Mixer Device Modul 16 ge Component Appearance ve Description This component allow user to arrange the timing of generating logical pulse to output The length of pulse is 1 sec There are four types of scheduler Scheduler 1 CH Scheduler 2 CH Scheduler 4 CH Scheduler 8 CH For each channel there is s scheduler working on it The pins on top side enable signal 1 or disable signal 0 the scheduler belong to the channel pin with the down pins generate pulse signal depends on the settings of component r Control Window O 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 385 A Scheduler Scheduler 1 General Settings Scheduler 2 Scheduler 3 Mame Scheduler 1 Mode Periodic Scheduler 4 Start Time 2011 10 25 09 50 15 Interva 0 2 0 2 0 Stop Condition Number of Times Mumber of Times 1 S Stop Time 2011 10 25 EF 09 50 15 K Exception Duration Delete r Scheduler List Scheduler 2 Scheduler 3 Scheduler 4 On the left side of window there i
172. e current amount of gain reduction amp Graphical Control Window Bag GPC Expander e Axis o X Input signal level dB o Y Output signal level dB e Control Points o Red Adjust Ratio o Yellow Adjust Threshold Range o Blue Adjust Threshold O 2012 ATEIS e Ateis Studio 6 4 8 Gate 6 4 8 1 Gate Mono ve Component Template Main DSP Components EE DSP Component EE Delay Advanced EHE Delay Basic EMET Dynamic L AGC Stereo Re Auto Noise Gain A N G HH Compressor Zog Compressor Stereo GI Gate Component Appearance Description The gate allows you to cut off the signal below a chosen threshold 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 317 gsm ms tepals I a Or dh threshold CET LIIIIIIIIIII CTET response attack hold r Control Window EN Crate i Mono m n n to Mute Response Attack F Hold Release P i Time Time Time i In ims GB ve Element Description e Mute Mute the gate s module e Bypass owitch off the gate s operation Gate On Light on when the gate is active open e Thd Sets the threshold level above which the Gate will open e Response Time O 2012 ATEIS sis Ateis Studio Adjust the time between the level s detection and the beginning of the Gate operation e Attack Time Adjust the fade in time of the signal when Gate is working e Hold Time Adjust the
173. e in ready list Clear Clear ready list o Remove Remove a message from list o Clear 2012 ATEIS Product Features 149 Clear the list o Close Close the window PPM AS Settings Double click the PPM AS object open the window of PPM AS Settings PPMI AS Default Settings Mame PPM AS 1 Preposition GNG3TONS W 7 Posiposiion GNGSTONS Wi e e Name The name of PPM AS e Announcement Open announcement message settings window see prior section for details e Announcement Preposition Enable or disable pre announcement chime playing e Announcement Preposition Name Select message from the announcement message list for pre announcement chime playing e Announcement Postposition Enable or disable post announcement chime playing e Announcement Postposition Name Select message from the announcement message list for post announcement chime playing e Talk Mode Specify the behavor of key pressing when paging See prior section for details e Key Count Specify how many number of keys in PPM AS e Key Event Bind a paging event with PPM AS for zone selection See Network Paging component topic for 2012 ATEIS 150 Ateis Studio more details Remote Plug in It need to do a Remote Plug in to make audio processor recognize this remote devices See the topic Remote Plug in for more details Assign to Design Objects The device object in design window needs map to physical device then the
174. e of a band pass filter r Control Window Element Properties O 2012 ATEIS am Ateis Studio e Generate Information L Name Initial Minimum Maximum Precision Unit Bandwidth e tem list of Mode Butterworth e tem list of Band Stop 12dB ve Element Description e Mode Type of filtering e Slope Slope of attenuation e Bandwidth Difference between the upper and lower frequencies in a contiguous set of frequencies todo Kevin e Bypass Bypass the filter s module e Mute Mute the filter s module e Level Gain of filter s module e Frequency Frequency of cut amp Graphical Control Window 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 345 ch GPC Band stop E ee ERO m E E e Axis o X Frequency of output signal Hz o Y Level of input signal dB e Control Points o Blue Adjust element Frequency Horizontal and Level Vertical o Yellow Adjust element Bandwidth 2012 ATEIS 34 Ateis Studio 6 7 4 Crossover Crossover Stereo Component Template Main DSP Components EE DSP Component GJ Filter o ER All Pass Filter ee Crossover Mover 2 Way Mover 3 Way Anwver 4 Way erc Crossover Stereo Anwer 2 Way over 3 Way Component Appearance Description Crossovers split the audio signal into separate frequency bands that can be separately routed to other DSP components for those bands A 2 way crossover
175. e or disable pre announcement chime playing e Pre Announcement Name The name of pre announcement message e Post Announcement Enabled Enable or disable post announcement chime playing e Post Announcement Name The name of post announcement message e Announcement Open announcement message settings window Sai Announcement List Announcement GNG3TONS WAV Eu ees Gs o New Input a name of announcement message for creating new entry in the list Type name in the editor and press the button right to the editor o Index Index for entries in the list o Announcement The name of announcement message o Add Add a name of announcement message from File Selection Dialog O 2012 ATEIS 18 Ateis Studio FileSelectDialogFm Path C Program Files x86 ATEIS ATEIS Studio v1 0 0 67 Messages ies e n n C Program Files x86 ATEISMATEI GNG3TONS WAV WAN GNG3TONS Display de g Remove Clear Path Specify the directory to list all files with supported formats File List Display files in the directory Path Display Specify the display mode for file list There are three modes Icon List Detail Add Move the select files to the ready list that the right side of window Ok Add files in the ready list to announcement message list Cancel Close window and ignore ready list Path The directory name of message file belongs to File The name of message file Remove Remove the select message fil
176. e same solution without using an external equalizer all it done in software component PEQ 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 335 6 6 Feedback ve Component Template Main DSP Components E Je DSP Component H Delay Advanced H 3 Delay Basic o ER Dynamic H Equalizer B Je Feedback H Je 1 5 Octave fil 12 Band i 16 Band GIE 1 10 Octave li 16 Band E ig 1 20 Octave o s Filter Sr Fireman of Input ge Component Appearance J FeedBack 1 5 Oct B Band ve Description The error between the desired and the actual output is taken and given as feedback to the adaptive processor for adjusting its coefficients to minimize the error The feedback analyzes the signal O 2012 ATEIS 336 Ateis Studio detects feedback and attenuates the responsible frequency There is several kind of feedback component The difference is only the bandwidth which are tuned for Music high than speech between it the bandwidth is decreasing Each category has 4 different feedback it is only the number of filter 4 8 12 or 16 that the feedback will use The treatment time is increased with the number of filter o use feedback killers to detect feedback then note the frequency and replace feedback component with an Equalizer And add a simply 4 notch feedback for security P By storing again the configuration you will erase the captured Values frequencies bandwidth and gain 4 Con
177. e system is calibrating clicking on the calibration button will cancel the calibration at that moment The system will use the calibration result which was successfully calibrated at last time e After calibration successful the paging microphone shouldn t be placed nearly to sensing microphone because the user s voice will be also received into sensing microphone e AGC level is still calculating even in inactivate mode The level is depend on background noise It will support a good initial gain for paging level 4 Use the A N G When the calibration green led lit the system is ready In our example the A N G has detected an ambient noise average of 12dB We choose a medium response speed and a short sampling time to be enough reactive quickly pu me KK e Ser TA LG B ES PEL E Er EK PRUDENS Lt bient Noise c Response Spee Sensing Mic Level Ej amp amp nsing Mic Leve Output Level dB dB dB Now the A N G will automatically adjust the level on the P M signal depending on the ambient noise detected on the sensing microphone The A N G will working when the paging activity led will light meaning that an audio signal is detected on the P M input Dead Zone If the sensing microphone doesn t detect more noise than during the calibration the A N G works in the Dead Zone which means that there is no need to adjust the gain 2012 ATEIS O 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio
178. e them After that the design is successfully compiled and loaded into the machine s you have full access to all the parameters in the system There are a lot of controlling features starting from simple TTL l O s over analogue voltage control to advanced data communication You can choose from a range of controlling devices or remote microphones suitable to access parameters within the whole networked system System Requirement Ateis Studio runs on window XP Vista and Seven va We recommend at least 1GB RAM 2GHz processor Disk Space required is 100MB O 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 213 5 1 3 Install Ateis Studio Please follow the steps below to install Ateis Studio 1 Before installing the Ateis Studio software check if your PC meets the system requirements 2 Turn on your PC and allow Windows to start up Insert the supplied CD ROM into your drive If the content of the CD ROM is not displayed automatically double click the My Computer icon and navigate to the DVD CD drive Note If you have access to the WEB goes to www ateis international com and download the latest software version You may need to update the firmware 3 Copy the file ATEIS Studio v 1 x x setup using the copy and paste commands or by drag and drop to the Desktop Wait until the task has finished T1 my ATEIS Studio LOO Fs 4 Start the program ATEIS Studio vx x x x setup by double click on its icon
179. e time reduction ee dB Po time p Gms Jf L 1 Gain Reduction 290 25 0 0 O1 ve Element Description e Bypass Bypasses the compressor s function e Soft Knee Enables disables the Soft Knee mode This element controls whether the bend in the response curve is a sharp angle or has a rounded edge A soft knee slowly increases the compression ratio as the level increases and eventually reaches the compression ratio set by the user A soft knee reduces the audible change from uncompressed to compressed especially for higher ratios where the changeover is more noticeable 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 301 Hard Knee P Soft Knee Threshold Input Level dB e Compress Indicates compression e Ratio Sets compression ratio Threshold Sets the threshold level above which compression begins e Threshold Range Sets the range of level in which the ratio gradually alters from 1 1 to the value set by the ratio parameter soft knee function e Attack Time Sets the time it takes to respond to the input signal A compressor might provide a degree of control over how quickly it acts The attack phase is the period when the compressor is decreasing gain to reach the level that is determined by the ratio O 2012 ATEIS 32 Ateis Studio Input level 9 SS 6 Teee O iputleve Threshold 3 be a 0 id 3 Ee Level Time Attack Release Phase P
180. eaker and enable monitoring of short again A string S C is showed in field Measure ohm O 2012 ATEIS 100 Ateis Studio 4 1 6 5 Normal Amplifier Monitoring Settings First in Ateis Studio right click on IDA8C S block in Devices window am um EN SUS SURUTARSTRRE Jin Mi Me SPEER TLE mE Ateis Site Output Ra ET o Window Monitoring Matrix Mode IDA8C S X shows up select page Normal Amplifier Settings ma Wionitor Matrix Mode IDASC 1 Fone Monitor Normal Amplifier Monitor Backup Amplifier Monitor Unloaded Reference Ful Loaded Reference oy Ton fw we a Amplifier Tolerance Get Reference Reset Reference Global settings Zone Settings dk Ak AE Ak Ak Ak 4k AF c on b u M Hn e Amplifier Indicates a row is refer to which normal amplifier of zone e Monitor Enable Disable normal amplifier monitoring for selected zone if monitoring of a normal amplifier is disabled IDA8C S will not detect faults of normal amplifier e Tolerance O 2012 ATEIS Product Features 101 To determine the boundary of fault detection for selected zone There is a fault recognized if one of follow conditions is true Measure lt Full Loaded Reference x 100 Tolerance Measure gt Unloaded Reference x 100 Tolerance e Get Reference Get the reference values of selected zone for further fault detection Be aware hardwa
181. ed by IDA8 you can say the zones are occupied by the audio source bound with that paging event This info zone occupied source are used in some logic or procedure of paging component implementation for give different results for user See later sections for more details about how the audio source used to e Priority There is a priority value for each zone along with code If there are more than one source attempt to paging the same zone IDA8 use the priority value to decide which source is allowed to occupy the zone for paging A The smaller value with higher priority e Priority Visible A check box to show or hide the priority setting inside grid e Button All Set priority value for all zones The value to apply for all zones is in the editor left to button O 2012 ATEIS m Ateis Studio e Button Add Add codes to event e Button Remove Remove selected code o Singular This event is very similar with integration paging event except the number of code is only one d Refreshing Condition This section is talking about the ending behavior of a paging request and the zone available condition AI Network Pa ging General Settings Refreshing Condition Chime Logic Qut Trigger Relay Zone Available Percentage Audio In CH 1 Audio In CH 2 Audio In CH 3 Audio In CH 4 Audio In CH 5 Audio In CH 6 Audio In CH 7 Audio In CH 8 Audio In CH 9 Audio In CH 10 Audio In CH 11 Audio In CH 13 Audio In CH 14 Au
182. editing paging settings PSS AS Settings Double click PSS AS object to open settings window There are 14 pages on the right of window each or page is corresponds to a page on PSS AS There are five tabs on the top of window containing various settings of each The following sections describe for each settings of tab ve PSS AS Settings Key Tab This page is the settings about the captions for each key and the usage selection 2012 ATEIS Product Features 155 Keys Paging Trigger Control Message Setting Comment 1 Boom v Boom v y Ki CG c Ww O0 m un A Wo M n e Key Refer to the key on the page of PPM AS e Comment 1 2 3 The text displayed on the key there are three rows on it Comment 1 is the first row and so on e Paging Other Check boxes for Paging and Others option are alternative Choose one of them to determine the key used for paging or triggering an event PSS AS Settings Paging Tab This page shows the zone combination for each key which is configured as paging O 2012 ATEIS 156 Ateis Studio Paging Event i e Value To specify which code on integration paging event is bound with the key e All Select all zone for the key e Zone Selection The grid list all zones of network paging component for all audio processors click check boxes to select zones separately for the key PSS AS Settings Trigger Control Tab This section mainly
183. effectively reduces the volume if the signal is strong and raises it when it is weaker you can adjust automatically the gain of the source by setting a target level There two type of AGC one is signal channel the other one is stereo r Control Window O 2012 ATEIS 288 Ateis Studio ER AGC Release Th at The control window of AGC Stereo the same as AGC s Element Properties Release On Sampling Time 500 The element properties of AGC Stereo is the same as AGC s Element Description e Release If the release button is on the release time will be the element Release Time Otherwise the release time will be 10 ms e Bypass Disable AGC Function i e bypass audio signal from input to output e Active Flash when the gain is controlled AGC is active Threshold Sets the threshold level above which the gain will be controlled A nont set a too much low level otherwise it will hear some unexpected little sound breath ambient noise e Target Level Determine which relative volume you want to target e Max Gain 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 289 Determine the maximum of automatic gain A Limit the max gain to keep a natural audio dynamic e Attack Time Adjust the fade in time needed to reach the target level A A short time will give an uncomfortable hearing with audio peak when the speaker begins to talk e Release Time Adjust the fade out time of t
184. el of IDA8C Preset Table Err Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio Preset Table Error e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C ga Fault Handling 2012 ATEIS Product Features 1 Update firmware using newest version of Ateis Studio 2 Store configuration It the problem still not solved please contact service 4 1 6 1 6 No Preset Error Fault Meaning There is no configuration inside device Fault Indication e ED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up o System Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S e Log Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C No Preset Table Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio me achine Fault Record Category Description More Detail Mo Preset Error e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C Fault Handling Store a configuration to device If the error still not solved please contact service 4 1 6 1 7 SPI Flash Error Fault Meaning An internal error of micro controller SPI communication Fault Indication e LED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up o System Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S e Log Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C SPI Flash Erro
185. els In here you can create an individual mix of the input signals independently for the specified output By default all levels are set to 0 db which basically means that all audio signals at the input are mixed with no attenuation and appear like this on every output r Control Window O 2012 ATEIS 40 Ateis Studio Output level dB a s al Output Level Output Mute Matrix Output Level i aa Element Description e Input Mute Mutes or un mutes the channel input e Input Level Mutes or un mutes the channel input e Output Level Sets the master output level of the channel e Output Mute Mutes or un mutes the channel output e Matrix Output Level Set the input level on the particular output channel for mixing 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor aor 6 15 4 Standard ga Component Template Main DSP Components f Je DSP Component a d Mixer o BA AutoMixer ER AutoMixer MM mp Matrix B Je Standard Component Appearance ve Description The matrix module is similar to the standard mixer with the main difference that there is no ability to make independent mixes for each output channel So the module primary is used for simple routing purposes r Control Window ES standard Mixer PE ES ES zit O 2012 ATEIS ap Ateis Studio va Element Properties Name Initial Minimum Maximum Precision Unit pt leg
186. ement Control penes iis Master Sub Preset Control M PDC i 1 Active i PPM IT5 Ethernet Over Eth Paging Element Control Master Sub Preset Control ieee Ethernet Eth Limit Parameters Control Master Sub Preset Control 34 PDC Wall mounted cabinet abusi console with 8 buttons C U Da CD16 URGP 1 PDC Evacuation Input extension DN PDC 1 PDC Auto noise gain for audio signals 31 PDC Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console with 16 buttons zones PDC 4 PDC Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console with touch screen and Fireman Microphone PDC 31 PDC Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console with telephone styled microphone PDC CD Touch D8 PCP URC AS PDC Remote console for Master Sub Preset Controlling Element Controlling CDPA 31 PDC Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console with 24 buttons zones and 2 extra selectable microphone sources A grouped console is comprised of a pad with monitoring 31 PDC speaker a pad with a gooseneck and 8 buttons zones two pads with 8 buttons zones PDC A remote dialer for making telephone calls via IDA8 s telephone hardware Deskpad me It s a RF transceiver to communication between Deskpad and BOX IDA8 use it Deskpad can working without physcial connection PSC Deskpad Notes Eth Limit The maximum numbers of IP that can be assigned over the network 4 1 1 6 3rd Party Control The following table list 3rd Party Control protocols IDA8C Supported
187. en G AGC i Vag in i time Generator Noise Level dB dB 7 TdB dB e Fone Sensing Mic Level BiSensing Mic L dii Output Level ET dB ES Gs 3 8 02 riri 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 299 6 4 3 Compressor Compressor Stereo ga Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component ER Delay Advanced SIS Delay Basic m Auto Noise Gain GONG HH Compressor 7 HH Compressor Stereo A HH Expander Stereo H Gate FEN FEN Device ModuldDASC Component Appearance ve Description A Compressor is an automatic volume control Loud sounds over a certain threshold are reduced in level while quiet sounds remain untreated In this way it reduces the dynamic range of an audio signal This may be done for aesthetic reasons to deal with technical limitations of audio equipment or to improve audibility of audio in noisy environments Compression reduces the level of the loud sounds but not the quiet sounds thus the level can be raised to a point where the quiet sounds are more audible without the loud sounds being too loud Compressor Stereo is the same that the Compressor component but this works on the both stereo channels The detection is done on the both input signals The same compression is applied on the both output signals r Control Window O 2012 ATEIS 300 Ateis Studio d Threshold A eshold Attack Release mem rt range tim
188. ence Here you define what kind of reference you use It can be the place in the area Normal a component or a point For example when you will use the Align Left function to align several components to the left the left will depend of the reference x ul o Normal In Normal mode the reference is the place in the graphic editor If you select several components and use the Align Left function then the reference will be the left side of component at the left of the area All the selected components will be aligned to this reference O 2012 ATEIS 226 Ateis Studio dh o Reference Component Be In Reference Component mode the reference is a component If you select several components and use the Align Left function then the mouse cursor will change to Re asking you to select a component as reference Select a component by clicking in The mouse change to Ra when it is placed on a component All the selected components will be aligned to this component In this example we choose the AEC component as reference o Reference Point In Reference Component mode the reference is a point If you select several components and use the Align Left function then the mouse cursor will change to a blue cross asking you to choose exactly where is the reference All the selected components will be aligned to this point 2012 ATEIS System Functionality omm L 1 I eee T F 100 m m
189. ent DC Input 18V 26V Typical 24V 2A DC Output 18V 26V Typical 24v 05A J gt O e AC Maximum Consumption 45 W Amplifier Zone Outputs e Maximum level 14 dB e Output Impedance 50 Ohm e THD N Total Harmonic Distortion plus Noise e Bandwidth 20Hz 20kHz e ElN Equivalent Input Noise Frequency 20 20kHz 150U 20 20kHz 150U 20 20kHz 150U 20 20kHz 150U 20 20kHz 150U 2012 ATEIS Product Features 59 Speaker line Amplifier Maximum Power 700W RMS Maximum Power Siren Message 1000W e Configurable Audio Output e Maximum level 14 dBu e Output Impedance 50 Ohm e THD N Total Harmonic Distortion plus Noise Sensitivity Minimum Maximum Unit Frequency 20 20kHz 4dBu 20 20kHz 2dBu 0 20 20kHz 14dBu 20 20kHz 30dBu 20 20kHz 44dBu e Bandwidth 20Hz 20kHz e EIN Equivalent Input Noise 20 20kHz 150U Configurable Audio Input e Sensitivity For each channel of configurable audio input card there are five levels to gain the audio signal They are sensitivity values of OdBu 12dbBu 24dBu 40dBu and 54dBu respectively The meaning of sensitivity value is how large the gain for an audio source and to amplify the giving minus input source to OdBu the figure below is an example when the sensitivty value is set to 54dBu and input source is 54dBu after the gaining circuit of audio card you ll get t
190. ent is used to control the element value It set value of element by source that triggers the event An value control event can link more than one elements for controlling r Event Creation O 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 255 mm Control S Click button Add to create a new event a second window open to query you which kind of event is desired Select item Value Control on Type combo box Then press button OK Event Settings After create a value control event you need to assign an element to it Then the assigned element will be controllable by the event To do assignment right click on the desired element click popup menu by sequence Event gt Value Control gt XXX where XXX is the name of event The following figure is an example ES Acc F Target Level dB External Control Third Party Contral Sub Preset Control URC AS cc Step Trigger e Step Control Click field Content of event manager window to open settings window of the event O 2012 ATEIS 256 Ateis Studio ae value Control Master Preset Event 2 Control Type Value Threshold On the right side of window there is a Knob to simulate source that triggers event If you adjust the knob the value of elements also changed e Control Type This option determines the type of knob simulation there are two options of Control Type o Value Knob adjust value of elements using native value
191. equency _ 0 04 Unit Odu HH 20 20kHzQy 4dBu 2dau 006 6 20 20kHzQ 2dBu 24du y 006 amp 20 20kHzQ 14dBu 40du o o 006 amp 20 20kHzQ 30dBu po 54dBu LL oe oe 20 20kHzQ 44dBu e Bandwidth 20Hz 20kHz 4 PDC e Maximum Output Level 10 dBu e Output Impedance 300 Ohm e THD 1kHz at output 0 02 e Bandwidth 3dB at output 20Hz 20kHz e Noise Q 22Hz 22kHz 85dBu e Maximum Input Level 16 dBu e Input Impedance 11k Ohm e THD 1kHz at input 0 02 e Bandwidth 3dB at input lt 20Hz 22kHz e RS232 voltages 6 5 6 5 Evacuation Inputs Contact Mode e Bias voltage Pe Hem Minimum Maximum Unt Votae 1 1 Bp 1 5 VDO e Monitoring resistor 4 7k Ohm Evacuation Inputs Voltage Mode On Voltage Pe Hem Minimum Maximum Unt Voltage 18 a VDC w Contact Outputs EVAC Fault State Outputs Voltage J E ur q ge Working Temperature 0 C 40 C 2012 ATEIS Product Features 39 4 1 1 5 Peripherals Following table is the peripherals supported by IDA8C Device Connection Max Num Function Fireman MIC ib EE 1 Paging where operator is close to IDA8C PDC PPMAS PDC 31 PDC Remote console for with paging abilit Remote console for Paging Event Triggering El
192. er Stereo o Gate we EH Limiter Stereo e Equalizer e DH Feedback e DH Filter Sr Fireman aM T m nm e nla Device MadulBibABC sg Component Appearance ve Description This component limits the audio level depending on a threshold 4 Control Window 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 327 o halg Release Gain reduction dB time iims dB 45 0 Element Properties Hard Clipping On Limtng Of J J J Twehodd 0 600 200 01 dB Gain Reduction 450 450 0 o1 dB va Element Description e Bypass owitch off the Limiters operation e Hard Clipping Enables disables the Hard clipping mode This is an example of a sinusoidal signal limited with and without Hard Clipping Without Hard Clipping O 2012 ATEIS ER Ateis Studio DA IRR AAN e Limiting Indicates limiting Threshold Sets the threshold level above which limiting begins e Release Time Sets the time it takes to release gain reduction e Gain Reduction Reflects the current amount of gain reduction amp Graphical Control Window e Axis o X Input signal level dB 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 329 o Y Output signal level dB e Control Points o Red Adjust Threshold 6 5 Equalizer 6 5 1 GEQ GEQ Stereo Component Template Main DSP Components ES Je DSP Component H Delay Advanced H
193. erver installed and ethernet switch it is error if link LED is not light up or active LEC isn t blinking possible cases are listed below e Both switch and PC get wrong LED display behavior check cable between PC amp ethernet swich e Only VOX NET get wrong LED display behavior check network card of PC you can change a network card to see if it is working e Only switch get wrong LED display behavior check switch you can simply change to another port to see if it is working Observe link and active LED indicator on RJ45 connector of IDA8C S and switch possible cases are listed below e Both switch and IDA8C S get wrong LED display behavior check cable between IDA8C S amp ethernet swich e Only IDA8C S get wrong LED display behavior check IDA8C S you can replace it by a good IDA8C S to see if it is working e Only switch get wrong LED display behavior check switch you can simply change to another port to see if it is working 4 1 6 2 8 User Define Error Fault Meaning e A user define error is detected by IDA8C S this kind of error can be defined using Fault Definer DSP component g Fault Indication e LED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up 2012 ATEIS o Ateis Studio o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S e Log Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C User Define Er XXXXX where XXXXX is the content defined in Fault Definer
194. escription 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor om To delay the audio signal input to the component Delay component record audio into a internal buffer and then play back the stored audio based on parameters set by the user There are two ways to adjust delay time for a channel the first one is to adjust element Delay time the other one is adjust Element Temp and Distance to compute delay time Element Type is can switch between two modes r Control Window Sa Delay Advanced 5 ms ef uin ri ut ul E T EU ete me e pe va Element Properties Tue Sr 2 Precision value of Delay time in various type of Delay Advanced O 2012 ATEIS 282 Ateis Studio 20 us 20 us 20 us 2000ms 3 Maximum value of Distance is depend on the type of Delay Advanced 2000ms 650m va Element Description e Type Choose between adjustments with Time or with Distance and temperature e Mute all Mute all channel the output of channel is mute if the value of this element or Mute is on e Bypass all Bypass audio signal of all channel i e disable the delay function e Mute Mute the channel the output of channel is mute if the value of this element or Mute all is on e Bypass Bypass audio signal of the channel e Delay time Specify how much time will be delayed for the audio signal of channel e Temp Specify the temperate to compute the delay time for channel e Distance Specify the Distan
195. etection e Frequency Frequency of the notch filter to attenuate the feedback e Bandwidth Bandwidth of the notch filter to attenuate the feedback e Gain Attenuation of the locked frequency e Lock Shows if the feedback killers channel has detected and is erased a frequency responsible of a feedback e Frequency Level Show the frequency locked e Bandwidth Level Show the bandwidth of the notch filter locked e Gain Level Show the attenuation of the frequency locked e Bypass All Bypass all channels todo e Manual All Active manual settings with Frequency Bandwidth and gain knobs e Hold All Hold all channels todo behavior description e Stop Detect todo e Reset All 2012 ATEIS mm Ateis Studio todo e Lock Time Interval time during the filter will be active when a feedback is detected After that the captured values will be loose e Detect Level Level of feedback detection e Depth Means maximum reduction gain for filter 6 7 Filter 6 7 1 All Pass Filter ga Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component GJ Filter GIE All Pass Filter ECH 2 Band HR Crossover CH Crossover Stereo Component Appearance Description An all pass filter is a signal processing filter that passes all frequencies equally but changes the phase relationship between various frequencies It does this by varying its propagation delay with frequency O 2012 ATEIS Compone
196. evel 6dBu e Output Impedance 100Ohm e THD 1kHz lt 0 1 e Bandwidth 3dB 200Hz 20kHz va Front Panel Speaker e Impedance 8Ohm e Maximum Power 1kHz 1W e THD 1kHz 1 e Bandwidth 3dB 200Hz 20kHz ve Cable length 100m control and power on the same cable 900m when power line connects to junction box Comes standard with Junction box JB and CAT5 cable 1 5 2012 ATEIS Product Features 191 4 2 14 URC200 TPC 4 2 14 1 Overview Redundancy Network ATEIS NET EE ec e IDA8SX CEE E VE AREY mle CLOG my The URC200 is an programmable remote controller TCP IP for the IDA8 system LAPG2T and ECS DSP audio matrix System It allows users to customize the menu items for the control parameters master sub presets of Ateis audio processors The URC200 contains a color 2 TFT panel and with the well designed user interface it gives the user the best experience of using this control console Two buttons and one encoders make menu controlling very simple and easy The URC200 is powered over IP and easy to integrate with current demands for room controllers like light curtains sound and video control The full color display is easy to read and has a low power consumption to allow for long lines and multiple devices into one system 2012 ATEIS 192 Ateis Studio 4 2 14 2 Control Panel 4 2 14 3 1 TFT Panel A color 2 TFT panel presents the menu system of URC
197. evel Threshold Level dB dB EA mpling Dutput Level dB l i NN dB auct ele Level Threshold Level dB dB dB RR Je L t Ley el dB Macc Differential Level GANE fers 13 If the White Noise Level goes up to OdB and the Under LED is lighted up the calibration has failed at this time and the DNM can t receive the calibration noise coming from loudspeaker please check e s the sound of loudspeaker is too small e s the distance too far between DNM and loudspeaker e Is the DNM damaged 2012 ATEIS Product Features 135 ES ONM2 cp am Min Max TERR White Moisq ENS sain i Time E tevel Threshold 10ms5 dB dB Paging Activity j m E sensing Mic Level eiSensina Mic Leve gr Output Level V Bifferential Level Hz db dB dB dB Fen ag Gamm Zem 14 If the White Noise Level goes down to 40dB and the over LED is lighted up this means the calibration has failed at this time and the DNM received the sound too loud please check e s The sound of loudspeaker is too loud e s the distance too close between DNM and loudspeaker e s the DNM damaged EN DNM2 fupe id Min i 1 cmm White Mois mm F Gain SEI Time Threshold 10ms em Mic Level Ben ETT VIENNE Output Lev el Differential Level Hz db dB dB dB EN E SE E34 15 After calibration finished DNM starts to work It increases the level of a
198. fier Line Leakage Error 85 4162 Evacuation Intput EO menea E 86 SKS Ateis Net Broke Fi ee 88 4 1 6 2 Fireman Microphone Erro EE 89 4 1 6 2 Viet rel TR EE 90 4162 User Define EITOLP ERE HIE TEE Up mI E NU D edes NH MN EIN IM UE 91 AROZ Remote Oflllnea ei ada ni nue 92 ALOS URGP Faull ono Modo dv nut obedit nM sore a om ntum dun Duda E sonde UU 93 4 L 02 Remote Eelere b ER ee ee 94 4 1 6 3 Procedure of Monitoring KC TT EE 95 4 1 6 4 Zone Neier 96 4 1 6 5 Normal Amplifier Monitoring I e eene 100 4 1 6 6 Backup Amplifier Monitoring I eee 102 4 1 6 7 Global LC d Tute EE 106 4 1 6 8 Tone LE due CC See ee tr ere cee eee cree rere ec ee eee ee ee 107 4 1 7 Bypass Mode Paging 108 2 50 gb O KEE 109 494 iEvac adtdon MIDE sce reete DI ENSEM T GM DIESE 109 449 2 XXontact Outpub EE 110 4 2 Consoles and Accessories eeesseeseeeeeeenenn nnnm h manne nnm n ennt ares n usare nnus 111 4 2 1 a CIO Vh Enranlg A 4A AA A A 111 rs oad WO e I gaa TET EE 111 4 2 1 2 Configura e E 112 4 21 97 AR E te GE 116 AANS e i i Re 116 422113 Pront Pare lies eiim t oe dem EU Se eeu codex obtu es N EAE DE eM UE 117 42T Rear Panel t I ETT TU EN 117 DV ee eee Grete I M 120 NAME EM e CT M EE 120 CLAN MM Pront Pane l EE ru
199. following checks o Check if amplifier is power on or not o Check if the gain of amplifier is set to O if it is set to a suitable value o Check if the wires between amplifier and IDA8 are good connection If all check passed but still get a amplifier fail fault change amplifier 4 1 6 6 Backup Amplifier Monitoring Settings First in Ateis Studio right click on IDA8C S block in Devices window 2012 ATEIS Product Features 103 Ai A1 CH A AZ CH aA AD Ca H1 H1 DH S z RE Ha H3 D B4 B4 D4 oy MA MA Het Part Bi POG 4 ET POG 2 GC ei PIX gt POG 3 PIX A Windows Monitor Matrix Mode IDA8C S X opened select page Backup Amplifier Settings M Ivonitorilvlatrix Mode IDASC 1 Zone Monitor Normal Amplifier Monitor B Unloaded Reference Full Loaded Reference Tolerance Global Settings Zone Settings Normal Amplifier Settings Backup Amplifier Settings Tone Settings Backup 1 Line 1 zet Reference Reset Reference Backup 1 Line 2 i e Ref Backup 1 Line 3 Backup 1 Line 4 Backup 2 Line 1 Backup 2 Line 2 Backup 2 Line 3 Backup 2 Line 4 E Amplifier Amount 4k 4k Ak 46 4k 4k GF AF e Amplifier Indicate which backup amplifier will be monitored e Line Indicate which zone and backup amplifier combination will be monitored e Tolerance To determine the boundary of fault detection for selected zone The
200. g Priority of the zone is higher than other sources Green Permanent D Hold Indicator The zone only desired for paging is not using by other sources These LEDs Indicate which keys are selected 2012 ATEIS 174 4 2 8 3 Ateis Studio 6 Monitoring Speaker This embedded speaker to play chime when paging or monitor signal from audio processor it needs to work with rs485 output component to get audio signal from other DSP components in audio processor 7 Fireman Microphone Connector DIN Connector for fireman microphone connection 8 All Call Release Button This button is used to select or deselect all keys 9 All Call Release Indicator This indicator lights up if all keys are selected 10 Event Select Key These buttons are used to select keys each key may link to an event for triggering actions like paging or adjust the value of parameters 11 Power Indicator This LED light up when the CD8 is powered on 12 Evacuation Indicator Light up when system is under evacuation paging 13 Fault Indicator To display fault status of system Following table list the states of fault Status Frequency Act 1 There are faults in audio processor Blinking w w Lost communication with audio processor Characteristics Case Dimension 320mm W x 190mm H x 130mm D Weight 3 6Kg Color RAL 035 n Power Current Consumption DC Input 18V 26V Typical 24V 120mA e Microphone Outp
201. g global parameters e Delete To remove a item e Item Index of the item e Label Display text for the item e Control Type To specify which type of global parameter is going to control Available types list below o Preset Selector To change master sub presets e Assign Right To specify the item is belong to first layer or protected layer e Assigned Indicate the number of presets are selected for change There is an ellipsis button on the right of grid cell click it to open the window for preset selection O 2012 ATEIS Product Features 165 e Preset Selector Master preset Sub preset Master Preset Master Preset Sub Preset Check all Uncheck All OK Cancel o Check boxes for selection of master sub presets to be linked to the item o Check All button to select all master sub presets o Uncheck All button to de select all master sub presets o OK button to confirm settings and close window o Cancel to discard the modification of settings and close window URC AS Settings Sub preset and Parameters Tab Sub preset and Parameters Element Control list Add Delete Label Control Type Assign Right A 1 SP Sel Sub preset Selector First Layer 1 2 Level Element Control range First Layer 1 3 Mute Element Control list or button First Layer 1 This page is settings about sub preset and parameter control using items in URC AS e Function Combo Box To specify which function for controll
202. gers a master preset change event it send state number to event then change to the master preset linked to the state r Event Creation Value 7 Event 4 Value Trigger 2 Integration Select Zone Name Event 6 States Count 3 Type Master Preset Change m Click button Add to create a new event a second window open to query you which kind of event is desired Select item Master Preset Change on Type combo box Then press button OK Event Settings Click field Content of event manager window to open settings window of the event Master Presetl Master Presetz e No Indicate state No e Master Preset O 2012 ATEIS 22 Ateis Studio Specify which master preset links to the state e Open Open settings window of the master preset 5 3 Sub Preset Change Evnet ve Description This event is used to change sub preset of Ateis devices Each state can be linked to a sub preset When a source triggers a sub preset change event it send state number to event then change to the sub preset linked to the state r Event Creation Event 3 t New Event Even Event Event Name Event 7 States Count 3 Type Sub Preset Change w OK gt lt Cancel Click button Add to create a new event a second window open to query you which kind of event is desired Select item Sub Preset Change on Type combo box Then press button OK Event Settings Click field Content of event man
203. h specific solutions and cutting edge technology You can rest assured that our technology is always cutting edge with a view to the future e ATEIS Vertical Markets Transportation Railways Subways Airports High rise buildings 2012 ATEIS Introduction 11 Hotels Restaurants Shopping malls Theme parks Places of worship Stadia Museums Industrial University and campus applications O 2012 ATEIS 12 Ateis Studio 1 3 EC Declaration of Conformity Documentation CE marking This needs to be added to each commercial technical document T EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Ateis as manufacturer having sole responsibility hereby declares that our delivered version of the following product complies with the applicable directives In case of alterations of the product not agreed upon by Ateis this declaration is no longer valid EN54 16 2008 Voice Alarm Control and Indicating Equipment VACIE Product IDA8 System VACIE Certified options Audible warning Manual reset of the voice alarm condition Voice alarm condition output Indication of faults related to the transmission path of the CIE Indication of faults related to voice alarm zones Voice alarm manual control Interface to external control device s Emergency microphones Redundant amplifiers Ancillary functions Commercial paging Backgroud music distribution Audio and data networking O 2012 ATEIS Safety Declart
204. haining of up to 300 m on a simple CAT5 cable and yet makes outlets easy to connect via a standard RJ45 connector 2012 ATEIS 170 Ateis Studio 4 2 7 2 Control Panel i x ATE S CD TOUCH PAGING CONSOLE A FIRE MIC 1 Fireman Microphone Hook An U shape hook to place fireman microphone 2 Microphone Not used 3 Power Indicator This LED light up when the CD Touch is powered on 4 Fault Indicator To display fault status of system Following table list the states of fault Activit Permanent v There are faults in audio processor Blinking Lost communication with audio processor 5 Evacuation Indicator Light up when system is under evacuation paging 6 Monitoring Speaker This embedded speaker to play chime when paging or monitor signal from audio processor it needs to work with rs485 output component to get audio signal from other DSP components in audio processor 7 Fireman Microphone Connector DIN Connector for fireman microphone connection 8 Left Button 2012 ATEIS Product Features 171 No function for the moment 9 Middle Button No function for the moment 10 Right Button No function for the moment 11 Touch Screen A back lit touch screen with 5 diagonal and 800 x 480 resolution contains 14 pages 12 keys for each pages can freely config to paging or adjustment parameters in audio processor 4 2 7 3 Characteristics d Case Dimension 400mm W x 210mm H x 130mm
205. hase e Release Time Sets the time it takes to release gain reduction The release phase is the period when the compressor is increasing gain to the level determined by the ratio or to zero dB once the level has fallen below the threshold e Gain Reduction Reflects the current amount of gain reduction ge Graphical Control Window EN GPC Compressor e Axis o X Input signal level dB 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 36 o Y Output signal level dB e Control Points o Blue Adjust Threshold o Red Adjust Threshold Range o Yellow Adjust Ratio Application Engineers wishing to achieve dynamic range reduction with few obvious effects might choose a relatively low threshold and low compression ratio so that the source material is being compressed very slightly most of the time To deliberately soften the attack of a snare drum they might choose a fast attack time and a moderately fast release time combined with a higher threshold To accentuate the attack of the snare they might choose a slower attack time to avoid affecting the initial transient 6 4 4 Comp limiter Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component ER Delay Advanced e H Delay Basic EE Dynamic wx Auto Noise Gain A N G EH Compressor essor Stereo Mg EL Ducker Stereo HH Expander RPA Expander Stereo amp ca oam m nodum mm nm Component Appearance ve Descrip
206. he OdBu of output Sensitivity of Input A channel 2 54dB Card Input A NE 7E Fe JJ 54dB JJ 0dB 0dB 4d J 0dB 2012 ATEIS eo Ateis Studio e Maximum level 14 dBu e Input Impedance 10k Ohm e THD N Total Harmonic Distortion plus Noise Sensitivity Minimum Maximum Unit Frequency _ 0 04 20 20kHz 4dBu 12dBu 20 20kHz 2dBu 20 20kHz Q 30dBu 20 20kHz 44dBu 40dBu 54dBu e Bandwidth 20Hz 20kHz Unit ee EE WEE EE E RE 24du OH ENEE E a E 006 di 9e 09 Lo S a a 4 PDC e Maximum Output Level 10 dBu e Output Impedance 300 Ohm e THD 1kHz at output lt 0 02 e Bandwidth 3dB at output 20Hz 20kHz e Noise 22Hz 22kHz 85dBu e Maximum Input Level 16 dBu e Input Impedance 11k Ohm e THD 1kHz at input lt 0 02 e Bandwidth 3dB at input lt 20Hz 22kHz e RS232 voltages 6 5 6 5 Evacuation Inputs Contact Mode e Bias voltage __item TTT Minimum Maximum Unit Vvotae o 5 jf DC e Monitoring resistor 4 7k Ohm Evacuation Inputs Voltage Mode On Voltage Item Minimum Maximum Unt Voltage 18 72 NR ve Contact Outputs EVAC Fault State Outputs Voltage Cument o Working Temperature 2012 ATEIS Product Features ELM e 0 C 40 C 4 1 4 5 3rd Party Control The table list 3rd l t scion Con
207. he channel e RTO Indicates an input channel Routed To Output s e Overload O 2012 ATEIS aa Ateis Studio This LED light up if the signal of input channel greater than Overload Thd e Volume Meter showing the channel RMS level e Signal Indicates audio signal presence above 30 dB from chosen Sensitivity e Level Signal output level of the channel Overload Thd A threshold value to determine signal of a channel is overload or not 6 22 2 RS485 Output Component Template Main DSP Components Er d DSP Component H JP Page Control o ER Recorder EE RB485 Audio ere Selector ee Signal Monitor eg a Telephone Card S Voxnet Control GJ Custom Component Device ModuldDAsc Component Appearance ve Description This component control the RS485 output signals parameters and monitor it The output component represent the physical analogue inputs accessible on the 485 port of the Audio Processor There are A D four ports represent for different channel of 485 port Some consoles like PSS AS it transfer audio signal va PDC port which is RS485 interface To output audio signal va RS485 port you need to create RS485 output component in design window 4 Control Window 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor a35 oy alume Ou thd dB Element Properties wme 299 299 299 91 38
208. he device is ready for using O 2012 ATEIS 268 Ateis Studio 5 4 4 5 4 5 Device Management Ateis Nets E Disconnect Ateis Tee IF ECS 1 EC 192 168 100 7 I Ateis Message Store ECS 1 ce 5 192 168 100 6 wee elephone Card Se Compatible Version Current 1 0 0 25 2 0 1 1 2 0 0 0 2 0 0 11 Telephone Card 1 0 0 1 Ateis Net Deploying This function allow user to config networking state of devices on Ateis Net When dewces is first time setup it need to assign an identification for each device so you need to do a config ip for it Follow the step listed below 1 Open Device Management Window 2 Search and Connect to the device 3 Click ATEIS NET Deploying to execute the procedure Remote Plugin This function to register remotes to audio processor When the remote is first time use you need to do a Remote Plug in to make audio processor know it Follow the steps listed below 1 Open Device Management Window 2 Search and Connect to the device 3 Click Remote Plug in to open settings window O 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 269 1 PM AG Only PSS AS Refresh Plug In e D The internal identification for each remote devices Remote Type To specify which type of remote device belong to the ID e SN Input serial number for the remote device e Version The version of remote device RS485 Channel On left bottom
209. he signal when AGC is no longer working This value is ignored if the Release button is not pushed A A short time will give an uncomfortable hearing with audio slack between the speaker s words e Sampling Time Average time needed by measurement input level A A too long time will cause the AGC become insensitive on short peaks e Level Level of the gain that AGC increase or decrease the input signal Example As example we want to automatically adjust the gain of a kind of vocal microphone Threshold Set at 25dB The level is adjusted only when the input signal is above 25dB This is to keep a natural dynamic 2012 ATEIS 290 Ateis Studio e Target level We want a final target level at 10dB e Maximum gain Set at 10dB because giving more gain will generate some uncomfortable level differences e Release time Set at 800 ms enough time to avoid hard transition when the speaker talks again after a little break e Attack time Set at 50 ms enough time to avoid hard transition when the speaker begin to talks and not too long because we want a stable level quickly not since the middle of the sentence AVG time Set at 200 ms not too long to detect short peaks in the speech and to be responsive Not too short to avoid level change too often You can see on the vu meter that when the speaker talks at 18 3 dBu the final level is around 10 5 dBu RMS uv meter AGC In AGC Out You
210. hich is connect to 24V DC Output of audio processor There are two connectors of this input e PRI 24V DC power input from primary audio processor e SEC 24V DC power input from secondary audio processor 15 Configurable Audio I O There are two ports A B for configurable audio I O each port contains four channels each channel consist of three connectors where postfix N is the number of channel e P_CH_N Connect to configurable audio I O connector of primary audio processor e CH N Connect to audio In Out equipment e S CH N Connect to configurable audio I O connector of secondary audio processor 4 2 1 5 RU CTL 4 2 1 5 1 Overview RU PDC Primary IDA8C sengen Secondary IDA8C t ag Active Control Input 24VDC Input Output Contact x 8 Evacuation Input x 9 Output Contact x 8 Evacuation Input x 9 Pd e Output Contact x 8 Active Control Output Evacuation Input x 8 RU MAIN RU for next IDA8 O 2012 ATEIS 124 Ateis Studio RU CTL is a device for audio processor redundancy the peripherals are connected with RU CTL not directly to audio processor RU CTL is in charge of switching primary and secondary audio processor to active one of them If primary audio processor is active all signal of peripherals are redirect to primary audio processor by RU CTL RU CTL monitor the status of the other RUs for switching active audio processor 4 2 1 5 2 Front Panel 1
211. hold dB e Volume Meter showing the channel level e Mute Mutes or un mutes the output channel LED lit red with channel muted e Signal To indicate the channel is active or not 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor as e Level Signal output level of the module e Overload thd Sets the threshold of the overload indicator 6 19 4 Stereo Output Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component EMET Output E Stereo Output A E Stereo Output B le Stereo Output C g Stereo Output D A El Duplex Output B i el Duplex Output D E 9 Page Control H Recorder Device Modul op Component Appearance Description For AES EBU output the stereo output modules represent the outputs accessible on the rear panel of the device There are several separate modules for use with each of the audio board Input and output modules are added automatically to the DSP window of the relevant processor by defining their module configuration at the time you create them and should not be altered r Control Window O 2012 ATEIS ate Ateis Studio SCH RY Stereo reo Output A 4 a4 Valu me Ou Element Properties Overload r j j Voume 500 500 200 01 dBu ute of o Lo LLL Signal J Of J Led 0 200 200 01 dB Ovetoadthd LL 30 200 200 01 dB ve
212. ible go to step 11 11 Create a New file Create a new file by clicking the button on left top of Ateis Studio marked as red rectangle me Ateis Studio File Edit View Geometry BR Pix Pixe T 12 Create a IDA8C block in device editor window Drag the row in Device Management window and drop it in device editor window 2012 ATEIS Quick Start 25 Component Operation Tools Window Help RR E Q Q 100 System Master Preset s s mm NlABH E amp m Bm NEM EC bert a Wm ox foo bo be lo Wo perty H Main Device Management d x 3rd Party Control Command ord Party Control List Dewes J ne Ateset SerialNumber Address Devices Ateis Nets Ateis IDASC 1 D 241 192 168 100 79 Ateis ECS 1 2 148 192 168 100 11 Ateis A Y A window Set Audio Module opened click button Create 2012 ATEIS Ateis Studio Set Audio Module Audio Module A Amount of Zone Board Module Type of Monitor Module Matrix Site Pin Network Pin Then a IDA8C block is created for further configuration Operation Tools Window Help BR d E Q 10096 V i System IDABC 1 Master Preset Ma BO AE imo 7 H 88 HL iz a l i Ei ge d A at tie lt S x T hoe o l j o ol EE 13 Add Tone component and connect to Output component Double
213. icate if primary audio processor is active 10 P WD Primary Watching Dog RU devices monitor this logic signal for determining active audio processor please refer to item O 2012 ATEIS me Ateis Studio 4 2 2 4 2 2 1 4 2 2 2 S WD Secondary Watching Dog 11 Master Slave Switch A dip switch to set RU PDC be master or slave The difference between master and slave please refer to item S WD Secondary Watching Dog DNM Overview The DNM assures the omnidirectional sound recording and preamplification of the surrounding background noise The 0 dB modulation is sent through the Audio Processor in order to provide the automatic gain control feature of the DNM component and allows the level adjustment where the DNM is implemented Any situation in which the volume of loudspeakers need to be adjusted automatically depending on the background noise ex station Airport MRT etc Installation Install the DNM dewce to the position in which you want the DNM to sense background noise and adjust loudspeaker volume automatically and connect the DNM device with Audio Processor by RS485 or Ethernet besides if the system needs to connect to a series of DNM on same RS485 port then the user should plug in the DNM dewces one by one before connecting a series DNM to RS485 port How to connect is described in the Configuration section One DNM can only support one Zone like IDA8 Zone Channel Generally place the DNM in fro
214. icate the channel is active or not 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor am e Level Signal output level of the module e Overload thd Sets the threshold of the overload indicator 6 19 2 Monitor Output Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component GES Output o dE Output A inn IE Output H e Sg El Monitor Output C 7 4X E Monitor Output D E Mono Output A E Mono Output B E Mono Output C e Mono Output D Device MacdulelD sc Component Appearance Description The monitor output modules represent the amplifier zone output accessible on the rear panel of the device There are 2 separate modules for use with each of the zone board 1 2 Analogue input and output modules are added automatically to the DSP window of the relevant processor by defining their module configuration at the time you create them and should not be altered r Control Window O 2012 ATEIS n Ateis Studio PAM Monitor Ont c 4 a4 Valu me Ou Element Properties Overload r j j Voume 500 500 200 01 dBu ute of o Lo LLL Signal J Of J Led 0 200 200 01 dB Ovetoadthd LL 30 200 200 01 dB ve Element Description e Overload Indicates channel level above chosen Overload Threshold dB e Volume Meter showing the channel level e Mute Mutes or un
215. ing going to be created The available functions list below o Sub Preset Selector To change sub preset o Element Control Range To control element with range type value For example Level in Input component with min 90 dB and max 20 dB is a range type of element o Element Control List or Button To control element with list or boolean type value For example Mute in Input component with states On Off is a button type of element e Add To add an item for controlling sub presets or elements e Delete To remove selected items in the list O 2012 ATEIS 166 Ateis Studio e tem Index of the item Label The display text of the item Control Type The type of item refer to prior section Function Combo Box for more details e Assign Right To specify the item is belong to first layer or protected layer e Assigned Indicate how many controlled target linked to the item for example if a item controls 4 channels of Mute simultaneously the value Assigned will be 4 URC AS Settings Preset Parameters Tab Preset Parameters Properties P P Push Push to enter First Layer Note Hold exit and back and push push knob to enter Protected Layer Oo Constant Mode Advertisement Mode Waiting Time This page is settings about behavor of menu changing e P P to enter First Layer If this option is enabled Double clicks to enter first layer menu is required e Constant Mode There are two pict
216. io coming from amplifier Backup Amplifier I Os Two backup amplifier connectors included 0 dB to amplifiers and 100V return from amplifiers Amplifier Zone Outputs 8 Zone OdB output to amplifiers Bypass Mode Outputs This port to share the bypass mode microphone signals through the IDA8C IDA8S network only needed when using fiber optic network PDC Peripherals Device Controller Connectors Two RJ 45 connectors to connect consoles or peripheral devices For examples PSS AS URC AS PPM AS are connect to IDA8S va this connector o Local Ateis Net Connectors Optional card to build a local dedicated IDA8C IDA8S network ap Configurable Audio I Os Two configurable OdB audio I O port A and B Each port is available to assemble an audio card There are 4 channels on each audio I O card Contact Outputs 2012 ATEIS 58 Ateis Studio 8 logic outputs channels to close open circuit for an external device this contact is normally open Evacuation Inputs 9 evacuation contact inputs that allow the monitoring of external contact They also can be used in UGA mode trigger by a voltage polarization change WU 24V DC Output This connector supplies a 24VDC source W 24V DC Input Main 24VDC power supply connector 4 1 4 4 Characteristics Case e Dimension 436mm W x 285mm L x 44mm H e Weight 4 2Kg e Color RAL 016 r Power __ tem__ ___Voltage ___ Current Consumption Comm
217. io working along In offline state you can modify the configuration file r Audio Enable wl Enable audio of ateis devices 4 Audio Disable gr Disable audio of ateis devices Window Clase All UI Preset 1 Devices 2 IDA8C DSP Configuration IDASC 1 O 2012 ATEIS System Functionality omm In this topic you will find tools to re arrange windows or find hidden opened windows Close X Close the opened active window d Close All Close all the opened windows Ul Preset The UI Presets are pre defined windows positioning e m Lost By default the UI Preset I m Lost is available it allows coming back in the default standard windows positioning r Active Windows Close All UI Preset 1 Devices 2 IDA8C DSP Configuration IDASC 1 O 2012 ATEIS 238 Ateis Studio In the bottom of the window menu you will find all the opened windows of your project By selecting of the windows in the list the window will comes on the first displaying level 5 1 13 Help ge About Open the About window ga Version Open the Version window This show compatible firmware version of devices that Ateis Studio support VN Version Version 5 1 14 Component Template In the configuration file of Ateis Studio you can create a lot of objects to make up an system for the application Each object works different jobs and you need to create it in design window to make it working Compone
218. ion 2 Safety Declartion Warning This sign indicates a potentially hazardous situation that can result in death or serious personal injury ve Do not expose the device to extreme temperatures direct sunlight humidity or dust which could cause fire or electrical shock hazard Keep away water or other liquids from the device Otherwise fire or electrical shock may result ge Connect the power cord only to an AC outlet of the type stated in this Owner s Manual or as marked on the unit Otherwise fire and electrical shock hazard results e When disconnecting the power cord from an AC outlet always grab the plug Never pull the cord A damaged power cord is a potential risk of fire and electrical shock hazard ve Avoid touching power plugs with wet hands Doing so is a potential electrical shock hazard Take care for correct polarity when operating the device from a DC power source Reversed polarity may cause damage to the unit or the batteries Avoid placing heaw objects on power cords A damaged power cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard Do not cut scratch bend twist pull or heat the power cord A damaged power cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard Ask your ATEIS dealer for replacement s Turn off immediately the unit remove the power cord from the AC outlet and consult your ATEIS dealer in any of the following circumstances e Smoke odor or noise getting out of the unit e Foreign objects o
219. ion Activation Activation Activation Activation Activation Activation Activation Activation Activation Activation Activation Activation Activation Activation Activation Activation Zone and Priority Zone and Prioirty Zone and Prioirty Zone and Prioirty Zone and Prioirty Zone and Prioirty Zone and Prioirty Zone and Prioirty Zone and Prioirty Fone and Prioirty Fone and Prioirty Zone and Prioirty fone and Prioirty Zone and Prioirty Zone and Prioirty Zone and Prioirty Zone and Prioirty shows this state on front panel LED GLOBAL EVAC Also this activity will be logged Modbus Type Set the type information of paging source for 3rd party controller which use modbus protocol to get date from Ateis devices Note This setting is only a label not affect behavior of Paging Component Modbus Channel Set the channel information of paging source for 3rd party controller which use modbus protocol to get date from Ateis devices Note This setting is only a label not affect behavior of Paging Component Activation Click the button on grid to open window for detail settings O 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 425 Permanent Attack time ms Modulation Release time ms Logic Signal Logic Signal Modulation Logic Signal Paging Event Operation There are various mode for triggering a paging activity o None The paging request is not coming from the Network Paging comp
220. ipsis button next to Master Preset combo box The Presets window opens Select the Sub Presets tab 2012 ATEIS System Functionality ome Master Preset Combo Box By clicking this combo box you can switch to desired master preset and then edit sub preset settings belonging to it e Sub Preset Name of the sub preset Linked Elements Open the window containing the table of elements controlled by sub preset see later section Table of linked elements for more detail e Save Save value of linked elements to sub preset Those values are kept in the memory storage in the sub preset e Load Load values from the storage of sub preset and set to linked elements e Add Add a sub preset e Remove Remove a sub preset Assign an element to be controlled by sub presets Click right on the element of the component you want to control and select your sub preset 2012 ATEIS 250 Ateis Studio External Control Third Party Control ol Sub Preset Control Sub Preset 1 URC r Table of linked elements Sin Parameters IDASC 1 Master Preset Sub Preset AGC on Im Im Im AGC 31 0 his table list all elements controlled by the sub preset on the right there is a small panel embedded a graphic control for adjusting the stored value in sub preset Each field is described in below sections e Device Indicate the device containing the linked element e Component In
221. ipsis cell in grid you can open the dsp design window of the preset WS Presets ECS 1 e Sub Preset Open the settings window of sub preset which is belong to the master preset e Add To create a new master preset 2012 ATEIS 248 Ateis Studio e Remove To remove selected master preset Master Preset Switching There is always only one master preset active at the same time When you re designing a system change master to the preset you want to edit At run time change master preset to make Ateis device working on different DSP design belong to the master preset Click combo box Master Preset to switch master preset System ECS1 7 Master Preset Master Presetl 5 2 3 Sub Presets EN Delay Advanced 5 Type l F ng P i m EE PH M The sub Preset function allows storing values of different component elements volume gain frequency mute etc in one Sub Preset By loading a Sub Preset all the elements associated will take the predefined values The Sub Presets are different in each Master Presets and of course in each System Device The idea is to create a Sub Preset define which element of which component you want to associate with the Sub Preset then to set this element to their target values and then to memorize that in the Sup Preset Sub Preset Management On the main window top click on the ell
222. iption 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor a5 This component is an bridge between Ateis device and Voxnet devices It map the key in voxnet protocol to the code in event for paging control amp Settings Window VN Vox Net cH co Paging Event 1 fee IP 127 0 0 1 Assign from another a h D sj C tn LJ bh Zu oN To bk OH There are two channels for paging with voxnet source each source with the following settings e Paging Event opecify the paging event to bind with the voxnet source for paging e Key Represent the key of voxnet protocol e Value To specify the code mapped to the key each code represent a zone select combination for paging e All Select all zones e Zone Selection Click the check box inside the grid on right side of window to select zone to be paged 7 Contact Infomation http www ateis com Address Sydneystraat 42 2012 ATEIS a Ateis Studio 3047BP ROTTERDAM NETHERLANDS Phone 31 0 10 2088690 Fax 31 0 10 2088699 Address Chemin du D vent 1024 Ecublens Switzerland Telephone 41 0 21 881 25 10 Fax 41 0 21 881 25 09 Address Light Industrial Unit 11 Dubai Silicon Oasis Dubai United Arab Emirates Telephone 971 4 3262730 Fax 9714 4 3262731 Address 34 avenue de l Europe Z A Font Ratel 38640 CLAIX FRANCE T l 33 0 4 76 99 26 30 Fax 33 0 4 76 99 26 31 Geschaftsfuhrung A
223. irement O 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 273 4 User Account It allow you to create or remove users for controlling system For each user you can set it s user level by defaut or create a new level for customized privlege combination On left bottom there is a check box Active to enable or disable user management for the configuration file 5 6 2 User Levels An user level is a combination of user privileges where a privilege is the right for executing some specific action There are four default user levels to meet most applications with authority requirement Click page Level to edit user levels Levels Level Name Administrator v v v Power User wf wf wf v User CH v x v Di operator CH v i v v X 4 b Active Create Delete ve On top of window there is a grid list all user levels including four default ones Each column represent an action authority Followings are description for each authority e File The right of opening configuration files e User Manager The right of edit user accounts and user levels System Select all authorities inside system System Connect The right of connecting to Ateis devices System Store The right of storing configuration to Ateis devices System Reverse The right of reversing configuration to Ateis Studio from devices e System Update 2012 ATEIS 274 Ateis Studio The right of updating firmware of Ateis devices e System Para
224. is increasing Fast Increase Zone Indicates that the AGC gain is increasing fast Sensing Mic Level Show the input level of the sensing microphone C Sensing Mic Level Show the input level of the sensing microphone through the internal calibration transfer function Output Level Show the output level Differential Level Difference between the Output level and C Sensing Mic level Procedure to set the A N G 1 Connect the sensing microphone to the S M input and the paging audio source to the P M input The NSM sensing microphone needs an input sensitivity of OdB software The max cable length between the NSM and the audio processor is 500 meter with CAT 5 cable Link the output of the ANG component to an Output component where is connected a loudspeaker Click on the Calibrate button to start the calibration procedure The system will start to estimate the acoustic transfer function between loudspeakers and microphone when user clicks the Calibration button and it will automatically stop calibrating until the system find a better transfer function The calibration red led light up means the calibration procedure is running During the procedure don t move the physical installation and don t make punctual noise The calibration must be done in normal ambient conditions Wait until the end of the calibration The red calibration led light off and the green calibration led light up O 2012 ATEIS Componen
225. iting window Double click the device DNM component to open a window and Link device DNM component with DSP DNM component Component ORM 1 8 Store Online Calibrate two DNMs by each Please refer to preview topic Configuration for calibration procedure 2012 ATEIS Product Features 141 4 2 3 4 2 3 1 wm 0 PPM AS Overview Hmm Ee Elm gt Hm Hmm Unidirectional Condenser Addressable Microphone compatible with all system units PPM AS uses an RS485 protocol over a single CAT5 cable connection to transport both Audio and Power from the PPM AS to the system units The PPM AS comprises of 8 zones 8 buttons with sleek condenser gooseneck microphone and spring metal protection providing durability and excellent aesthetics as well as allowing up to 256 zones expansion va the additional keypad easy extension station The buttons can represent a single zone or a group of zones and are easily defined via the GUI of the system units using a simple Matrix selection The unit offers Hold and Busy LED signals in addition to the zone LED s and these allow the easy identification of selection Busy signals for the user All buttons can be programmed with drag amp drop features from the System unit GUI software and each button can be programmed for Push To Talk or Latch functionality The unidirectional condenser microphone warrants high quality directive signal
226. ive open e Mute Mute the Gate Voice s module e Bypass owitch off the Gate Voice s operation e Thd The threshold to determine to pass input signal Hold Time Time to close the output when no more human speech is detected e Release Time Adjust the fade out time of the signal to decrease the signal after the hold time 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 323 e Voice Recognition 6 4 8 4 Gate with Sidechain Component Template Main DSP Components EE DSP Component ER Delay Advanced o ER Delay Basic EHE Dynamic La AGC Stereo FA auto Noise Gain A N G HH Compressor ran Compressor Stereo 3 HH Expander Stereo BB Gate 01 Ld Gate Mono L Gate Stereo ra Gate Voice Gate With Sidechain Component Appearance Description With this gate you can control a gate on an audio channel I with an external Sidechain signal S When the Sidechain input S input goes above the threshold the gate becomes active and the signal on Input I goes to the output O 2012 ATEIS 324 Ateis Studio Ermmm A U threshold ETTET 12 e m Pe CEELI TT response attack hold r Control Window M Crate Voice mee em mee ees og in cadis im Vi s Rec Slide ri Element Properties Name Initial Minimum Maximum Precision Unit Mute Of Bypass Of
227. l amplifier or not e Full Loaded Reference Display the value of full loaded reference which is the gain of amplifier when there is full load to the zone This value use to determine if there is a fault of normal amplifier or not e Measure Display the value of measured which is the gain of amplifier O 2012 ATEIS 12 Ateis Studio Faults e Amplifier Gain Too High If Measure gt Unloaded Reference x 100 Tolerance an Amplifier Gain Too High fault is recognized once this fault is happen do the following checks o Make sure there is good connection between speaker and IDA8C S o Ensure the speaker is a good one o Check gain of amplifier maybe the value is changed after get reference If all check passed but still get a amplifier too high fault change amplifier e Amplifier Gain Too Low If Measure lt Full Unloaded Reference x 10096 Tolerance an Amplifier Gain Too Low fault is recognized once this fault is happen do the following checks o Check if the signal goes into amplifier is too large some amplifier has an indicator Overload you can check this indicator o Check if speaker is good or damaged If all check passed but still get a amplifier too low fault change amplifier If this fault generated after speaker configuration changed you can do a get reference again to get new values for reference e Amplifier Fail Measure Unloaded Reference 10 once this fault is happen do the
228. last opened file e Close Ei Close the opened files O 2012 ATEIS 22 Ateis Studio 5 1 6 Edit lE SelectAll Select e Select All EI o Select all the components and wires e Select ES Select All geleet HI Select All DSP Components Select All Connectors e Select All DSP Components tit o Select all DSP components in the graphic editor e Select All Connectors 5 o Select all wires in the graphic editor 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 221 5 1 7 View Main Compile Resource Object Tree Layers ao Bird s Eye Properties PPM AS Manager E d EN Message Library P 3rd Party Control List 3rd Party Control Command Wl ME Device Management Logo Library User Management Each item in the View menu can open a specific window to do settings modification or management of devices Main db Open the window of Component Template which contains various type of devices and DSP components for designing the system e Compile Open the compiler window and compile the current configuration e Resource Open the window of Resource Manager to manage resource files in the software e Object Tree S Open the window of Object Tree to see the whole structure of the configuration file e Layers Open the window of Layer Manager to manage the graphical layers for objects e Bird s Eye Open the window of Bird s Eye to have a overview of graphical objects O 2012 ATEIS
229. lement of Tone Generator e Level dB 10 e Tone Button On e Tone freq Hz 2 00k 2012 ATEIS Quick ge 25 thd dB Now you should see channel 1 meter as figure shown and hear a 2k tone from speaker connect to Amplifier Zone Output zone1 on rear panel of IDA8C 4 Product Features 4 1 IDA8 Series Audio Processor The IDA8 is a third generation modular system that complies with current architectural demands requiring IP and or Fiberoptics Networking to cover for any complex design possible IDA8 responds to Public Address and Voice Alarm requirements as stated in EN 54 16 ISO 7240 16 and BS 5839 8 with specific attributes for compliance in large installations O 2012 ATEIS am Ateis Studio 4 1 1 IDA8C 4 1 1 1 Overview CD 16 Fire Panel T Global Network Microphone IN 1 BGM CD Player IDA amp C edundancy st WWW M M M 7 Network ATEIS NET Ki LOL Ki EC E Redundancy Speaker Line A B IDAB8SX Zone 1A 1B Local one d WN Backup SN z Amplifier S x2 m n CH cc O o ZS E Zone e MS 2 IDA8SX i o 3 CH 5 Zone 8A Amplifier S E B Zone 8B 0 E 3 S amp indu eur euoudaja L IDA8C Controller unit enables operators to see a detailed overview of the operational status of the entire PA system with a single push button IDA8C Controlle
230. lue of Measure ohm is greater than Reference A amp B ohm Tolerance 96 or value of Measure ohm is less than Reference A amp B ohm Tolerance 96 this fault can be recognized by IDA8C S In the field of Diff shows the percentage of difference in above figure the difference percentage of zone 4 is 78 24 which is great than the tolerance 15 a Line A B bad impedance is recognized e Line A B Short O 2012 ATEIS e Ateis Studio The voltage of pin is monitored by IDA8C S if the voltage is zero it means there is a short of circuit outside IDA8C S if this fault is detected the internal relay of zone will be open to stop audio signal output to speaker User need to do a Reset Monitoring described in preview part of this topic to switch the status back i e make audio output to speaker and enable monitoring of short again A string S C is showed in field Measure ohm Fault Indication e LED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S o Zone Fault LEDs on front panel of IDA8C S e Log o Line A B Open Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Line A Error where Line A can be Line B Z1 Line A OPEN where Z1 can be any zone Line A can be Line B Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio I Machine Fault Record x Description More Detail Line A monitor fault Zone 1 Line A OP
231. ment will be controllable by the event To do assignment right click on the desired element click popup menu by sequence Event gt Step Trigger gt XXX where XXX is the name of event The following figure is an example O 2012 ATEIS 258 Ateis Studio 2 External Control Third Party Control i Sub Preset Control URC AS Value Trigger Value Control 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 259 e State Pages There is a page for each state in step trigger event To switch states click the tab of desired state e Element Indicate which element of the component controlled by value trigger e Component Indicate which component of the device contains element prior mentioned e Device Indicate which device contains component prior mentioned e System Indicate which system contains device prior mentioned e Step Value Specify step value of the state e Modify Enable or disable selected element controlled by state of event e Remove Remove the element controlled by the event E This operation only remove the relation between element and event not delete element 5 3 5 Step Control Event Description This event is used to control the element value It adjust value of element by step when source triggers the event The source triggers event send the step value to event for adjusting elements r Event Creation Value Trigger Value Trigger z Select Zone AT ULESO
232. most not possible to have another amplifier fail Base on this concept IDA8 system provide a flexible mechanism of amplifier backup One backup amplifier can service multiple zones In preview figures it demonstrate how a backup amplifier work when normal amplifier of zone 2 is failure but the 2012 ATEIS Product Features 95 backup amplifier can serve for zone 1 to zone 4 actually The below figure shows the concept of that DSP processing for audio signal VN 3 1 Octave ET E 4 vice Pass Pass ET dh S1 S5 S6 ZONE2 E Aw nurs Share the Backup Amplifier PAN FAN In the figure Z1 Z4 represent the normal amplifier for Z1 Z4 B1 is backup amplifier S1 S4 are switches to select path of audio signal coming from DSP processing S5 S8 are switches to select path going to Line A B output B1 can service for zone1 to zone 4 by controlling switches S1 S8 In example amplifier Z2 is fail IDA8 control S6 and S2 to change audio path from normal amplifier Z2 to backup amplifier B1 The behavior of other channels are the same as channel2 A backup amplifier can t serve more than one zone at the same time In such limitation for example if amplifier Z3 is fail then there is no available amplifier for backup w Advance Backup Amplifier Setup O 2012 ATEIS There are more cost down solution of IDA8 backup amplifier setup It is possible to le
233. n Comment AC Input 100V 240V 1 2A 100V 0 5A 240V _Frequency 47Hz 63Hz DC Input 18V 26V Typical 24V 28 S DC Output 18V 26V Typical 24V SACO Cd AC Maximum Consumption 45 W Amplifier Zone Outputs e Maximum level 14 dB e Output Impedance 50 Ohm e THD N Total Harmonic Distortion plus Noise Sensitivity Minimum Maximum Unit Frequency 0 04 20 20kHz 4dBu 12dBu 20 20kHz 2dBu 40dBu 20 20kHzZz 30dBu 54dBu 0 20 20kHz 44dBu Unt _i Lo S 004 95 Lo 27 000 960 24dBu po OG HL 20 20K HZ 14 dB Lo 7 000 9 Door S 006 d 96 O 2012 ATEIS 52 Ateis Studio e Bandwidth 20Hz 20kHz e ElN Equivalent Input Noise Sensitivity Minimum Maximum Unit Frequency Odu tBu 20 20kHzQ1500 AMBu Too 93 abu 20 20kHzQ 1500 A0dBu 20 20kHz 150U 54dBu va Speaker line Amplifier o e 24dBu 20 20kHz 150U a 20 20kHz 150U e Maximum Power 100W RMS e Maximum Power Siren Message 1500W Configurable Audio Output e Maximum level 14 dBu e Output Impedance 50 Ohm e THD N Total Harmonic Distortion plus Noise Maximum Unit Frequency 20 20kHz 4dBu 12dBu 20 20kHz 2dBu 24dBu 20 20kHz Q 14dBu 40dBu 20 20kHz 30dBu 54dBu 20 20kHz Q A4dBu e Bandwidth 20Hz 20kHz e ElN Equivalent Input Noise Maximum
234. n e Min Gain The minimum level compensation e Max Gain The maximum level compensation e Sampling Time Determine the period time between two ambient noise measures The less value is more sensitivity it means the compensation gain of paging input is response more quickly of environment noise e White Noise Level White noise is used for calibration the level is automatically adjusted in calibration process e Noise Threshold The level of background noise measured when calibration button pressed e AGC Level Display the current compensation gain e Calibration Click on to start the automatic calibration procedure e Calibration Proceeding Red led light on if the calibration procedure is proceeding e Calibration Finish Green led light on if the calibration procedure is success e Over Indicates the calibration result The white noise level needed is over the range A pop up window will shows you what to do e Under Indicates the calibration result The white noise level needed is under the range A pop up window will show you what to do e Response Speed Select here the reaction speed of the A N G 2012 ATEIS 294 Ateis Studio That s means the speed to adapt the P M audio level depending of the ambient noise Paging Activity Light on when the paging is active Decrease Zone Indicates that the AGC gain is decreasing Dead Zone Indicates that the AGC is not changing Increase Zone Indicates that the AGC gain
235. nal coming from telephone company optional o Telephone Connector A connector for external telephone connection optional WU Contact Outputs 8 logic outputs channels to close open circuit for an external devce this contact is normally open W Evacuation Inputs 9 evacuation contact inputs that allow the monitoring of external contact They also can be used in UGA mode trigger by a voltage polarization change U 24V DC Output This connector supplies a 24VDC source WU 24V DC Input Main 24VDC power supply connector U AC Power Socket Main 110 240 V 1 2A 47 63Hz AC power input with fuse If 24V DC and AC power input at the same time IDA8C will use AC power and switch to DC power if there is no AC power input Fuse Rating 1 6A 4 1 2 4 Characteristics d Case e Dimension 436mm W x 289mm L x 88mm H e Weight 5Kg e Color RAL 016 n Power IT Itm TI Voltage Current Consumption Comment AC Input 100V 240V 1 2A 100V Frequency 47Hz 63Hz 0 5A 240V O 2012 ATEIS EA Ateis Studio e AC Maximum Consumption 45 W Amplifier Zone Outputs e Maximum level 14 dB e Output Impedance 50 Ohm e THD N Total Harmonic Distortion plus Noise EEN 004 BO te Abu i2dBu_ ____ _ 0 L ae 20 20kHz 2dBu 14dBu 30dBu 44dBu e Bandwidth 20Hz 20kHz e ElN Equivalent Input Noise OBu 8 dBu 20 20kHzQ 1500 2du LL 93 Bu 20 2
236. ne Leakage Impedancetohm Reference A ohm Reference B ohm Reference 4 amp 6 ohm Current Amp Measure ohm DIFF 95 18k or 20k Zone 10 00M 328 6 310 3 160 6 Normal Ap 160 5 0 078 EES 10 00M 314 3 357 8 167 1 Normal AMP 166 9 0 138 m 10 00M 345 3 328 0 169 0 Normal AMP 169 1 0 056 10 00M 335 9 326 7 165 5 Normal AMP 166 0 0 301 10 00m Normal AMP 10 00m Normal AMP 10 00m Normal AMP 10 00m Normal AMP D c Of R r M rs settings Zone settings Normal Settings eege settings Settings Terence Get Reference Reset Reference Get All References 25v z0 00y 15 Get Reference Reset Reference E 25MIT VI1DO0V 15 x Get Reference Reset Reference Reset Al References ZDMIZONTIDDNM 15 T Get Reference Reset Reference Reset Reference Reset Monitoring Get Reference Reset Reference ak dk ak 25v rov OOV 25V rov roov 25v 70 1004 25v rov 1004 Get Reference Reset Reference Get Reference Reset Reference li LIE abl dk dik dk de Get Reference Reset Reference There are fields of the grid e Leakage Impedance The impedance between LineA B signal and ground cause current to leak Reference A ohm Show the impedance value for reference get from Line A output Reference B ohm Show the impedance value for reference get from Line B output Reference A amp B ohm Show the impedance value for reference get from Line A amp B
237. nenneunenenenununennnennnnnnnnnnenesunnennnnnennnennnencnnnennunnnenneenunnnensnenensneenenenennnenenneennennennee 357 6 9 2 Mono X TI 360 6 9 3 Stereo INput 362 6 9 4 Duplex Input 364 693 Inverter EE 366 6 10 Level G ntrollar eei Ee 367 6 11 Local Echo Suppr SSO ieron 369 612 Be crane samenae danmarubncemadanstnasaaasebasmaananaisacaun 371 LSK WE 1 SE 371 SM PEZ P erlei ide E EU EE 372 6 12 3 Evacution Input A A A A A A 374 6124 Eyent sema a RES 375 6 12 4 1 IT T E E E E EG 376 6 12 5 Logic Control P 378 6 12 6 LOGIC Meter M R 379 6 12 7 LOGIC Net Input M 380 6 12 8 Wereilardgervi 381 6129 7 Te u NN tr 382 61210 OR NN c 382 6 12 11 Output M R 383 01212 SCPC i E UT t Lr 384 6 13 Meler eege 388 6131 Peaks RMS Wetter 4e do eue cece n doa eae rena ee puel uvae dea ata ado ceo n EG EO ee deo PER CU qs 388 6 14 Message 390 6 14 1 Message Player Senne 390 6 14 2 MM a 391 6 15 Netgen 392 6 15 1 JAUtoMIX EE 392 LOANS SPENT Cell 4 A ENLIIRCOLOIERSTEETLSIEUET 395 6153 T
238. ng Mic Level Show the input level of the sensing microphone through the internal calibration transfer function e Output Level Show the output level e Differential Level Difference between the Output level and C Sensing Mic level todo check with kevin O 2012 ATEIS sto Ateis Studio 6 4 6 Ducker Ducker Stereo Component Template Main DSP Components x gc DSP Component ER Delay Advanced e H Delay Basic J Dynamic gc L AGC Stereo ee Auto Noise Gain A N G et Compressor B Co een Steren Ho Ducker Stereo a ER Expander Nr Expander Steren e ca Gate Component Appearance Description The Ducker is a kind of sophisticated switch allowing to attenuate or switch off automatically the signal arriving in input A when a chosen level in dB is perceived in input S r Control Window ED Ducker il Thd dB Res spanse HI ck It SE R Se an Time Time jf Time I Time Depth ain ms tims mei f E ES IE zi Imt zi d sca n va Element Properties 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor att Name __Initial __ _Minimum_ Maximum _ Precision Unit Bypass Off Actie Of j Td 200 800 350 01 Response Time 100 410 500 10 Attack Time 50 410 4100 10 HoldTime 2000 4100 500 10 Release Time op
239. nnel to preamplifier e Phantom Power Applies 48 VDC phantom power to the channel input for use with condenser mikes e RTO Indicates an input channel Routed To Output s e Overload This LED light up if the signal of input channel greater than Overload Thd e Volume Meter showing the channel RMS level e Signal Indicates audio signal presence above 30 dB from chosen Sensitivity e Level Signal output level of the channel e Overload Thd A threshold value to determine signal of a channel is overload or not 2012 ATEIS 360 Ateis Studio 6 9 2 Mono Input Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component GJ Input iK Mono Input A E Mana Input B E Mono Input C E Mono Input D E Stereo Input A E Stereo Input B E Stereo Input C E Stereo Input D Device ModuldDASC Component Appearance Description For AES EBU input the elements inside the component is very similar as Input component except without Sensitivity and Phantom Power r Control Window 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor EN UN Mono mon a Ta COverlaad ature ag i Signal S verlaad Thea dB Element Properties EE E Voume 500 500 200 todo dB Signed Of L Le 0 60 200 01 dB OveloadThd 0 200 200 201 dB va Element Description e Bypass Bypass audio of the channel e Mute Mu
240. nt For some applications with low bandwidth or bad quality network we can set the timeout value to a large number because it may take more time to communicate with target devices 3 seconds is the default value and it is suitable for most cases e Success Set this field could show Success when the target device informs URC200 TPC the command String is transferred successfully This setting is optional if you need it please fill the value 06 OD e Fail Set this field could show Fail when the target device informs URC200 TPC the command string is transferred failed This setting is optional if you need it please fill the value 10 OD 2012 ATEIS 198 Ateis Studio 4 2 14 4 2 Import Export Configuration pStringsSettingsFm cm EIE Device Name 1 URC200 You can export the URC200 TPC configuration to a file or import the file to restore the configuration On settings window for the first level menu there is two buttons e Export By clicking this button to export configuration of URC200 TPC to a file e Import By clicking this button to import configuration of URC200 TPC from a file 4 2 14 4 3 Save Load Configuration The configuration of URC200 TPC is edited using the software If you want URC200 TPC to run the configuration you need to save it to the device See the below figure you have to select the target URC200 TPC that to be saved and then press the button Save to start save proced
241. nt Template is a container for objects icons that ready to drag and drop down to design windows for creating an object for configuration Below figure shows how component template work with design window O 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 239 100 200 300 t H Delay Advanced 5 4 8 Delay pus LES AGC iste AGC Stereo Auto Noise Gain A d Compressor Compressor Sterec Drag and Drop Compdimiter m I FA Ducker Stereo Expander D On the left is component template and right is design window There are three pages of component template you can click icons on the bottom of component template to switch them ve Devices Page List devices which are ready for drag and drop to device design window Some of object is corresponds to physical devices and some are just symbols DSP Components Page List DSP components which are ready for drag and drop to DSP design window Each of them is corresponds to a signal processing unit inside the device Extended Components Page List symbolic components likes images texts All of them does not relates to physical functions By click menu View gt Main you can open component template window 2012 ATEIS omo Ateis Studio 5 1 15 Resource Manager Sa Resource Manager C Data Ateis Projects Ateis Studio Resource Clipboard Executable Resource Indude Files Update Bitmap Wave G 722 AsZip Customized Component Xml Height 24630 1
242. nt of a loudspeaker about 1 2 meters The distance between DNM and Loudspeaker also depends on the power of the amplifier and loudspeaker If it is a high power loudspeaker sound is louder then the distance should be increased and vice versa The examples of installation as follows 1 One zone connects only one loudspeaker generally then install the DNM in front of the loudspeaker about 1 2 meters O 2012 ATEIS Product Features 127 Loudspeaker 2 One zone connects many loudspeakers and installed the loudspeakers by circularity and the distance is not far between the loudspeakers then the DNM can be set in the center of loudspeakers ex A small conference room etc 3 One zone connects many loudspeakers and the installation of loudspeakers are irregular but the distance of all loudspeakers are not far then install the DNM about 1 2 meters in the front of any one loudspeaker O 2012 ATEIS 128 Ateis Studio DNM 1 2m Loudspeaker S 4 In a large area the broadcast source is same in the area and the distance of each loudspeaker is far maybe the ambient noise is loud in one side but quiet in the other side What if the DNM is installed around loud side The DNM will adjust the level automatically allowing people to hear the broadcast clearly as all of the loudspeakers are connected from same source Same zone output Maybe the volume of broadcast is too loud for the quiet side or on
243. nts of Audio Processor 339 r Control Window ancwvidth Oct Element Properties e Generate Information Bypass r Bypass Bypass On j J Frequency 1000 20 20000 1 Hz Element Description e Bypass All Bypass the component all bands of filter s module e Bypass Bypass the processing of selected band in filter s module e Bandwidth The transition bandwidth e Frequency The frequency at which the phase shift crosses 90 ve Graphical Control Window 2012 ATEIS oa Ateis Studio EN GPC All Pass Filter 2 Band e Axis o X Frequency of output signal Hz o Y Gain of output signal dB Kevin e Control Points o Blue Adjust Frequency o Yellow Adjust Bandwidth 6 7 2 Band Pass Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component GJ Filter pp All Pass Filter gp Crossover a i Crossover Stereo ee Fireman e EH Input m Inverter Component Appearance 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor oa Description A Band Pass component that passes frequencies within a certain range and rejects attenuates frequencies outside that range r Control Window E va Element Properties e Generate Information Mode Butterworth See 12dB Bypass JS Of j j j Mte JJ Of j j y Led 0
244. ny p Power Sub Freset Control k Event 1 Fverload Thd dB Then a window shows brief information of the relationship state and value ER Digital Bool Element Adjust Event Setting 1 Mute Output 1 2 Mute Output 1 Click field Content of event manager window to open settings window of the event Value Trigger Master Preset Event 4 Mute Output 1 Input A IDASC 1 IDASC 1 False Drees Be icem O 2012 ATEIS 254 Ateis Studio State Pages There is a page for each state in value trigger event To switch states click the tab of desired state Element Indicate which element of the component controlled by value trigger Component Indicate which component of the device contains element prior mentioned Device Indicate which device contains component prior mentioned System Indicate which system contains device prior mentioned Value Specify the value bind with the state When a Value Trigger Event triggers the source that triggers event send a state number to event system event map this state number to a value and then set it to element Remove Remove the element controlled by the event d This operation only remove the relation between element and event not delete element Clear Remove all elements controlled by the event Close Close the settings window 5 3 3 Value Control Event Description This ev
245. ocal Ateis Net Connectors Optional card to build a local dedicated IDA8C IDA8S network Zone1 Speaker Line Output This connector connects to the loudspeaker of zone o Zone1 Amplifier Output This connector connects to the output of the zone1 amplifier for receiving the 100V audio signal powered by the amplifier ap Zone1 Amplifier Input This connector connects to the input of the zone1 amplifier for transmitting OdB audio signal to the amplifier Backup Amplifier Input This connector connects to the input of the backup amplifier for transmitting OdB audio signal to the 2012 ATEIS Product Features 51 amplifier Contact Outputs 8 logic outputs channels to close open circuit for an external device this contact is normally open W Evacuation Inputs 9 evacuation contact inputs that allow the monitoring of external contact They also can be used in UGA mode trigger by a voltage polarization change W 24V DC Output This connector supplies a 24VDC source U 24V DC Input Main 24VDC power supply connector 13 AC Power Socket Main 110 240 V 1 2A 47 63Hz AC power input with fuse If 24V DC and AC power input at the same time IDA8C will use AC power and switch to DC power if there is no AC power input Fuse Rating 1 6A 4 1 3 4 Characteristics d Case e Dimension 436mm W x 300mm L x 88mm H e Weight 5Kg e Color RAL 016 n Power Item Voltage Current Consumptio
246. on how many bands of a PEQ These initial values are average distribution in range 10 to 22000 Hz ve Element Description e Bypass all To bypass the EQ all the frequency band e Bypass Bypasses only the selected frequency band Bandwidth Set the width around the frequency Q factor of selected frequency band e Frequency oet the frequency of a band e Gain O 2012 ATEIS mu Ateis Studio Set the gain attenuate or increase the selected frequency Graphical Control Window a GPC PEQ 8 Band e Axis o X Frequency of output signal Hz o Y Gain of output signal dB e Control Points o Blue Adjust Gain using vertical direction and Frequency using horizontal direction o Yellow Adjust Bandwidth Application An equalizer can be used to correct or flatten the frequency response of speakers rather than designing the speaker itself to be equalized For some speaker system doesn t use separate woofers and tweeters to cover the bass and treble frequencies but includes full range drivers However this speaker system is sold with an active equalizer designed to correct the poor frequency balance of those drivers That equalizer must into the sound system but before amplifier so that the amplified signal that is finally sent to the speakers has its response increased at the frequencies where the response of these drivers falls off producing a high fidelity reproduction regardless Ateis audio processor give you th
247. one Board 2 The meaning of parameters list below e Amount Specify the number of backup amplifiers in system the list content of combo box in amplifier depends on this value For example if Amount 3 then the list content should be none 1 2 3 e Field Device of Grid List deuces within the same Ateis Net e Field Zone Board of Grid List zone boards of the device zone board1 means zone1 to zone4 zone board2 means zoned to zone8 e Field Amplifier of Grid Specify the group no of zones In the above figure IDA8S1 zone board1 zone1 zone4 of IDA8S 1 IDA8S2 zone board1 zone1 4 of IDA8S2 IDA8S2 zone board2 zone 5 8 of IDA8S2 are the same value i e those zones are the same group and use the same amplifier for backup 4 1 6 Monitoring Fault For the security purpose IDA8 is designed to monitor the equipment when a error detected a fault will be generated to inform user then user can change the failure equipment quickly to make system working fine again There are two type of faults System Fault This kind of fault is about the internal error of IDA8C S and most of case is hardware failure it need to change board inside dewce to repair r Global Fault A global fault is mostly speak about the fault of equipment outside IDA8C S O 2012 ATEIS Product Features 69 When a fault is generated the following things will be done by IDA8 S e System Fault LED is light on if the fault is a system faul
248. onent itself If you need to do a paging using control console like PPM AS or PSS AS please select this option o Permanent Means the paging source always request for paging You can choose this option if the source is background music for keep audio playing for zones continuously o Modulation Paging request is recognized released if the conditions on Modulation Properties are satisfied Threshold dB 0 Attack time ms 10 Release time ms 3000 Threshold Attack Time IDA8s acknowledge a paging request of the channel the signal level continuous higher then Threshold over Attack time Release Time IDA8s release the paging request of the channel if the signal level continuous lower than Threshold over Release time o Logic Signal O 2012 ATEIS 426 Ateis Studio A paging request of the channel is established depend on the logic signal of input Logic Signal Logic Input CH 1 Logic Input CH1 Logic Input CH 2 Add Delete Operation AMD Basically if logic from lo to hi it request for paging on the other hand form hi to lo for releasing a paging request The settings allows you to put multiple channel to do logic operation AND OR to determine paging activities o Modulation Logic Signal Under this mode IDA8 decide to request a paging if both modulation and logic signal condition are satisfied but release a paging request if one of condition is unsatisfied o
249. onttorfkdatrtc Mode IDASC 1 co jJ tr LO MJ 18k or 20k Zone ikone Global Settings Zone Settings Normal Amplifier Settings Backup Amplifier Settings Tone Settings 1 Il 25V 70v 100V 25v 70v 100V 25V 70v 100V 25v 70v 100V 25v 70v 100V 25y 70v 100V 25y 70V 100V 25y 70V 100V Ka W Ka Ka ka Backup Tolerance Get Reference Reset Reference 4k ak Ak Ak 4 bk d ko dk d There several field in grid of page Zone Settings at lower part of window e Zone O 2012 ATEIS Product Features Indicates a row is refer to which zone e Monitor Enable Disable zone monitoring if monitoring of a zone is disabled IDA8C S will not detect faults of zone e Backup This setting tells IDA8 if backup amplifier can service the zone or not i e if the checkbox is not checked when a fault of normal amplifier IDA8C S will not switch to backup amplifier for the zone result to the monitoring of the zone is not working e Mode There are two choices 1 25V 70V 100V Audio signal go through amplifier and back to IDA8C S 2 OdB This mode the audio is output to other equipment not go through amplifier and back to IDA8C S Monitoring is disabled under this mode e Tolerance Specify the tolerance of impedance to detect an bad impedance fault for example if the reference is 1000 ohm tolerance set to 15 then the range of good impe
250. or parameters for each tab Source Type 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor wm A source type is an identification for paging activties If a zone if occupy by some source for paging it need to know who did this paging and who is the owner of the zone The source type represent it of the case You can edit source type of Network Paging component by property windows The procedure is very simple click Network Paging component on DSP design window once Network Paging component is focused the property windows revel all the parameters of it Click the field of Source List on property window to edit source types Appearance Color E 210 Network Paging 1 None z 2 PSS AS Input Count 16 Output Count 16 Input Count 20 Output Count 20 EA Add Remove General Settings O 2012 ATEIS aza Ateis Studio Audio In CH 2 Audio In CH 3 Audio In CH 4 Audio In CH 5 Audio In CH 6 Audio In CH 7 Audio In CH 8 Audio In CH 9 Audio In CH 10 Audio In CH 11 Audio In CH 12 Audio In CH 13 Audio In CH 14 Audio In CH 15 Audio In CH 16 Evac Enable this option to set the paging source is an evacuation source If an evacuation source is active on paging A evacuation paging situation is recognized by IDA8 system and device Free Peripheral Input External Audio Input Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Free Activat
251. p There are three backup amplifier groups of above figure e Backup Group Amplifier B1 serves Zone1 Zone8 e Backup Group2 Amplifier B2 serves Zone9 Zone12 e Backup Group3 2012 ATEIS Product Features Amplifier B3 serves Zone 13 zone24 Software settings for backup amplifier O 2012 ATEIS It is necessary to have software settings to make backup amplifier working n G a G ar G r G e A na E ap A to Fr ba 63 P3 A o on Unloaded Reference Backup 1 Backup 1 Backup 1 Backup 1 Backup 2 Backup 2 Backup 2 Backup 2 Global Settings Zone Settings Normal Amplifier Settings Backup Amplifier Settings Tone Settings Get Reference Backup 1 Line 1 15 x EE cnt Geis arirce Backup 1 Line 2 Backup 1 Line 3 Backup 1 Line 4 Backup 2 Line 1 Backup 2 Line 2 Backup 2 Line 3 Backup 2 Line 4 d dk Ak Ak Ak Ak AE AE AE Numbers in figure show steps to open backup amplifier settings window 1 Right click mouse on IDA8C1 block in devices window then click item Monitor to open window Monitor Matrix Mode IDA8C1 2 Select tab Backup Amplifier Monitor 3 Click button Amplifier Amount Below figure show the software setup window for the backup configuration in Advance Backup Amplifier Setup e Ateis Studio Amount 3 Device Zone Board Amplifier IDA85 1 Zone Board 1 Zone Board 2 IDA85 2 Zone Board 1 Zone Board 2 Lc IDASC 1 Zone Board 1 Z
252. peaker is talking the background music must decrease its level The speaking is using a standard dynamic microphone type SM58 The microphone is connected to the channel 2 of the Input A component with a input sensitivty at 40dB set in the input A component Then the microphone is linked to the input S of the Ducker The music player as a CD player is connected to the input 1 of the Input A component Then the music is linked to the input A of the Ducker Elements e Threshold oet at 18dB because less would active the attenuation when the speaker is not talking if the microphone catch some unexpected noise e Response Time Set very short because the background music must be attenuated as soon as the speaker is talking Attack and Release Times Which are the fade in and fade out on the background music Set almost one second for the hearing comfort we want a kind music transition Hold Time Set at 700 ms enough to avoid the music back during the speech breaks Audio Depth Set at 20dB to hear the music during the speech but at very low level depending of the context 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 313 6 4 7 Expander Expander Stereo Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component ER Delay Advanced e H Delay Basic EHE Dynamic L AGC Stereo fe Auto Noise Gain A N G HH Compressor HH Compressor Stereo A Ducker Stereo FH
253. processor 5 Fireman Microphone Connector DIN Connector for fireman microphone connection 6 Talk Indicator This LED light up if PCP is allowed to paging on the other word the paging request has been acknowledged al Sometime after paging request is granted zones under paging still can be occupied by other sources In such a case the talk led still light up but you can check busy LED to know the situation 7 LED Test Button Test LED on control panel after pressing this button all LEDs light up and then off 8 Hold Indicator 1 8 These LEDs Indicate which keys are selected 9 All Call Release Button This button is used to select or deselect all keys 10 All Call Release Indicator This indicator lights up if all keys are selected 11 Event Select Key 1 8 These buttons are used to select keys each key may link to an event for triggering actions like paging or adjust the value of parameters 12 Busy Indicator 9 16 Please refer to Busy Indicator 1 8 13 Hold Indicator 9 16 O 2012 ATEIS 178 Ateis Studio Please refer to Hold Indicator 1 8 14 Event Select Key 9 16 Please refer to Event Select Key 1 8 15 Power Indicator This LED light up when the CD8 is powered on 16 EVAC Indicator Light up when the system is under evacuation paging 4 2 9 3 Characteristics d Case Dimension 350mm W x 250mm H x 130mm D Weight 4 7Kg Color RAL7016 n Power item Voltage Current Consump
254. processor using PDC interface for example PSS AS PPM AS e S PDC N Connect to one of secondary audio processor s PDC connectors 3 Zone Amplifier Inputs There are 8 sets of Zone Amplifier Input in RU MAIN each set consist of three connectors allow system to do one channel of zone amplifier redundancy the N is the number of set e P ZONEN Connect to N channel of primary audio processor s zone amplifier input connector e ZONE N Connect to N channel of normal amplifier s audio input connector e S ZONEN Connect to N channel of secondary audio processor s zone amplifier input connector 4 EXP OUT Active Control Expansion Output This port output logic signal to next RU devices to synchronize redundancy state which tells primary or secondary is active 5 Fault This port is a logic contact which is normally closed opened if the unit is set to be slave refer to Master Slave Switch of later item and a short or open is detected on S_WD Secondary Watching Dog port 6 S_ACT Secondary Active Output Output a logic signal to indicate secondary audio processor is active 7 S_WD Secondary Watching Dog RU Main PDC CTL determine active system will be primary or secondary IDA8 network by monitor input logic contacts P WD and S WD The basic philosophy is that master RU monitor the signal coming from primary and secondary audio processor to decide which one can be active and also pass the decision to next RU through EXP OUT port
255. puts on URGP are error Fault Indication e LED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S e Log o EVAC Input Error Open Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Evac Board Fault Port 1 IP 1 ch1 Open where Port N is the N PDC port for peripheral connection IP is the unique number for each peripheral device on the PDC port ch is the number of channel Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio Set Machine Fault Record X More Detail Evac Board Fault o EVAC Input Error Short Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Evac Board Fault Port 1 IP 1 ch1 Short where Port N is the N PDC port for peripheral connection IP is the unique number for each peripheral device on the PDC port ch is the number of channel Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio sw Machine Fault Record x More Detail Evac Board Fault e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C 2012 ATEIS oa Ateis Studio J Remove the wire of EVAC Input and replace by a resistor 3K ohm 0 25wy Is fault Fault Handling 4 1 6 2 11 Remote Fault Fault Meaning e An error is detected on peripheral devices For PPM AS or PSS AS this fault is about capsule microphone or speaker error Fault Indication
256. r 2012 ATEIS Ateis Studio Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio More Detail hl Flash Error e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C Fault Handling Contact service to repair device 4 1 6 1 8 Para Table Error Fault Meaning Data error of table which store some important information of configuration Fault Indication e LED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up o System Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S e Log Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Para Table Err Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio 4 Machine Fault Record Description More Detail Parameter table error e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C Fault Handling Store a configuration to device If the error still not solved please contact service 4 1 6 1 9 Trans Error Fault Meaning An internal hardware error of device ve Fault Indication e LED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up O 2012 ATEIS Product Features o System Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S e Log Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Trans Error Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio Set Ila
257. r Fireman Button Open Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio VN Machine Fault Record x More Detail Fireman microphone fault Fireman Button Open o Fireman Microphone Button Short Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Fireman Error Fireman Button Short Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio Sa Machine Fault Record X Fireman microphone fault Fireman Button Short e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C Fault Handling e Check the wire connection of fireman microphone e f wire connection is fine but still get fault change fireman microphone to a good one e H fireman microphone is changed but still get fault change IDA8C or contact service 4 1 6 2 7 VOX NET Error Fault Meaning e IDA8C S can t communicate with VOX NET server Fault Indication e ED Indicator When this error is detected following LEDs will light up O 2012 ATEIS Product Features 91 o G Fault LED on front panel of IDA8C S e Log Text messages display at touch screen on front panel of IDA8C Fireman Error Fireman Audio Open Text message display at window Machine Fault Record of Ateis Studio Vox net protocol fault e Buzzer sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C Fault Handling Observe link and active LED indicator on RJ45 connector of PC with VOX NET s
258. r automatically by signal and priority The auto mixer adjusts the signal output level on the output node depending on the number of activated input channels This function can be useful in conference applications or houses of workshop where usually unattended mixing has to be executed A special feature of this component is the priority function which can be used for auto paging applications or to implement a voice triggered chairman s mike in a small conference system 4 Control Window O 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 39 Kj e e re A ele ne Ball FER EE Ond Sr Bac F W M hom Le Duns e Attenuation Attenuation Timetins e de GERT Element Properties Type Manual j j LastMic OnDesigated Chamel1 J Mute 2 oho j J L het J ofr j j JC Solo of j y Gaeo Of InputLevel 0 200 200 01 dB Mawdmode On j j Automatic mode prioritylevel 1 2 3 J 4 J OutputMute o OutputLevel 0 90 0 200 01 dB Threshold 400 90 0 200 01 op Background Threshold 150 0 f 1000 01 op HodTme 5 o 100 on Second Attenuation Response Time 10 10 1000 1 ms _ NOM A
259. r input from secondary audio processor 4 Evacuation Inputs There are 9 channels for evacuation input each channel consist of three connectors where N is the number of channel e P_N Connect to N evacuation input of primary audio processor e N NP channel of evacuation input e S N Connect to N evacuation input of secondary audio processor 5 Active Control Expansion Output This port output logic signal to next RU devices to synchronize redundancy state which tells primary or secondary is active 6 Fault This port is a logic contact which is normally closed opened if the unit is set to be slave refer to Master Slave Switch of later item and a short or open is detected on S WD Secondary Watching Dog port 7 S_ACT Secondary Active Output Output a logic signal to indicate if secondary IDA8 network is active 8 5 WD Secondary Watching Dog IDA8RU Main PDC CTL determine active system will be primary or secondary IDA8 network by monitor input logic contacts P WD and S WD The basic philosophy is that master RU monitor the signal coming from primary and secondary audio processor to decide which one can be active and also pass the decision to next RU through EXP OUT port When RU is set to be master it monitor both P WD and S WD for choose which audio processor will be active but if RU is set to slave it only monitor 5 WD to determine which one can be active 9 P ACT Primary Active Output Output a logic signal to ind
260. r liquids get inside the devce e he unit has been dropped or the shell is damaged e he power cord is damaged If you continue using the device fire and electrical shock may result Do not drop or insert metallic objects or flammable materials into the unit as this may result in fire and electrical shock Do not remove the device s cover as there are exposed parts inside carrying high voltages that may cause an electrical shock Contact your ATEIS dealer if internal inspection maintenance or repair is necessary Do not try to make any modifications to the device This is a potential fire and electrical shock hazard Avoid the device s ventilation slots to be blocked Blocking the ventilation slots is a potential fire hazard O 2012 ATEIS 4 Ateis Studio 3 1 Caution This sign indicates a potentially hazardous situation that can result in moderate or minor personal injury and or property damage To prevent the unit from falling down and causing personal injury and or property damage avoid installing or mounting the unit in unstable locations Leave enough space above and below the unit to provide good ventilation of the device If the airflow is not adequate the device will heat up inside and may cause a fire Operate the device in an environment with a free air temperature of between 0 C and 40 C 32 F and 104 F Turn off all audio equipment when making any connections to the devic
261. r sound output to monitoring speaker on front panel of IDA8C ve Fault Handling Replace the error peripheral device by a good one and contact service to repair bad one 4 1 6 3 Procedure of Monitoring Setup The monitoring setup must be done when hardware setup is appropriate it means IDA8C S amplifiers speakers wiring should be prepared and connected before monitoring setup because IDA8C S will get values of hardware initial state for further reference when system is running and reference values are appropriate achieved IDA8C S continuity measure internal status and compare with referenced values to determine if there are something wrong of zone amplifiers or not 1 Setup hardware equipment including IDA8C S normal amplifier backup amplifier speakers wiring between devices 2 Make a configuration using Ateis Studio 2012 ATEIS Ateis Studio 4 1 6 4 3 Store configuration then online 4 Set appropriate settings for your application using Ateis Studio you can see more details in topic Zone Monitoring Normal Amplifier Monitoring Backup Amplifier Monitoring 5 Press get reference button to start monitoring for the zone you selected Zone Monitoring Settings First in Ateis Studio right click on IDA8C S block in Devices window EE EEEF Jin Gil Me a VERSUS ET Ra Window Monitoring Matrix Mode IDA8C S X shows up select page Zone Settings Z4 Lic
262. r the room s acoustics Such compensation can also be applied to tweak the sound quality of a recording studio in addition to its use in live sound reinforcement systems 2012 ATEIS 332 Ateis Studio 6 5 2 PEQ PEQ Stereo Component Template Main DSP Components d DSP Component H Delay Advanced o 3 Delay Basic EL Gr Dynamic E Je Equalizer EHE CEO H GEQ Stereo E F PEQ 16 Band o 3 3 Feedback H 7 Filter Bu Fireman H DH Input Bt Inverter 3 Level Controller a Local Echo Suppressor Component Appearance Description PEQ is abbreviation of parametric equalizer PEQs are multi band variable equalizers which allow users to control the three primary parameters amplitude center frequency and bandwidth The amplitude of each band can be controlled and the center frequency can be shifted and bandwidth Q can be widened or narrowed PEQs are capable of making much more precise adjustments to sound than other equalizers and are commonly used in sound recording and live sound reinforcement 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 333 r Control Window ZN PEO 4 Band Jandwidth Oct SSeS alas Element Properties e Generate Information Bypass all Bvpass Bypass 1 A Md RA Frequency a 10 2200 1 Hz 6 Gan LH LL 300 150 o1 dB 1 The initial value of Frequency depends
263. r unit is able to run an impedance scan of all components connected to it covering not only the input paging consoles but including connectors cabling processing blocks such as compressors and limiters delay lines and the network and loudspeakers It stores a reference measurement of the system as it exists in a given configuration and envronment This reference is subsequently stored in the system Any alterations to this reference will be reported and are logged in an event log file User definable thresholds can be applied to these references allowing for customization to match circumstances Being EN 54 16 ISO 7240 16 and BS 5839 part 8 security systems all components and peripherals are monitored All incidents are recorded into a data file which can be consulted on the controller module monitor display or on a PC using the ATEIS Studio remote control software Also any detected fault is signalled by a general fault output contact available on the IDA8C Controller unit A built in loudspeaker output enables selective listening to all the sources and system s 100 V output signals 2012 ATEIS Product Features 1 IDA8C Controller unit is easily configured with our PC based ATEIS Studio global software Windows compatible Software access can be password protected Once programmed the system will be able to work independently off line without the need of a PC to be connected 4 1 1 2 Front Panel D OOC d Fireman Microphone A
264. re configuration IDA8C S amplifiers wiring should be done before get reference e Reset Reference Clear reference values of selected zone to go back initial status if reference value is cleared monitoring will be stopped n Measurement After parameter settings are done in lower part grid IDA8C S start to measure value get from internal circuit and display it on the grid at upper part of window ZN Monitor Matrix Mode IDABC 1 zone Monitor Normal Amplifier Monitor Backup Amplifier Monitor AmpliFier Unloaded Reference Full Loaded Reference 62 36 2 45 13 59 58 97 59 08 104 1 53 52 amp 3 7 635 04 60 70 60 04 0 040 0 001 0 001 0 001 0 002 1 B 3 4 5 6 H B Global Settings Zone Settings Normal Amplifier Settings Backup Amplifier Settings Tone Settings Amplifier Tolerance Get Reference Reset Reference Get All References Di 15 A Get Reference Reset Reference Get Reference Reset Reference Reset All References Get Reference Reset Reference ESSERE a ee Get Reference Reset Reference _ Reset Monitoring Get Reference Reset Reference Get Reference Reset Reference Get Reference Reset Reference 4k d kod ko k d kd kb d kb Ak cea C A bh D D rz Get Reference Reset Reference e Unloaded Reference Display the value of unloaded reference which is the gain of amplifier when there is no load to the zone This value use to determine if there is a fault of norma
265. re is a fault recognized if one of follow conditions is true Measure lt Full Loaded Reference x 100 Tolerance Measure gt Unloaded Reference x 100 Tolerance 2012 ATEIS 104 Ateis Studio e Get Reference Get the reference values of selected zone for further fault detection Be aware hardware configuration IDA8C S amplifiers wiring should be done before get reference e Reset Reference Clear reference values of selected zone to go back initial status if reference value is cleared monitoring will be stopped s Measurement After parameter settings are done in lower part grid IDA8C S start to measure value get from internal circuit and display it on the grid at upper part of window ga Monitor Matrix Mode IDA8C 1 Zone Monitor Normal Amplifier Monitor Backup Amplifier Monitor Amplifier Unloaded Reference Full Loaded Reference Tolerance Backup 1 Line 1 60 90 60 61 Backup 1 Line 2 61 47 61 38 Backup 1 Line 3 60 86 60 4 Backup 1 Line 4 61 01 60 65 Backup 2 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Global Settings Zone Settings Normal Amplifier Settings Backup Amplifier Settings Tone Settings Get all References Backup 1 Line 1 Get Reference Reset Reference Backup 1 Line 2 Get Reference Reset Reference Reset All References Backup 1 Line 3 Get Reference Reset Reference Backup 1 Line 4 Backup 2 Line 1 Backup 2 Line 2 Backup 2 Line 3 Backup 2 Line 4
266. remote dialer for making telephone calls via IDA8 s telephone 1 PDC hardware 1 PDC It s a RF transceiver to communication between Deskpad and Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console with 24 buttons 31 PDC l zones and 2 extra selectable microphone sources 2012 ATEIS e Ateis Studio Device _ Connection Box IDA8 use it Deskpad can working without physcial connection 4 1 5 Amplifier Configuration 4 1 5 1 Basic Amplifier Connection le 3 iz iz Ze TIR RA Ei INP T Pu Fux gt H Q 2686 DP 1 TUCT 2 75 j AMP PUT HSH mute foe See a e SZ Te SZ TI e E OUTPUT exi x3 Ere r Pont D NI 2 voc MU xum T m i a M ro AA Basic Amplifier Connection IDA8 System apply a flexible amplifier setup the figure above is the basic setup of amplifier with IDA8 The figure show the connection between amplifiers and IDA8C There two kinds of connections for amplifier e Normal Amplifiers Connection The connection of amplifiers for speaker zone outputs In above figure Basic Amplifier Connection Z1 Z8 are normal amplifiers Follow the wires audio signal start from amplifier zone outputs goes into amplifiers input then gained by amplifier and input to AMPO connector of speaker line l Os For each channel of amplifier zone outputs should connect to it s correspond channel of speaker zone output s AMPO connector For example amplifier zone output 5 should connect to zone5
267. requency played e Sweep Type Choose the interval between Min and Max frequencies 1Octave 1 3 Octave etc 2012 ATEIS 408 Ateis Studio 6 18 3 White ga Component Template Main DSP Components x gt DSF Component alii e H Net Output ER Noise Generator Op White Si spo Output H 3 Page Control gr Recorder ga R5485 Audio ndulglissc Component Appearance Description This component generates a White noise The White noise is a random signal or process with a flat power spectral density In other words the signal contains equal power within a fixed bandwidth at any center frequency An infinite bandwidth white noise signal is purely a theoretical construction By having power at all frequencies the total power of such a signal is infinite and therefore impossible to generate In practice however a signal can be white with a flat spectrum over a defined frequency band As example it can be used to set up the equalization for a concert or other performance in a venue a short burst of white or pink noise is sent through the PA system and monitored from various points in the venue so that the engineer can tell if the acoustics of the building naturally boost or cut any frequencies The engineer can then adjust the overall EQ to ensure a balanced mix 4 Control Window Element Properties 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 4 Mute Level 100 0 100
268. roviding durability and excellent aesthetics as well as allowing up to 256 zones expansion va the additional keypad easy extension station The buttons can represent a single zone or a group of zones and are easily defined via the GUI of the system units using a simple Matrix selection It supports an extended speaker to monitor the audio source with more power compared with the original one The unit offers Hold and Busy LED signals in addition to the zone LED s and these allow the easy identification of selection Busy signals for the user All buttons can be programmed with drag amp drop features from the System unit GUI software and each button can be programmed for Push To Talk or Latch functionality The unidirectional condenser microphone warrants high quality directive signal pick up from the user and hence less interference from the surroundings thanks to the cardioid polar pick up pattern The RS485 communication protocol offers daisy chaining of up to 100 m on a CAT5 cable and yet makes outlets easy to connect via a standard RJ45 connectors The microphone compatibility listing shows the maximum number of units per System 2012 ATEIS 190 Ateis Studio 4 2 13 2 Characteristics d Case Dimension 220mm W x 483mm L x 115 7mm H Weight 0 37 Kg Color RAL 035 n Power Item weg ge Current Consumption Comment DC Input 18V 26V Typical 24V 150mA Microphone Output e Maximum l
269. rtical 6 7 6 Notch Filter Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component EET Filter pH ES All Pass Filter Band Stop e H Crossover H Crossover Stereo Hi Lo Pass Je Notch Filter EE Shelving Filter Bu Fireman o ER Input m Inverter Device Madulelb oc Component Appearance Description In signal processing a band stop filter or band rejection filter is a filter that passes most frequencies unaltered but attenuates those in a specific range to very low levels It is the opposite of a band pass filter A notch filter is a band stop filter with a narrow stop band high Q factor r Control Window O 2012 ATEIS 352 Ateis Studio a 0 0 d Tt S va Element Properties Mode Butterworth Sepe B Bypass JS Of j j j Mte jJ Of j j Led 0 200 200 01 dB Frequency 1000 10 22000 1 Hz Element Description todo e Mode The type of filer e Slope Slope of attenuation the higher slope means the drop speeds level is faster Bandwidth The difference between the upper and lower cut off frequencies in a contiguous set of frequencies e Bypass Bypass the filter s function e Mute Mute the audio signal e Level Gain of audio signal e Frequency 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 353
270. ry 5 cable RS232 15m Evacuation Inputs Contact Mode e Bias voltage Voltage d 2 2 JH 5 4 VDC J O 2012 ATEIS 168 Ateis Studio e Monitoring resistor 4 7k Ohm Evacuation Inputs Voltage Mode On Voltage item Minimum Maximum Unt Voltage 18 VDC 4 2 6 3 Configuration URGP needs config using Ateis Studio before working EVAC Board is the DSP component for the device Dp 777 7 heo ho ba fe EA Emergency 4f Evac Board eM EX Evacuation Fault A Evacuation Input a B Event L7 Trigger Value Control T C Cr 5f Ob wo G Event Trigger wm WE Fault Definer ere Fee Ss SS d d ee e ee e eene MN 1 oo DSP Power 0 00 WH See more details topic EVAC Board 2012 ATEIS Product Features 169 4 2 7 CD Touch 4 2 7 1 Overview CD Touch Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console for Ateis audio processor ATeis Ta ET CD TOUCH PAGING CONSOLE A mi 13 i i Ak A AR wm ps ae a ee Wall mount heaw duty remote paging console with Access level 2 protection to comply with the EN 54 16 Compatible with Ateis audio processor and communicates over a dedicated RS485 for Power audio and DATA The unit comprises of 8 zones 8 buttons with fist firemen s microphone in a metal surface mount wall box It provides robust IP 30 protection The RS485 communication protocol offers daisy c
271. s Discovered devices are listed using tree structure e Type Type of device 2012 ATEIS 264 Ateis Studio e Ateis Net Display Ateis Net ID by X Y format where Xis the global net ID and Y is local net ID e Serial Number Serial Number of the device Each Ateis device has an unique serial number e Address Shows IP address of the device e Redundancy Addr The redundancy address of the device e Device Status Show the status of devices If there is a fault in audio processor this field shows Fault e Name The object of design window that corresponds to the device After the relation of object and device created the configuration of object will set to the device after execute store procedure e Communication Show the communication state of Ateis Studio and device 2 Device Function List all functions available of the device 3 Settings Tab Switch different tab for desired settings There are thee tables e Device search and list Ateis devices in network e Network Network interface card settings for communicating with Ateis devices e RS232 RS232 interface settings for communicating with Ateis devices 4 Search Devices e Search Try to discovery Ateis devices on the network e Clear Clear the current searched result make the grid be blank e Search Timeout Interval Determine how long should wait for device to reply for search command e Search by IP 2012 ATEIS System Functionality 265 9 4 2
272. s a box to list all channels of scheduler Click it can change the focus of scheduler and the right part of window which is the settings of the scheduler will switch to corresponding scheduler e General Settings General Settings Mame Scheduler 1 e Name The name of scheduler r Start Time amp tart Time 2011 10 25 09 50 15 The start time of the scheduler ga Stop Condition 2012 ATEIS 39 Ateis Studio Number of Times Mumber of Times 1 z Stop Time 2011 10 25 LF 09 50 15 opecify the condition to deactivate scheduler there are three kinds of stop condition e Continue In this option scheduler never stop triggering mode settings is valid from now and forever e Number of Times Scheduler triggers N times using triggering mode settings where N can be set on Number of Times parameter e Stop Time Scheduler is active from start time to the time specified in Stop Time parameter Triggering Mode The triggering mode define the rule of trigger an pulse to output e Periodic Triggering Mode Mode Periodic Interval 0 7 10 2 50 zi hh mm ss The interval is the time between two triggers e Cyclic Mode Cyclic Occurrence Daily Only current selected occurrence will be enabled Every 2 day s List of Triggering Time 00 00 00 02 03 01 Time 2012 ATEIS Lan fe u EN Components of Audio Processor 387 The Occurrence parameter
273. s a pre delay time for automatic attenuation That s means the transition time of the attenuation when a channel is added or removed 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 395 e NOM Attenuation Step Sets the amount of attenuation to be applied each time the number of activated channels increases NOM Attenuation Max Limits the amount of attenuation to be applied Attenuation Gain Indicates the amount of current gain reduction e Open Mic Limits Chooses the maximum number of simultaneously activated channels NOM Attenuation Mode Chose here if you want a linear attenuation or a logarithmic attenuation which is more near of the reality Eq1 NOM 1 x step same attenuation for each addicting channel Eq2 log2 NOM x step 6 15 2 AutoMixer MM Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component GJ Mixer 3 AutoMixer GIE AutoMixer MM el Standard e DH Net Input sg Component Appearance Description O 2012 ATEIS me Ateis Studio This component Allows mix several signals to one output The Activation of channel s can be done manually or automatically by signal threshold and priority The output 1 is the standard automixer output like you have on the auto mixer component In more on each input channels you can open a mini mixer allowing you to send the input signal in different outputs with different level of mixing r Control Window UN AutoMixer MM x
274. s higher than other sources Green Pemanent The zone only desired for paging is not using by other sources 15 Hold Indicator 1 8 O 2012 ATEIS 184 Ateis Studio 4 2 11 3 These LEDs Indicate which keys are selected 16 Event Select Key 1 8 These buttons are used to select keys each key may link to an event for triggering actions like paging or adjust the value of parameters Characteristics d Case Dimension 483 mm W x 220 mm H x 68 mm D Color RAL7035 Power item Voltage Current Consumption Comment DC Input 18V 26V Typical 24V 200mA Microphone Output e Maximum level 6dBu e Output Impedance 100Ohm e THD 1kHz lt 0 1 e Bandwidth 3dB 200Hz 20kHz Front Panel Speaker e Impedance 8Ohm e Maximum Power 1kHz 1W e THD 1kHz lt 1 e Bandwidth 3dB 200Hz 20kHz ge MUSIC INPUT e Input Impedance 10kOhm e Maximum level 12dBu e THD 1kHz lt 0 1 e Bandwidth 3dB 20Hz 20kHz Cable length 100m control and power on the same cable 900m when power line connects to junction box d Comes standard with Junction box JB and CAT5 cable 1 5 2012 ATEIS Product Features 185 4 2 12 PCP 4 2 12 1 Overview PCP PAGING CONSOLE ateis e EVAC FAULT POWER ours uu oe ALLIRELEASE Wall mount heaw duty remote paging console with Access level 2 protection to comply with the EN 54
275. scription e Bypass Bypass audio of the channel e Mute Mute audio of the channel e RTO Indicates an input channel Routed To Output s e Overload This LED light up if the signal of input channel greater than Overload Thd 2012 ATEIS 364 Ateis Studio e Volume Meter showing the channel RMS level e Signal Indicates audio signal presence above 30 dB from chosen Sensitivity e Level Signal output level of the channel e Overload Thd A threshold value to determine signal of a channel is overload or not 6 9 4 Duplex Input Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component EHE Input 4X ee Duplex Input E Duplex Input C FP Inverter er Level Contraller Wm Local Echo Suppressor ER Logic a Meter aj Message Device MaculelDAac sg Component Appearance Description For AES EBU input output the elements inside the component is very similar as Input component except without Sensitivity and Phantom Power The audio input to the channel 1 of the board go to the component Duplex Input A channel 1 amp 2 board channel 2 to Duplex Input A channel 3 amp 4 board channel 3 to Duplex Output B channel 1 amp 2 board channel 4 to Duplex Output B channel 3 amp 4 r Control Window O 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 365 EN Duplex Input amp Ta COverlaad ature ag i Signal S verlaad Thea dB
276. se buttons are used to select keys each key may link to an event for triggering actions like paging or adjust the value of parameters 13 Busy Indicator 9 16 Please refer to Busy Indicator 1 8 14 Hold Indicator 9 16 Please refer to Hold Indicator 1 8 15 Event Select Key 9 16 Please refer to Event Select Key 9 16 O 2012 ATEIS 188 Ateis Studio 4 2 12 3 Characteristics d Case Dimension 346 mm W x 220 mm H x 128 mm D Weight 3 Kg Color RAL 035 n Power item Voltage Current Consumption Comment DC Input 18V 26V Typical 24V 150mA Handset Microphone Output e Maximum level 6dBu e Output Impedance 100Ohm e THD 1kHz lt 0 1 e Bandwidth 3dB 200Hz 20kHz va Front Panel Speaker e Impedance 8Ohm e Maximum Power 1kHz 1W e THD 1kHz 1 e Bandwidth 3dB 200Hz 20kHz ve Cable length 100m control and power on the same cable 900m when power line connects to junction box Comes standard with Junction box JB and CAT5 cable 1 5 2012 ATEIS Product Features 189 4 2 13 PSC 4 2 13 1 Overview Unidirectional Condenser Addressable Microphone compatible with all system units PSC uses an RS485 protocol over a single CAT5 cable connection to transport both Audio and Power from the PSC to the system units The PSC comprises of 8 zones 8 buttons with sleek condenser gooseneck microphone and spring metal protection p
277. state and not allow to accept any other calls e MCU Reserve for engineering status display e Fault To determine there is an error on telephone line or not e Mute Mute transmitting audio O 2012 ATEIS m Ateis Studio e Flash This button to make a 3 way calling During the connection of first remote phone press this button then dial the number of second remote if second remote accept the call press Flash again Level Adjust the level of transmitting audio e Delay key define Define the key for delay For some telephone systems it need to dial O for an outside line then dial required number Between 0 and outside phone number it requires a short delay In such case you can define digit for a delay the number to dial should be 0 00000000 where X is the outside phone number you want to call e Delay Time oet the delay time for an delay digit 6 25 2 TC Receive ve Component Template Main DSP Components Er d DSP Component H JP Page Control H 3 3 Recorder o a R5485 Audio a Selector e p Signal Monitor int i Telephone Card mW 3 iid s voxnet Control E Je Custom Component Device ModuldDASC Component Appearance Description This component receive telephone call and detect DTMF tone output logic signal response to the key pressing on remote telephone It need to work with telephone card hardware The pins on the bottom side of component output the DTMF status O 2
278. t Fault G Fault LED is light on if the fault is a global fault e Fault State Output contact open e Log the fault e A warning message for the fault will show in Touch Screen e When Ateis Studio is connect to IDA8C S in Device Status field of Device Management panel will show fault Below is an example More Detail Line A monitor fault Zone 1 Line A OPEN e There is a warning tone will be generate by monitoring speaker e A text message is showed in PSS touch screen below figure is an example ATEIS eee Page 1 14 Status 4 1 6 1 Table of System Faults Flash Error Nand flash inside IDA8C S is error I2C Error This is an internal error of DC communication between micro controllers Net Part Eno This is error about bad communication between main cpu in IDA8C Se S and net card DSP Error It s an internal error of communication between micro controllers inside devces 3 EIL No Preset Table There is no configuration inside device SPI Flash Error An internal error of micro controller SPI communication Para Table Error Data error of table which store some important information of configuration O 2012 ATEIS Preset Table Error The structure of configuration is not compatible with current firmware Ateis Studio Trans Error An internal hw error of device Power Error The power circuit inside device is error TEL Error s communication between main controller unit and telephone is Main FPGA Error
279. t noise measures The less value is more sensitivty it means the compensation gain of paging input is response more quickly of environment noise if the sampling time is smaller e Target Level Determine which relative volume you want to target e White Noise Level White noise level automatically Adjusted by the calibration e Noise Threshold The level of background noise measured when calibration button pressed e AGC Level Display the current compensation gain e Calibration Click on to start the automatic calibration procedure e Calibration Proceeding Lit all along the calibration procedure e Calibration Finish Green led light on if the calibration procedure is success e Over Indicates the calibration result The white noise level needed is over the range A pop up window will shows you what to do e Under Indicates the calibration result The white noise level needed is under the range A pop up window will show you what to do e AR Time Attack and release time e Paging Activity Light up when the paging is active when P M is above the mode threshold 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 309 e Decrease Zone Indicates that the AGC gain is decreasing e Dead Zone Indicates that the AGC is not changing e Increase Zone Indicates that the AGC gain is increasing e Fast Increase Zone Indicates that the AGC gain is increasing fast e Sensing Mic Level Show the input level of the sensing microphone e C Sensi
280. t one backup amplifier serve more than four zones See the below figure an Ateis Net system is consist of one IDA8C and two IDA8Ss there are 24 zones in the system divide into three backup amplifier groups For each group there is an backup amplifier to redundant if any of normal amplifier in the group is failure To group zones you need to wiring AMPI and AMPO between backup amplifier connectors red wires show the wire connections to group zones e Ateis Studio pn x4 Ke e E Zone 1 4 e EET ZONES PSAP AMPA AMP INPUT 5 A B d EA E d EH ll EE TM EIS ESL t cle dc ET E L d dE Backup IDA8C V ES E E ineuts Group sengt Zone5 8 E GETT TH 3 A B ont SITT Ateis Net WE ao x4 Backup A MP INPUT 5 Grou 2 Zone 9 12 ea Wuert Line b Lin Li va Linea ZONES ZOBE7 Z p AIB E GH CS ep K EHE E E GES HE HB S IDA8C zone proven cones ar ae INPUTS 31 Zone 13 16 A B Tg Q L1 ae ee ee ee ZONES mm ae L d EE SANH EE MANH EE et Backup aa x4 Group3 Zone 17 20 4 MPINPUT 5 ETT NEN Erem A B ESP IDA8C PONE zones zones H meneurs H KA aci bri Pai Bed Fgh Fags Kad Pages VE Exil fedi egi Zone 21 24 TT IT AIB Rod TT T sh Advance Backup Amplifier Setu
281. t to line A speaker e LINE B Connect ot line B speaker e S LINE A Connect to speaker zone output line A of secondary audio processor e S LINE B Connect to speaker zone output line B of secondary audio processor 14 Zone Amplifier Output There are 8 zones for amplifier output connection it receive the gained audio signal coming from normal amplifier each amplifier output consist of three connectors e P AMPO Connect to normal amplifier output connector of primary audio processor e AMPO Connect to output of normal amplifiers e S AMPO Connect to normal amplifier output connector of secondary audio processor O 2012 ATEIS 120 Ateis Studio 15 Backup Amplifier Output There are two backup amplifier outputs on RU MAIN each output consist of three connectors e P AMPO Connect to backup amplifier output of primary audio processor e AMPO Connect to backup amplifier output e S AMPO Connect to backup amplifier output of secondary audio processor 16 Backup Amplifier Input There are two backupt amplifier inputs on RU MAIN each input consist of three connectors where N is the number of channel e P BKP N Connect to backup amplifier input of primary audio processor e BKP N Connect to input of backup amplifier e S BKP N Connect to backup amplifier input of secondary audio processor 4 2 1 4 RU PDC 4 2 1 4 1 Overview RU MAIN sg 4 Wi Primary IDA8C OR Secondary IDA8C 7m dE H UEM SG URCAS PDC
282. te audio of the channel e RTO Indicates an input channel Routed To Output s e Overload This LED light up if the signal of input channel greater than Overload Thd 2012 ATEIS 32 Ateis Studio e Volume Meter showing the channel RMS level e Signal Indicates audio signal presence above 30 dB from chosen Sensitivity e Level Signal output level of the channel Overload Thd A threshold value to determine signal of a channel is overload or not 6 9 3 Stereo Input Component Template Main DSP Components Ste DSP Component GJ Input ee Stereo Input E Stereo Input B E Stereo Input C E Stereo Input D in lk Duplex Input A Inverter e DH Level Controller Component Appearance Description For AES EBU input output the elements inside the component is very similar as Input component except without Sensitivity and Phantom Power The audio input to the channel 1 of the board go to the component Stereo Input X channel 1 amp 2 And board channel 3 to Stereo Input X channel 3 amp 4 4 Control Window O 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 36 ES Stereo ee A eae COverlaad ature ag i Signal S verlaad Thea dB Element Properties EE E Voume 500 500 200 todo dB Signed Of L Le 0 60 200 01 dB OveloadThd 0 200 200 201 dB va Element De
283. te number for triggering an event e Logic In Define which condition triggers linked events e Logic Out Define output signal state after linked event executed basically there are two cases need to considerate event execute success and failed To setup this configuration you need select the working output signal first 2012 ATEIS 378 Ateis Studio M Event Trigger Component dien iussi 2311s e TaT y EI P v PF e PF PF Jf Modify Ed Remove In above figure the logic output channel 4 and 6 are selected to detail settings click the grid cell ay Event Trigger Response Status AS In above figure the settings means when Event 1 is Failed output 4 will be 1 and output 6 will be 0 and when Event1 is successfully executed the output 4 will be 0 output 6 will be 1 6 12 5 Logic Control ve Component Template Main DSP Components Er Je DSP Component Si Je Logic E lE re Control 2 3 Logic Gate oS Logic Meter Component Appearance 2012 ATEIS 6 12 6 Components of Audio Processor 379 ve Description This component allow user to generate logic signal using button in software For each channel there is an element for control logic signal for output r Control Window P X Logic Control 4 Elements e On Off To output logic signal O or 1 Logic Meter Component Template Main DSP Components Ste
284. tion 2012 ATEIS 304 Ateis Studio Comp limiter is a combination of the Compressor and the Limiter Components Control Window Limiter Gei reduction Lg Release dB Gc Comp Limiter P hreshold ES Gzch op time ime A time time Element Properties re NEMECHNE Lo BEE NERONE 0 200 100 500 p 20 10 200 Treshold Compresso 100 60 0 0 Attack Time Compressor 10 1 f 100 Gain Reduction 1 o o o va Element Description e Bypass Bypasses the Comp limiters function e Soft Knee Enables disables the Soft Knee mode e Limiting Limiter Indicates limiting 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 30 e Hard Clipping Limiter Enables disables the Hard clipping mode e Threshold Limiter Sets the threshold level above which limiting begins e Release Time Limiter Sets the time it takes to release gain reduction e Compress Compressor Indicates compression e Ratio Compressor Sets compression ratio e Threshold Compressor Sets the threshold level above which compression begins e Release Time Compressor Sets the time it takes to release gain reduction e Attack Time Compressor Sets the time it takes to respond to the input signal e Gain Reduction Reflects the current amount of gain reduction ve Graphical Control Window I GPC Comp Limiter
285. tion Comment DC Input 18V 26V Typical 24V 150mA Microphone Output e Maximum level 6dBu e Output Impedance 100Ohm e THD 1kHz lt 0 1 e Bandwidth 3dB 200Hz 20kHz va Front Panel Speaker e Impedance 8Ohm e Maximum Power 1kHz 1W e THD 1kHz lt 1 e Bandwidth 3dB 200Hz 20kHz ge Cable length 100m control and power on the same cable 900m when power line connects to junction box Comes standard with Junction box JB and CAT5 cable 1 5 2012 ATEIS Product Features 179 4 2 10 Fireman Microphone 4 2 10 1 Overview The Fireman Microphone SHM 1 is a small compact microphone dedicated to security calling It is a totally monitored microphone with internal resistor network to detect four different states Shortcut Closed Contact Open Contact Absent Firemen Microphone SHM 1 for All call group or zone calls 4 2 10 2 Characteristics d Case e Dimension 62mm W x 45mm L x 102mm H e Weight 0 15KG e Cable 1 8M spring cord Microphone e Bandwidth 3dB 300Hz 6kHz e Impedance 500ohm e Sensitivity 72dB 4 2 10 3 Configuration Fireman microphone needs config using Ateis Studio before working Fireman is the DSP component for the microphone Most of time Fireman component is working with Network Paging component in such settings fireman microphone is able to paging 2012 ATEIS 180 Ateis Studio E ho wm o on Ea Lees
286. tion e Leakage Threshold 1k ohm A threshold value for leakage detection If leakage impedance lower than this value the fault Leakage Occurrence is detected e Leakage Calibration If system detect a leakage fault but the circuit does really not have this problem after doing some propriety check it need to do a leakage calibration to make monitor function working fine O 2012 ATEIS Product Features 107 4 1 6 8 Tone Settings A IvVlonitor Matrix Mode IDASC 1 Zone Monitor Normal Amplifier Monitor Backup Amplifier Manitor Leakage Impedance ohm Reference A ohm Reference B ohm Reference A amp B ohm Current Amp Measure ohm 18k or 20k Zone koe Hi 2 3 4 5 6 H 8 Global Settings Zone Settings Normal Amplifier Settings Backup Amplifier Settings Tone Settings Zones with dB Level dE Frequency Hz Frequency 20K EM Enable 1K Tone BEN DEB Start Time hh mm 00 00 period hh mm 00 01 In the lower part of window Monitoring Matrix Mode IDA8C S X There is a page Tone Settings for configuring tone signal which is utilized for monitoring There are two kind of settings gr Zones with OdB If audio signal from Amplifier Zone Output is not go back IDA8C S for monitoring It allow user to mix a tone into that signal for further detection You can change this setting in Zone Settings tab and Mode field There are parameters of
287. tion design and then to store the compiled configuration into the device System IDABC 1 Master Preset Master Preset E Most part of those windows has short access in the Tools bar We are going to introduce you every items To learn how to use those items please refer to the create a project and how to sections d System Selector The combo box close to text System to switch system to be current system all actions in the tools bar is working on the current system The actions include master preset changing store online offline audio enable disable O 2012 ATEIS 236 Ateis Studio 5 1 12 Master Preset Selector The combo box close to text Master Preset to switch master preset Master Preset Settings EI Open the master preset settings window 4 Sub Preset Settings Open the sub preset settings window Event LE Open event settings window 4 Compile All Start the compile process The software verifies that no major errors remain before uploading the design into Audio Processor Store All E Start the compilation process and then uploads your design into the audio processor 4 Save Parameters L Save parameters to device s flash Online Ei To make Ateis Studio online with audio processors after online the parameter will be synchronized adjustment of parameters too When Ateis Studio is online with devices designing configuration is not allowed 4 Offline E2 To make Ateis Stud
288. to discovery URC200 TPCs throughout the network Remote G2 Devices avires UeviL e We K j Bi Serial N o A TES EIS n t un SSC SE jetID IP SubMask Sh T VATE TA Gateway Net State 3 The result of a search is like below In the field Devices devices are represented using a tree each leaf node of the tree is a device The URC200 is one of them in the grid Remote G2 Ateis Device is ECS ECS 1 ECS 1 ECS 3 ECS 2 Rief IDAGC 1 IDASC 1 IDAS Chris 1010101 131 126 PATI NES ES iM Nd Esc Ve SerialNO Ateis Net 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 192 168 100 231 192 168 100 12 192 168 101 182 192 168 100 46 192 168 100 5 192 168 100 19 192 168 101 5 192 168 101 6 192 168 101 3 192 168 101 7 SHEET Sub Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 252 0 TAA Ga I Leva 192 168 100 254 192 168 10 254 192 168 100 254 192 168 100 254 192 168 100 254 192 168 100 254 192 168 100 254 192 168 100 254 192 166 100 254 192 168 100 254 2012 ATEIS Product Features 201 4 There is a box Function List at the right side of the window By select the entry of the grid the items inside the box changes accordingly to list all the functions that the device provide Select entry
289. to device editing window click on the block of DNM device A DNM Preset window pops up There is a combo box to select the cooperate DSP component for the DNM device Sa DNM Preset D Zen Component Bul Mone ee dE DRM ae MEM 9 To assign the DNM component to device 2012 ATEIS Product Features 133 Devices D Audio Processors 4 Remotes M Device List Device Name URC AS gt 458 Speakers gt Others Device Management 3rd Party Control Command 3rd Party Control List t Device Management Ateis ECS 1 ECS 1 1 119 192 168 101 80 Normal E Ateis Fault a IDASC 1 1 8888 192 168 100 120 Fault IDABC 1 o0 DNM DNM 1 1 12345 Click dnm i L Ateis Normal Search Clear Search Timeout Interval 5 gt S Search By IP 10 Store the configuration and then online 11 Click DNM component to open it s element window press button Calibration to start the calibration procedure When it is calibrating the red LED will light up and the White Noise Level dB will be auto tuning Sending out a low frequency tone Note White Noise Level dB is appropriate to stop around 20cB 2012 ATEIS 134 Ateis Studio i Sensing Mic Level Hz db O Sensing Mic Level Hz db 64 0 fGiSensing Mic Leve LE Time Oms Sensing Mic Leve dB jz Time dB ero White Nois Noise White Nois EA L
290. ton Update to start updating procedure which uploads the firmware program to the device s flash memory There are progress bars for each URC200 TPC displaying the progress of the procedure Once updating is finished please press the button Restart to restart the deuce and make the change takes effect O 2012 ATEIS 22 Ateis Studio A Machine Update Viewer pas ees i z TONES en na Kal oes iV E MEss T TD Vi NO WIE VICE Mane i JENA NO LEY a URC200 eel 192 160 101 192 s Gs ics Soe 4 2 14 5 2 Protected Mode There are some internal settings of URC200 TPC Those settings are in the protected mode menu To enter the protected mode please hold both two buttons and turn the knob URC200 UNIVERSAL REMOTE CO The internal settings are Network This page contains following settings e IP Address e Sub Mask e Gateway Basically those values should be defined before using a URC200 TPC 2012 ATEIS Product Features 203 Version This page displays the firmware version of URC200 TPC 4 S B This page is comprised of two settings e Saver Time The waiting time that the menu go back to root page e Black Time The waiting time that the URC200 TPC enters sleep mode Note The unit of the value is minute Reset If you modify the settings belong to protected mode please execute this function to save value and take effect n Return Execute this function to go back
291. trol Window FeedBack 1 5 Oct 8 Band l E F La W e Sharpest Bypass ES NN Frequency Pn Bandwidth Frequency Bandwidth Gain L Lock Fiter Hz Oct Gis Level Hz Level Oct LevelfdB E E m DEED SSS gt Se amd o T 20 001 Poo e TEST iM H 191 2 Lae IT IST IST Seer BT Fon Fann Is Ta oor Ta TEEN bh B Element Properties e Generate Information Initial Minimum Maximum Precision Unit Bypass Of Hod On 2 20000 1 0 01 0 01 Off 20 H 0 01 0 01 0 01 Off Off Off Eom ooo o oz LL E BEEN Eom BEE 20 2000 1 Hz i 001 001 Hz i O0 600 o O01 dB Of T amp 1 FL 1 20 20 200 1 H i 001 001 i Reset All 1 dB ie o a L a C o a T a 1 dB 01 dB 0 30 Detect Level 30 0 40 0 Depth 200 60 0 60 0 600 o 01 60 0 J of j On j of j of j 6 30 60 1 30 0 400 0o 01 NEEONES 2012 ATEIS Components of Audio Processor 337 ve Element Description e Bypass Bypass the feedback s module l By clicking on Bypass you will erase the captured values e Hold When a Larsen is detected and a frequency locked the component hold this setting e Manual To enable the Frequency Bandwidth and Gain fader to be used manually Unable the automatic d
292. trol protocols IDA8C TC Protocol i DN NM Ateis 3rd Part Ethernet UDP UDP Port es Read Write value of parameters TOL 19761 e Stepped adjustment for parameters e Level control e Paging je Read Monitoring Status Modbus PDC RS485 PDC Port 1 EE e Play Message e Logic l O Control 4 1 4 6 Peripherals Following table is the peripherals supported by IDA8S Device Connection Max Num Fireman MIC m MA a Paging where operator is close to IDA8C 2UPDC PPM AS 31 PDC Remote console for with paging ability Remote console for Paging Event Triggering Element Control E Pos pre Master Sub Preset Control URC AS NM 4 PDC Remote console for Master Sub Preset Controlling Element Controlling URGP 1 PDC Evacuation Input extension 1 PDC Auto noise gain for audio signals PPM IT5 Ethernet GE Paging Element Control Master Sub Preset Control on Ethernet Eth Limit Parameters Control Master Sub Preset Control ERE 31 PDC Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console with 8 buttons zones 31 PDC Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console with 16 buttons zones CD Touch 4 PDC Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console with touch screen and Fireman Microphone Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console with telephone 31 PDC l styled microphone A grouped console is comprised of a pad with monitoring 31 PDC speaker a pad with a gooseneck and 8 buttons zones two pads with 8 buttons zones A
293. tructure on Devices field IP address of the device we want to config is 192 168 100 79 Device Management 3rd Party Control Command EJ 3rd Party Control List Ateis Mets Ateis Ateis Ateis ECS 1 Lh ee ah Search Clear Search Timeout Interval 5 Search By IP 8 Connect to device Click Connect link to open menu of IDA8C Device Management 3rd Party Control Command EJ 3rd Party Control List 2 Device Management IDASC 1 1 Search Timeout Interval 5 gt 5 Search By IP 2012 ATEIS Quick Start 21 9 Check compatibility between device and Ateis Studio Click Read Version of menu Device Management 3rd Party Control Command 3rd Party Control List Device Management Ates Net Serial Number Disconnect Update Ateis Telephone Card Setting Reverse E Ateis j Redundancy ECS 1 Leen ica El _ ATEIS NET Deploying Clear Search Timeout Interval 5 5 Search By IP Search Remote A window Version opened press button Read And then information about version is display in the grid Su Version Compatible Version Current Version MECU 1 0 0 26 DSP 1 0 8 0 Net Card 2 11 4 FPGA None H all firmware unit are compatible with Ateis Studio go to step 11 otherwise step 10 The below figure is an example of incompatible version of firmware unit See the red rectangle V Version Compatible Version MECU 1 0
294. ts of Audio Processor 29 6 Now look the Over Under red led If both Over Under led are OFF it means the calibration has properly finished and the ANG is ready If one of the Over Under led light ON it means the white noise level needed is out of range 7 Depending of the issue a pop up window will show you what to do Follow the most usefully advice and restart the calibration procedure until the both Over Under led are OFF after the calibration r d Calibration Result Over Ix bin Ke EE EE EE iim CHEER Calibration Result Under EXE Unger sa 8 The system is properly set Even when the paging is not active the ANG is still adjusting the AGC level with the ambient noise to be ready when the paging will begin Notice e The calibration should be done in normal ambient noise shouldn t have suddenly loud noise during calibration e Do not adjust the gain of output amplifier or sensing microphone during or after calibration You can adjust volume of the audio source connected to P M input e Theoretically when the calibration has finished the AGC level will be stable around O dB in the environment of no increasing noise But every calibration might exist deviation if the AGC O 2012 ATEIS ome Ateis Studio level is not stable aroundO dB user could adjust the gain of output function amplifier or sensing microphone to let AGC level stable around 0 dB e When th
295. ttenuation Step 0 0 6 01 dB NOM Attenuation Max 0 f 0 10 0 1 d8 L Rums enGan 000 209 1 000104 f e Open Mic Limits Nolimt CC UU EL INEEEENEN step ve Element Description e Type Select the mode manual or automatic O 2012 ATEIS 394 Ateis Studio Manual mode Only manual channel activation threshold and priority are ignored Automatic mode With priority and threshold channel activation Last Mic On Designated Defines which channel will stay open Only if Last Mic On is activated EN the channel will stay open even if it s muted Mute Mutes or un mutes the channel input Invert Inverts the polarity of the input channel Solo Solos the input channel the channel goes directly to the output Gate On Shows activation status of the input channel Level Adjusts the level of the output channel Manual mode Only used in manual mode see Manual Automatic It allows manual channel activation Automatic mode priority level Sets the priority level of the channel 1 is the most priority Output Mute Mutes or un mutes the module s output Output Level Sets the module s output level Threshold Sets the threshold for channel activation Background Threshold Sets how the input signal is interpreted to open a gate The background level will increase the input activation level Hold Time Sets the threshold for channel activation Attenuation Response Time Set
296. ub Preset Control KEE Ethernet Eth Limit Parameters Control Master Sub Preset Control 31 PDC Wall mounted cabinet W console with 8 buttons CD16 31 PDC Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console with 16 buttons zones CD Touch 4 PDC Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console with touch screen and Fireman Microphone CP C Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console with telephone 31 PDC l styled microphone PDC PDC PDC PDC CDPA PDC 31 PDC Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console with 24 buttons PDC PDC DC COPA zones and 2 extra selectable microphone sources A grouped console is comprised of a pad with monitoring 31 PDC speaker a pad with a gooseneck and 8 buttons zones two pads with 8 buttons zones Deskpad 4 PDC A remote dialer for making telephone calls via IDA8 s telephone hardware Deskpad 4 PDC It s a RF transceiver to communication between Deskpad and Box IDA8 use it Deskpad can working without physcial connection 4 1 2 6 3rd Party Control The following table list 3rd Party Control protocols IDA8C Supported Protocol Ateis 3rd E Part Ethernet UDP UDP Port e Read Write value of parameters Sie 19761 e Stepped adjustment for parameters Level control Paging Read Monitoring Status Modbus PDC RS485 PDC Port 1 2 EEN Play Message Logic WC Control O 2012 ATEIS 48 Ateis Studio 4 1 3 IDA8SL 4 1 3 1 Overview CD 16 Fire Panel PSS AS Redundancy
297. udio if there is some noise detected by DNM O 2012 ATEIS 136 Ateis Studio 4 2 2 5 Operation Notice Once the calibration is successful don t adjust the level in the rear of DNM component ex Monitor Out C s level or amplifier gain etc but the level can be adjusted which is front of the DNM component ex Input A level or PC output volume etc 4 2 2 6 Two DNM on the Same PDC If the system needs to use more than one DNM and to connect a DNM series on same RS485 port then the user should plug in the DNM one by one connecting a DNM series to RS485 port The steps of plug in is same as above Note The DNM should be connected to a different ID and Series number 1 For each DNM plug into the RS485 port of IDA8C S and assign an ID for it ID Remote Type a DES 1 0 0 2 m m Lu 2012 ATEIS Product Features 137 O0005 1 0 0 2 2 After connecting two DNM one by one then connect the DNM to a series Click the Refresh button to read back the information now these two DNMs are listed on the grid Remote Type se 1 0 0 2 0000s 1 0 0 2 8 Only P55 A5 Refresh Plug In 3 In the configuration file draw the DNM component out and connect to RS485 port same with real wiring lf the system has two DNM then draw two DNM device components the example is two DNM in PDC1 O 2012 ATEIS 138 Ateis Studio 100 200 300 400 I8 3 002 NN a Je Audio Processors ER
298. ugged on PDC connector 2 PDC Peripherals Device Controller Connectors There are 2 sets of PDC port in IDA8RU PDC each set consist of three connectors allow system to do one PDC peripheral redundancy the N is the number of set e P PDCN Connect to one of primary audio processor s PDC connectors O 2012 ATEIS 122 Ateis Studio e PDCN Connect to peripheral which communicates to audio processor using PDC interface for example PSS AS PPM AS e S PDCN Connect to one of secondary audio processor s PDC connectors 3 IDA8 Telephone Connector There are two connectors for IDA8 telephone line e Primary Audio Processor Telephone Connect to telephone line connector of primary audio processor e Secondary Audio Processor Telephone Connect to telephone line connector of secondary audio processor 4 Telephone Line Connector There are two connectors for telephone line of telephone company e Tel Line1 Line1 for telephone company connection e Tel Line2 Line2 for telephone company connection 5 Telephone Line Audio Output for Record Audio output of active telephone line 6 Active Control Expansion Output This port output logic signal to next RU devices to synchronize redundancy state which tells primary or secondary is active T Fault This port is a logic contact which is normally closed opened if the unit is set to be slave refer to Master Slave Switch of later item and a short or open is detected on S WD Se
299. uration Note that only the Master unit is secured Slaves are not The buttons can represent a single zone or a group of zones All buttons can be programmed with drag amp drop features from the software The PTT button can be programmed for Push To Talk or for latching functionality The unit offers Hold and Busy LED signals in addition to the zone LED s and these allow the easy identification of Selection Busy signals for the user In addition to comply with EN 54 16 separate POWER FAULT and EVAC indicators are provided The RS485 communication protocol offers daisy chaining of up to 300 m on a simple CAT5 cable and 2012 ATEIS Product Features 173 yet makes outlets easy to connect via a standard RJ45 connector 4 2 8 2 Control Panel ATEIS CD8 PAGING CONSOLE A ALL CALL RELEASE 1 Fireman Microphone Hook An U shape hook to place fireman microphone 2 LED Test Button Test LED on control panel after pressing this button all LEDs light up and then off 3 Talk Indicator This LED light up if PCP is allowed to paging on the other word the paging request has been acknowledged d Sometime after paging request is granted zones under paging still can be occupied by other sources In such a case the talk led still light up but you can check busy LED to know the situation 4 Busy Indicator Show the status of zone Red Permanent Priority of the zone is lower than other sources Blinkin
300. ure During the save period the field progress in the grid shows the percentage the save procedure done de IpStmesSethingsFm 192 168 101 192 ST co Maen 4 2 14 4 4 Reset Configuation Sometimes if URC200 TPC power on with error it needs to ignore current configuration and reset to the default status Holds on both two keys on the panel and plugs the ethernet wire to URC200 TPC to power on See the following demonstration 2012 ATEIS Product Features 199 After power up you ll the a message on the top of LCD screen No Preset It means the URC200 TPC now is forbidden to run the configuration And then you can save another configuration for the device to make it working 4 2 14 5 Device Maintenance This topic contains the knowledge about the update procedure and inner settings of devices For example the IP settings 4 2 14 5 1 Update Firmware Please follow the steps below to update the firmware of URC200TPC 1 Lunch software and search URC200TPC Click page Network Set the network interface card that communicate with URC200TPC After the network interface card is selected the IP address is refreshed automatically O 2012 ATEIS 20 Ateis Studio ZS Remote G2 Network Interface Card iroadcom MetLink TM Gigabit Ethernet Packet Scheduler Miniport IP Address 192 168 100 77 2 Click page Remote Device This page lists all devices in the network Press the button Search
301. ure Logo A Logo B stored in an URC AS for logo Under this mode the logo is display permanently using the one selected on combo box e Advertisement Mode In this mode two pictures are display in turn the time to switch picture is in the editor on the right e Waiting Time To specify how long will show Logo pictures when URC AS idled Remote Plug in It need to do a Remote Plug in to make audio processor recognize this remote devices See the 2012 ATEIS Product Features 167 topic Remote Plug in for more details Assign to Design Objects The device object in design window needs map to physical device then the configuration of the device can be set to the physical one Click Name field of device list to select correspond device object Refer to topic search and settings for more detail 4 2 6 URGP 4 2 6 1 Overview EVAC UATICN FAULT URGP32 The URGP is an extension unit to the IDA8 Systems Each URGP will provde those systems with 32 additional alarm inputs Each input is monitored and can be programmed to trigger a digital audio message into a specific zone or group of zones The URGP is linked to the System units trough a RS232 RS485 monitored serial link 4 2 6 2 Characteristics d Case Dimension 140mm W x 75mm L x 44mm H Weight 0 48KG Power __ttem__ ___Voltage ____ Current Consumption __Comment__ DC Input 24VDC po 380mA Le Maximum Cable Length RS485 600m on Catego
302. us of audio processor if primary audio processor is crash RU MAIN will detected and switch to secondary audio processor 4 2 1 3 2 Front Panel 1 Secondary Active Indicator This LED light up if primary audio processor is active 2 Primary Active Indicator This LED light up if secondary audio processor is active 3 Fault Indicator This LED light up if the unit is set to be slave and a short or open is detected on S WD Secondary Watching Dog port A If this indicator light up it means there is an error of the unit user needs to check wiring of S WD connector or replace by a good unit 4 Power Indicator This LED light up if this unit is power on 4 2 1 3 3 Rear Panel 3 W C SIOE WD W U En EI FAW L E EEN es ER d ER ee 1 GE Kei A Pik Ka ae Ke Pati Eil ke Ke Kei Ka Ei EPI E Pa Kei ke Eat EPI USES Ke E LE WE E RER LEE IS CR ipa f osa oo ima ima PT Go Geo Lian P LAEN imag OE Lau dk Ze E cm Lekt eg d e la Ze rd Cees fo d e we d h4 4d 13 2012 ATEIS one Ateis Studio 1 PDC Audio Output for Record The audio output of peripheral plugged on PDC connector 2 PDC Connectors There are 2 sets of PDC port in RU Main each set consist of three connectors allow system to do one PDC peripheral redundancy the N is the number of set e P PDC N Connect to one of primary audio processor s PDC connectors e PDC N Connect to peripheral which communicates to audio
303. ut e Maximum level 6dBu e Output Impedance 100Ohm e THD 1kHz lt 196 O 2012 ATEIS Product Features 175 e Bandwidth 3dB 200Hz 20kHz Front Panel Speaker e Impedance 8Ohm e Maximum Power 1kHz 1W e THD 1kHz 1 e Bandwidth 3dB 200Hz 8kHz ve Cable length 100m control and power on the same cable 900m when power line connects to junction box d Comes standard with Junction box JB and CAT5 cable 1 5 4 2 9 CD16 4 2 9 1 Overview CD16 Wall mounted cabinet remote paging console for Ateis audio processor CD16 PAGING CONSOLE J EVAC A POWER LED TEST ALL CALL RELEASE Wall mount heaw duty remote paging console with Access level 2 protection to comply with the EN 54 16 Compatible with Ateis audio processor and communicates over a dedicated RS485 for Power audio O 2012 ATEIS 176 4 2 9 2 Ateis Studio and DATA The unit comprises of 16 zones 16 buttons with fist firemen s microphone in a metal surface mount wall box It provides robust IP 30 protection Each CD16 contains a PMM PS Master PCB with extension keypad and uses the same architecture as for the PPM AS series of microphone consoles Each Ateis audio processor like IDA8C can handle up to 31 CD16 units per 485 port in Master Slave configuration Note that only the Master unit is secured Slaves are not The buttons can represent a single zone or a group of zones All buttons can be programmed with drag amp drop
304. ut Backup Amplifier show the general case of audio routing using normal amplifier the number in figure is the sequence of audio path O 2012 ATEIS a Ateis Studio Audio after DSP Processing Zone 2 inm 4 1 ZONE 1 fm GEM m 7 mmm MIPINPUTS 4 3 Normal Amplifier Backup Amplifier Audio Routing without Backup Amplifier The figure Audio Routing with Backup Amplifier shows the amplifier backup case for audio routing When a error of normal amplifier is detected by IDA8X IDA8X will change audio path from normal amplifier to backup amplifier and generate a fault to warning user that there was an amplifier fault detected by system please take care about it Audio after DSP Processing Zone 2 We Gaz _ emm ZONE 2 pe ONES ee a Koap __SackupAMP1 E aaa Backup Amplifier Normal Amplifier E Audio Routing with Backup Amplifier Share the Backup Amplifier For the most of case two amplifier should not be failure at the same time it means the possibility of more than two amplifier failure is pretty low It is no necessary to have a backup amplifier for each zone because most of time the back up amplifiers are just wait for the case of normal amplifier fail If one of normal amplifier fail one backup amplifier can take over immediately at the mean time technical stuff should switch the bad amplifier at a short time During the time of amplifier backup It is al
305. will have a selection square then you can group the components in one component e Ungroup of This function split grouped components to single component It s the reverse of the Group function Wiring Mode e Normal Line Select Normal Line if you want to draw the wire with different angles O 2012 ATEIS mm Ateis Studio e Right Angle e Select Right Angle if you want to draw the wire only with right angles 90 degrees e Auto Corner p Select Auto Corner if you want that the wires are automatically arranged to have proper corner with separated wires and with right angles Signal Path Mode e Signal Path Disable s Disable the signal path highlighting function When it s not disabled the signal path function allows seeing where an audio signal is sent through the design The signal path is highlighted in red To understand what this function is please see the next chapters e Signal Path Mouse Move ap In this mode by placing the mouse on a signal link the signal link and the entire signal path linked will be highlighted in red In this example the input C1 is routed in the matrix to the output 1 and 2 If you place the mouse on the link of the channel 1 then the signal path on the output 1 and 2 will be displayed in red espe E Standard Mor Eie 2012 ATEIS O 2012 ATEIS System Functionality e Signal Path Temporary d In this mode by selecting a sign
306. with new Ateis products Ateis Studio also offers control and configuration for power amplifiers microphone consoles and remote controllers such as PSS AS URC AS It supervises controls logs and reports The whole system configuration can be stored and reloaded at the push of a button Preset depending upon the application Customers can design their own graphic user interface or control panel s as well as program automatic sequences Events and create different levels of user groups Security Ateis Studio proudes a complete set of tools and building blocks for real time control monitoring and design of an audio system or Voice Evacuation system from paging desk to loudspeaker Detailed information such as signal levels loudspeaker impedance pre recorded messages amplifier conditions and other parameters can be monitored in real time A library of control and monitoring elements GUI graphical user interface are provided and includes items such as volume control faders various metering high level EQ Compression Limiting Auto Gain Noise sensing Mixing quick buttons and display elements The behaviour of these elements are completely configurable for customer control design The combination of these GUI tools allows a user to create a control surface that is effective easy to operate regardless of the user s technical knowledge Additional security is available through the use of password protected layers according to the EN 5
307. yer items in the menu system 2012 ATEIS 194 Ateis Studio EE EN 2021 192 168 101 192 S 4 Click the button on field Link for the desired menu item It opens the CMD settings window Press button Add to establish an item in the menu for controlling parameter of the device 2012 ATEIS Product Features 195 e IpStingsSettingsFm zm Lais ac CL P ive r T Sek cho data to display gt 6 Click buttons on the field Link to open the command list window Press button Add to create a command string 2012 ATEIS me Ateis Studio Sg T CMD Settings Audio S CHD Settings Andio LETEL cho data to display Le CHD Settings ECS LEVEL Add H Remove J Up H Dow 8 Clink link field to fill the detail settings of the command string 2012 ATEIS Product Features 197 Ses Transmit Timeout SUCCESS Fail The fields in the grid are described below e Type To indicate the communication protocol used this field is read only e P The IP address of the device be controlled e Port The port number of the device be controlled e Transmit The command string for controlling the parameter of the target device When the user selects the item of menu and press button Enter on the panel this string will send to the target device e Timeout Due to the networking quality could be varied in the different envronme

Ateis Studio

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents